Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Wake Up Kiwi
    The New Zealand Government: A United States SEC Registered Corporation  |  Who Owns New Zealand's Banks - And Australia's Banks - Anyone's Banks?
 
Wake Up Kiwi
 
Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

· Home / Introduction

CURRENT AFFAIRS

· Current Events & Breaking News

· Cabal / Illuminati / NWO Watch

· Mainstream Media Manipulation

· Banking Crimes & Criminals

· Political Crimes & Criminals

· Feature Articles

· Positive Developments

ILLUMINATI / NWO

· NWO Globalist Agenda

· Secret Societies & The Illuminati

· Conspiracy To Rule The World

· What / Who Is "The Crown"?

· Agenda 21 In New Zealand

· Surveillance Society/Police State

· 'Terrorism' & Engineered Wars

· Eugenics / Depopulation Agenda

· Religion As A Tool For Control

· Common Law Vs Statute Law

SCIENCE / TECHNOLOGY

· The Climate Change Scam

· Chemtrails & Geoengineering

· Suppressed Science

· Positive New Technologies

· Cures, Health & Wellbeing

· Dangerous & Dirty Technology

· Spiritual Aspects & Metaphysics

· The Extra-Terrestrial Presence

HISTORY

· Suppressed / Hidden History

· Real New Zealand History

· The Opal File: NZ / AUS History

· 150+ NWO Globalist Quotes

MISCELLANEOUS

· Political Commentary

· Positive Resources

· Resistance, Resources & Links

· Contact


Newsletter archive - click here

Site Search:






 

Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
News Archives



 

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Poll Shows Americans Waking Up, Majority Now Suspects Unelected Shadow Government In Charge
May 31 2018 | From: TheFreeThoughtProject

According to a Monmouth University Poll that was released this week, the majority of Americans believes that a group of unelected government and military officials secretly manipulate the United State government from behind the scenes.




According to the poll, both democrats and republicans feel that there is a “deep state” faction that works in secrecy and exists to shape policy as well as spy on American citizens.

Related: Trump: ‘Criminal Deep State’ Caught Up In ‘Major Spy Scandal’


A majority of the American public believe that the U.S. government engages in widespread monitoring of its own citizens and worry that the U.S. government could be invading their own privacy. The Monmouth University Poll also finds a large bipartisan majority who feel that national policy is being manipulated or directed by a “Deep State” of unelected government officials.

Americans of color on the center and left and NRA members on the right are among those most worried about the reach of government prying into average citizens’ lives.”

Not only do the majority assert that there is indeed a deep state, but they also readily admit that they think the US government is actively engaged in surveillance against its own citizens. Again, illustrating the ominous nature of such a notion, party lines did not matter. The suspicion of the government violating the rights of its own citizens is bipartisan.


Fully 8-in-10 believe that the U.S. government currently monitors or spies on the activities of American citizens, including a majority (53%) who say this activity is widespread and another 29% who say such monitoring happens but is not widespread. Just 14% say this monitoring does not happen at all. There are no substantial partisan differences in these results..”



Related: Former High Ranking CIA Agent Gives A Break Down On What The US Deep State And Shadow Government Is Comprised Of

“This is a worrisome finding. The strength of our government relies on public faith in protecting our freedoms, which is not particularly robust. And it’s not a Democratic or Republican issue. These concerns span the political spectrum,” said Patrick Murray, director of the independent Monmouth University Polling Institute.

What’s more, only a small fraction of the people who were polled believe that this widespread 1984-style police state is justified. According to the poll, only 18% of Americans are asleep enough to believe that Uncle Sam watching their every move is warranted - a heartening statistic indeed.

This brings us to the question of why so many Americans [Westerners] feel that they are being spied on and controlled by shadow government officials who operate in secret?

The answer is quite simple: because it’s true!

As the torrent of Podesta emails from WikiLeaks exposed the crimes of the Clinton dynasty in 2016, the FBI followed up by releasing their own documents that were just as damning. 



Related: Deep State? What About Elite Television News Anchors?

Buried inside 100 pages of heavily redacted interview summaries from the FBI’s investigation into Clinton, Americans were exposed to a series of allegations that were nothing short of bombshell - documenting an ultra-secret, high-level group within the government, who were actually referred to as “The Shadow Government.”

This Shadow Government has long been kept in the dark realms of conspiracy theory. However, thanks to the efforts of WikiLeaks and the push by Americans for more transparency, the truth has now become stranger and even more corrupt than fiction.

With every action recorded, phone tapped, innocent family surveilled, right stripped, and citizen killed by their government, the term “Freedom” has become a mere symbolic representation of the brittle shell of America left behind after being gutted by unelected operatives in the deep state hell bent on total control and perpetual war.

Those who thought electing Donald Trump could somehow change this paradigm are slowly figuring out that no matter what puppet resides at 1600 Pennsylvania Avenue, those who lurk behind the scenes are the ones shaping US policy. [Coment: WRONG. If you are not aware of the Alliance working to take down the Cabal then you should catch up on David Wilcock's work.].



Related: FBI: Hillary’s “Shadow Government” Buried Email Scandal

No matter how much you may disagree or even like Donald Trump, the idea of a secret and unelected government forcing change without the public’s consent behind the scenes should shock the conscience.

And now, after flip-flopping on promises not to start wars, not to attack state’s rights, not to go after the second amendment, and to expose Saudi Arabia’s crimes, it appears that Trump has simply become part of that very same apparatus.

DASH cryptocurrency and The Free Thought Project have formed a partnership that will continue to spread the ideas of peace and freedom while simultaneously teaching people how to operate outside of the establishment systems of control like using cryptocurrency instead of dollars.



Related: Deep State Desperation At All-Time High - Here’s Why

Winning this battle is as simple as choosing to abstain from the violent corrupt old system and participating in the new and peaceful system that hands the power back to the people. DASH is this system.

DASH digital cash takes the control the banking elite has over money and gives it back to the people. It is the ultimate weapon in the battle against the money changers and information controllers.

If you'd like to start your own DASH wallet and be a part of this change and battle for peace and freedom, you can start right here. DASH is already accepted by vendors all across the world so you can begin using it immediately.


Related Articles:

‘Spygate’ Sends Deep State Into Panic Mode

Comey Admits There Is A Deep State

Steven Greer’s Explosive Testimony on Deep State Advanced Technology

Social Activism Funded by Global Capitalism, Serves the Neoliberal World Order. The 2018 World Social Forum (WSF) in Salvador, Brazil

Deep State James Clapper: Embedding Spy Inside Trump Campaign Is “Standard Investigative Practices – Goes On All the Time”

Time to End the Special US-UK Relationship | EIR


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Ultimate Scam: How Al Gore Became The World’s First Carbon Billionaire” By Profiting Off Irrational Climate Fears
May 30 2018 | From: NaturalNews

One of the greatest scams of the 21st century started with former vice president Al Gore, who influentially introduced the concept of “global warming” to the world.




Now, the truth about Gore’s “global warming” scam is documented in a new book by Marc Morano, titled, The Politically Incorrect Guide to Climate Change, available at Barnes and Noble.

Related: All The Biggest Lies About Climate Change And Global Warming Debunked In One Astonishing Interview

At the turn of the century, Al Gore’s assets totaled between $780,000 and $1.9 million. After years of scaring the public with “threat of global warming” and convincing legislators to invest taxpayer money into climate change initiatives, Gore’s wealth multiplied.

By 2007, Gore’s net worth was “well in excess” of $100 million.

Gore had successfully used a climate panic to sway the government to invest in the economic sectors he was poised and ready to profit from. Under the Obama administration, taxpayer money flooded Gore’s investments, with energy stimulus packages awarding Gore’s tremendous hoodwink on the public.


Al Gore, The World’s First “Carbon Billionaire”

MIT scientist Richard Lindzen called Gore out for wanting to become the first “carbon billionaire.” By 2008, Gore put $300 million into a campaign to promote climate fears while offering carbon reduction solutions that benefited the firms he was invested in.



Related: Weather Channel founder Tells CNN “Climate Change Is A Hoax” - 31,000 Scientists Agree & Al Gore Confuses Tides With Global Warming Ocean Rise Apocalypse, Claims Fish Are “Swimming In The Streets” Of Miami Due To Climate Change

In fact, when the Obama Administration introduced a “renewable energy” solution for the economy, fourteen of the tech firms Gore was invested in had received and/or benefited from over $2.5 billion in loans, grants, and tax breaks. Indeed, Gore had become the first “carbon billionaire.”

Congressman Fred Upton from Michigan called out Gore for using his circle of influence within the investment world and in Washington to profit off taxpayer funds.

“Global warming” had done nothing but make Al Gore and his friends rich, while siphoning off billions of dollars from the taxpayers of the U.S. (For more on this topic, visit ClimateScienceNews.com.)


Global Warming Beneficiaries Threaten Skeptics While the Future Looks Bright for More “Carbon Billionaires” Looking to Benefit from Geoengineering

Where there is a great amount of money to uphold a dogma, there are threats to silence those who challenge that dogma.

That’s exactly what has happened over the years when scientists disagree with the theory of “global warming.” In 2014, the Gawker website urged that climate denialists should face jail time.



Related: Inconvenient Reality: Al Gore’s Global Climate Apocalypse Never Took Place - He Now Says It Did But You Just Couldn’t Tell + Hero EPA Administrator Speaks Out Against Junk Science – Denies CO2 Is Primary Contributor To ‘Global Warming’!

Headlines such as “Arrest Climate-Change Deniers” attacked global warming skeptics by calling them “Criminally negligent” and demanding that “It’s time to punish the climate-change liars.” Fake environmentalist David Suzuki called for government leaders who are skeptical of global warming to be “thrown in jail.” 


“I really believe that people like the former prime minister of Canada should be thrown in jail for willful blindness,”
he mouthed off.

The dogmatic war on carbon will lead to more calculated investments. The newest solutions for combating “global warming” are geoengineering schemes.

Scientists, such as David Keith from Harvard University are proposing ways to spray the Earth’s upper atmosphere with light-reflecting particles to block the sun’s heat.

The firms that will benefit from the blanketing of the Earth’s skies will deal in sulfur, aluminum, lithium, and barium.

Chemtrails are being witnessed in many places as geoengineering becomes public knowledge, exiting the realm of conspiracy theory.



Related: Ten Years On: Al Gore's 'Inconvenient Truth' Propaganda Film Turns Out To Be Total Bunk - How Is His Profit From Carbon Taxes Not Criminal Fraud?

Even though the UN is no longer backing “infeasible” geoengineering projects, investors will be looking for new ways to be the “solution” to global warming by spraying the world’s skies with chemicals. 

The corruption of Al Gore’s global warming crusade will continue on into the future, as nefarious forces attempt to cash in on the fears by spraying the Earth’s skies.

Follow more news on climate science at Climate.news.


Related Articles:

Al Gore Sued By 30,000 Scientists For Global Warming Fraud

NASA Confirms: Sea Levels Have Been Falling Across The Planet For Two Years - Media Silent & Dr. Tim Ball Crushes Climate Change: The Biggest Deception in History

The UN Admits That The Paris Climate Deal Was A Fraud + UNESCO Booted Out Of The United States

Doug Edmeades: Why I'm a global warming sceptic

Things you know that ain't so" - the Royal Society

Global Warming Can Wait: UN Ambassador on Climate Change Takes Private Jet to Coachella


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Pentagon Can't Account For $21 Trillion (That's Not A Typo)
May 29 2018 | From: Truthdig

Twenty-one trillion dollars. The Pentagon’s own numbers show that it can’t account for $21 trillion. Yes, I mean trillion with a “T.” And this could change everything. But I’ll get back to that in a moment.




There are certain things the human mind is not meant to do. Our complex brains cannot view the world in infrared, cannot spell words backward during orgasm and cannot really grasp numbers over a few thousand.

Related: Explosive Exposé: The Secret Government, Anti-Gravity Technology And Black Budget Projects

A few thousand, we can feel and conceptualize. We’ve all been in stadiums with several thousand people. We have an idea of what that looks like (and how sticky the floor gets).

But when we get into the millions, we lose it. It becomes a fog of nonsense. Visualizing it feels like trying to hug a memory. We may know what $1 million can buy (and we may want that thing), but you probably don’t know how tall a stack of a million $1 bills is. You probably don’t know how long it takes a minimum-wage employee to make $1 million.

That’s why trying to understand - truly understand - that the Pentagon spent 21 trillion unaccounted-for dollars between 1998 and 2015 washes over us like your mother telling you that your third cousin you met twice is getting divorced.

It seems vaguely upsetting, but you forget about it 15 seconds later because … what else is there to do?

Twenty-one trillion.



Related: $21 Trillion Of Unauthorized Spending By US Government Discovered By Economics Professor

But let’s get back to the beginning. A couple of years ago, Mark Skidmore, an economics professor, heard Catherine Austin Fitts, former assistant secretary in the Department of Housing and Urban Development, say that the Department of Defense Office of Inspector General had found $6.5 trillion worth of unaccounted-for spending in 2015.

Skidmore, being an economics professor, thought something like, “She means $6.5 billion. Not trillion. Because trillion would mean the Pentagon couldn’t account for more money than the gross domestic product of the whole United Kingdom. But still, $6.5 billion of unaccounted-for money is a crazy amount.”

So he went and looked at the inspector general’s report, and he found something interesting: It was trillion! It was fucking $6.5 trillion in 2015 of unaccounted-for spending! And I’m sorry for the cursing, but the word “trillion” is legally obligated to be prefaced with “fucking.” It is indeed way more than the U.K.’s GDP.

Skidmore did a little more digging. As Forbes reported in December 2017, “[He] and Catherine Austin Fitts … conducted a search of government websites and found similar reports dating back to 1998.



Related: The US Military Is Quietly Building SkyNet

While the documents are incomplete, original government sources indicate $21 trillion in unsupported adjustments have been reported for the Department of Defense and the Department of Housing and Urban Development for the years 1998-2015.”

Let’s stop and take a second to conceive how much $21 trillion is (which you can’t because our brains short-circuit, but we’ll try anyway).

1. The amount of money supposedly in the stock market is $30 trillion.

2. The GDP of the United States is $18.6 trillion.

3. Picture a stack of money. Now imagine that that stack of dollars is all $1,000 bills. Each bill says “$1,000” on it. How high do you imagine that stack of dollars would be if it were $1 trillion. It would be 63 miles high.

4. Imagine you make $40,000 a year. How long would it take you to make $1 trillion? Well, don’t sign up for this task, because it would take you 25 million years (which sounds like a long time, but I hear that the last 10 million really fly by because you already know your way around the office, where the coffee machine is, etc.).

The human brain is not meant to think about a trillion dollars.

And it’s definitely not meant to think about the $21 trillion our Department of Defense can’t account for. These numbers sound bananas. They sound like something Alex Jones found tattooed on his backside by extraterrestrials.

But the 21 trillion number comes from the Department of Defense Office of Inspector General - the OIG. Although, as Forbes pointed out, “after Mark Skidmore began inquiring about OIG-reported unsubstantiated adjustments, the OIG’s webpage, which documented, albeit in a highly incomplete manner, these unsupported “accounting adjustments,” was mysteriously taken down.”



Related: Tesla’s Anti-Gravity Research In Use In Dozens Of Secretive Military Projects

Luckily, people had already grabbed copies of the report, which - for now - you can view here.

Here’s something else important from that Forbes article - which is one of the only mainstream media articles you can find on the largest theft in American history:


“Given that the entire Army budget in fiscal year 2015 was $120 billion, unsupported adjustments were 54 times the level of spending authorized by Congress.”

That’s right. The expenses with no explanation were 54 times the actual budget allotted by Congress. Well, it’s good to see Congress is doing 1/54th of its job of overseeing military spending (that’s actually more than I thought Congress was doing). This would seem to mean that 98 percent of every dollar spent by the Army in 2015 was unconstitutional.

So, pray tell, what did the OIG say caused all this unaccounted-for spending that makes Jeff Bezos’ net worth look like that of a guy jingling a tin can on the street corner?


“[The July 2016 inspector general] report indicates that unsupported adjustments are the result of the Defense Department’s ‘failure to correct system deficiencies.’

They blame trillions of dollars of mysterious spending on a “failure to correct system deficiencies”? That’s like me saying I had sex with 100,000 wild hairless aardvarks because I wasn’t looking where I was walking.

Twenty-one trillion. Say it slowly to yourself.



Related: The Atlantic Council: The Marketing Arm Of The Military/Security Complex

At the end of the day, there are no justifiable explanations for this amount of unaccounted-for, unconstitutional spending. Right now, the Pentagon is being audited for the first time ever, and it’s taking 2,400 auditors to do it. I’m not holding my breath that they’ll actually be allowed to get to the bottom of this.

But if the American people truly understood this number, it would change both the country and the world. It means that the dollar is sprinting down a path toward worthless.

If the Pentagon is hiding spending that dwarfs the amount of tax dollars coming in to the federal government, then it’s clear the government is printing however much it wants and thinking there are no consequences.

Once these trillions are considered, our fiat currency has even less meaning than it already does, and it’s only a matter of time before inflation runs wild.

It also means that any time our government says it “doesn’t have money” for a project, it’s laughable. It can clearly “create” as much as it wants for bombing and death. This would explain how Donald Trump’s military can [supposedly] drop well over 100 bombs a day that cost well north of $1 million each.

So why can’t our government also “create” endless money for health care, education, the homeless, veterans benefits and the elderly, to make all parking free and to pay the Rolling Stones to play stoop-front shows in my neighborhood? (I’m sure the Rolling Stones are expensive, but surely a trillion dollars could cover a couple of songs.)



Related: Snowden Reveals First Ever Public Disclosure Of Secret Black Budget Programs

Obviously, our government could do those things, but it chooses not to. Earlier this month, Louisiana sent eviction notices to 30,000 elderly people on Medicaid to kick them out of their nursing homes. Yes, a country that can vomit trillions of dollars down a black hole marked “Military” can’t find the money to take care of our poor elderly. It’s a repulsive joke.

Twenty-one trillion.

Former Secretary of Defense Robert Gates spoke about how no one knows where the money is flying in the Pentagon. In a barely reported speech in 2011, he said:


“My staff and I learned that it was nearly impossible to get accurate information and answers to questions such as, ‘How much money did you spend?’ and ‘How many people do you have?’

They can’t even find out how many people work for a specific department?

Note for anyone looking for a job: Just show up at the Pentagon and tell them you work there. It doesn’t seem like they’d have much luck proving you don’t.

For more on this story, check out David DeGraw’s excellent reporting at ChangeMaker.media, because the mainstream corporate media are mouthpieces for the weapons industry. They are friends with benefits of the military-industrial complex. I have seen basically nothing from the mainstream corporate media concerning this mysterious $21 trillion.



Related: New Zealand’s Homegrown Military-Industrial Complex

I missed the time when CNN’s Wolf Blitzer said that the money we dump into war and death - either the accounted-for money or the secretive trillions - could end world hunger and poverty many times over.

There’s no reason anybody needs to be starving or hungry or unsheltered on this planet, but our [Deep State] government seems hellbent on proving that it stands for nothing but profiting off death and misery. And our media desperately want to show they stand for nothing but propping up our morally bankrupt empire.

When the media aren’t actively promoting war, they’re filling the airwaves with shit, so the entire country can’t even hear itself think. Our whole mindscape is filled to the brim with nonsense and vacant celebrity idiocy.

Then, while no one is looking, the largest theft humankind has ever seen is going on behind our backs - covered up under the guise of “national security.”

Twenty-one trillion. Don’t forget.


Related Articles:


CNN Exposed As Propaganda Ministry For The DNC And Military/Security Complex

“We Are The Death Merchant Of The World”: Ex-Bush Official Lawrence Wilkerson Condemns Military-
Industrial Complex


A List Of 20 Ex-Agents Who Have Exposed The US Military Intelligence Complex & Government 'Cyber Troops' Manipulate Facebook, Twitter, Study Says

Black Magic: Satanists Rule The World, Not Politicians, Bankers Or Military Heads [Although They Are
Usually All One And The Same] + Another Illuminati Whistleblower Speaks Out


Military Electronic Warfare Expert Warns Of Covert Genocide

Secret Pentagon Report Reveals US "Created" ISIS As A "Tool" To Overthrow Syria's President Assad & War is Peace: US Needs External Enemy to Ensure Internal Unity

Declassified Documents Reveal Pentagon’s 1950's Planned Nuclear Holocaust: “Systemic Destruction” And
Annihilation Of Prague, Warsaw, Budapest, Moscow, Beijing - More Than 1000 Cities



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

‘War Crimes’: Palestine Demands International Criminal Court Investigate Israel
May 28 2018 | From: Antimedia

Palestinian Foreign Minister Riyad al-Maliki asked prosecutors at the International Criminal Court on Tuesday to launch a full investigation into accusations of Israeli human rights abuses on Palestinian territory, saying the evidence was “insurmountable”.




Maliki submitted a “referral” giving the prosecutor at the Hague-based court the legal basis to move beyond a preliminary inquiry started in January 2015.

Related: Israeli Psychosis on Full Display

He said the request would give prosecutors the authority to investigate alleged crimes starting in 2014 and beyond, including last week’s deaths during protests in Gaza.


“We believe there is ample and insurmountable evidence to that effect and we believe that proceeding with an investigation is the right and needed course of action,”
he said.

The International Criminal Court has the authority to hear cases of war crimes, genocide and crimes against humanity committed on the territory of the 123 countries that have signed up to it.

Israel has not joined the court, but because the Palestinians have, Israelis could be targeted for crimes committed on Palestinian lands.


“Through judicial referral we want. ..the office of the prosecutor to open without delay an investigation into all crimes,”
Maliki said after meeting with chief ICC prosecutor, Fatou Bensouda.

“Further delaying justice for Palestinian victims is also tantamount to denial of justice.”

“Through judicial referral we want. ..the office of the prosecutor to open without delay an investigation into all crimes,” Maliki said after meeting with chief ICC prosecutor, Fatou Bensouda.

“Further delaying justice for Palestinian victims is also tantamount to denial of justice.”



Related: Thousands Of Israeli Protesters Call For Benjamin Netanyahu To Step Down


Israel Criticizes Move

Israel rejected Tuesday’s move as “legally invalid”, saying the court lacks jurisdiction because the Palestinian Authority is not a state and Israel abides by international law.

“The Palestinians continue to exploit the court for political purposes, rather than work towards resuming the peace process with Israel,” the foreign ministry said in a statement.

“It is absurd that the Palestinian actions vis-a-vis the court come at a time when the Palestinians continue to incite to acts of terrorism,” it said.



Related: Israeli Teens Tell Netanyahu They Won’t Serve In IDF, Slam Occupation Of Palestine

The court’s prosecutors launched an initial investigation into allegations against Israel when the Palestinians first joined the court in 2015. Tuesday’s referral allows that investigation to proceed to the next stage of a full investigation, without waiting for a judge to give approval.

Harvard legal expert Alex Whiting, a former ICC prosecutor, said on Twitter that the referral:


“Has a real effect … it is much harder for the office of the prosecutor to stay in the preliminary investigation phase for years”.

The ICC, which opened in July 2002, is a court of last resort, only stepping in when a state is unwilling or unable to investigate crimes on its territory.


Related Articles:

UN to Investigate Possible Israeli War Crimes After Gaza Massacre

Israel Won’t Cooperate With UN Probe on Gaza Killings

Palestine 101: Not That Complicated

If they call you an 'Antisemite'...

Muslim Countries Call for ‘International Force’ to Protect Palestinians

Mapping Palestine Before Israel


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Out Of Hand: More People Are Using More Devices More Often Than Ever Before - Increasingly, That’s A Pain Point
May 27 2018 | From: Buzzfeed

For Cassandra Smolcic, the trouble began at her dream internship. Handpicked to spend a summer working on movies at Pixar, the 26-year-old logged marathon hours, and more than a few all-nighters, at her computer and tablet.



At first, she managed to ignore the mysterious pinching sensations in her hands and forearms. But by the time her internship ended and a full-time job offer rolled in, she could barely move her fingers.

For Skylar, a 12-year-old in South Florida who loves her laptop, phone, and tablet, the breaking point came at the start of sixth grade last fall. Suddenly her neck, shoulders, and back felt strained whenever she rolled her head, as if invisible hands were yanking muscles apart from the inside. All her neck-rolling, she worried, made her look like she was trying to cheat off someone’s test.

To be a perpetually plugged-in, emailing, texting, sexting, swiping, Snapchatting, selfie-taking human being in 2016, a little thumb twinge is the price of admission. There are the media-anointed outliers: the Candy Crusher with a ruptured thumb tendon, the woman who over-texted her way to “WhatsAppitis.”

And then there are people like the 18-year-old woman who said;


“If I’m scrolling down Tumblr for more than half an hour, my fingers will get sore.”


“When I hold my phone,” a 22-year-old complained, cradling her iPhone in her palm, “my bottom finger really hurts.”

A 30-year-old software engineer said his fingers “naturally curl inwards,” claw-like: “I remember my hand did not quite use to be like that.”

Amy Luo, 27, suspects her iPhone 6s is partly to blame for the numbness in her right thumb and wrist.

Compared with her old iPhone, she said, “you have to stretch a lot more, and it’s heavier.”

Dr. Patrick Lang, a San Francisco hand surgeon, sees more and more twenty- and thirtysomething tech employees with inexplicable debilitating pain in their upper limbs. “I consider it like an epidemic,” he said, “particularly in this city.”

To be clear, no one knows just how bad this “epidemic” is. At best, we learn to endure our stiff necks and throbbing thumbs. At worst, a generation of people damage their bodies without realizing it.

In all likelihood, we are somewhere in the middle, between perturbance and public health crisis, but for the time being we simply don’t - can’t - know what all these machines will do to our bodies in the long term, especially in the absence of definitive research.

What we do know is that now more people are using multiple electronics - cell phones, smartphones, tablets, laptops, desktops - for more hours a day, starting at ever earlier ages.

But we weren’t built for them.



Growing up in the Rust Belt city of Greensburg, Pennsylvania, Smolcic was the kid who was always sketching characters from movies and cartoons. And in her adolescent years in the ’90s, computers became an important tool for honing her artistic talents: She made clip-art greeting cards and banners, and high school newspaper layouts, on desktop computers.

At Susquehanna University, she went all in on graphic design as a career after she took a computer arts course on a whim.

That meant long hours on various iMacs, and even more screen time when she went on to earn a master’s in graphic design at the Savannah College of Art and Design. Over the years, she’s also carried a flip phone, a Motorola Razr, a Dell laptop, and, at the moment, a MacBook Pro and an iPhone 6s.

Machines were crucial to Smolcic’s burgeoning artistic career, as they are to so many of our lives. But it’d be hard to call them human-friendly.

Consider the minimum biomechanics needed to work a smartphone. Put aside all the other risks - of getting depressed and lonely; of sacrificing sleep, hearing, eyesight, and focus; of dying while snapping selfies on cliffs, or texting while walking or driving. The act of just using the thing is precarious.

Our heads sit atop our necks and line up with our shoulders and arms, just as a two-footed species’ should. But a forward-leaning head shakes up this graceful arrangement: The upper body drifts back, the hips tilt forward, and pretty much everything else - the spine, the nerves below the neck, the upper limb muscles - tightens up.

Slouching is all too easy when we hold a phone in our outstretched hand or reach for a mouse. When we type on our laptops cross-legged or sprawled on our stomachs, our necks and shoulders strain from leaning into the low screens. (Yes, as counterintuitive as it sounds, you probably shouldn’t put a laptop on your lap.)

Our hands are uniquely capable of grasping objects, a useful trait for our branch–swinging primate ancestors. Especially remarkable are our opposable thumbs, free to flex, extend, curl, and press in all sorts of directions. But their inherently unstable joints didn’t evolve to be constantly pushed beyond their range of motion. Yet they are when we flick through our phones or, worse, tablets.

To Dr. Robert Markison, it’s clear: Virtually none of Silicon Valley’s inventions, from the clunky Macintosh 128K of 1984 to the sleek iPhone 7, have been designed with respect for the human form. Markison is a San Francisco surgeon who depends on his hands to operate on other people’s hands.



He so believes in technology’s potential to harm - and treats so many young startup workers who confirm that suspicion - that he almost exclusively uses voice recognition software. He also has his own line of smartphone styluses that double as pens, with colorful barrels made of manually mixed pigments, pressure-cast resin, and hand-dyed silk.

On a recent afternoon in his office, Markison asked me to make a fist around a grip strength measurement tool, with my thumb facing the ceiling. It felt powerful, easy.

Then he had me turn my palm to the floor, the keyboarding stance of a white-collar worker, and do the same thing; my grip immediately lost a noticeable amount of strength.


“There’s no reason to think a mouse is a good idea,”
Markison said.

Of course, many people with office jobs probably suspect that already. During the ’80s and ’90s, when computers - then also known as “video display terminals” - invaded workplaces around the world, employees felt their arms and fingers go numb, and headlines warned of the harm these newfangled devices appeared to be inflicting.

In the early ’90s, telephone operators, journalists, clerical workers, and employees from other fields filed hundreds of lawsuits against the manufacturers of equipment such as computer keyboards, which they blamed for severe arm, wrist, and hand injuries.

All that worry woke a generation up to the physical (and psychological) toll of automated, ultra-efficient work. Then came furniture and appliances to align technology with our bodies.

Ergonomic mice are gripped vertically, and foot mice save clicks.



Slanted and split keyboards let hands relax. Desks convert to a standing position or have adjustable split levels for monitors and keyboards. Some software transcribes speech, other software alerts your boss when you type too fast.

But these inventions have been largely for desktops. The dizzying rise of cell phones, tablets, and laptops, fueled by the rush to make screens ever more portable and ubiquitous, have all but left human-centered design principles in the dust.

Chances are good you’re reading this on your phone. In fact, chances are good your phone was the first thing you looked at this morning and the last thing you looked at last night.

Wake up to a phone alarm. Scroll, bleary-eyed, through email, texts, Facebook, Twitter, Instagram. Field more news and email on your phone on public transit (or, er, in the car).

Sit behind a computer of some kind at work or school. All day your buzzing phone demands to be held, whether you’re out to lunch or, admit it, on the toilet.

Come reverse commute, you’re once again head down on your phone, or an e-reader, until you finally take a break at home - by watching Game of Thrones on your laptop or tablet. Bonus points if you play Words With Friends while you do it.



Related: Companies Develop “Safe” Screens That Filter Blue Light Emitted By Electronic Devices

Scientists don’t definitively know how all this activity affects our bodies. While some studies link hand ailments to heavy computer and video game use, far fewer have examined new devices like smartphones.


“The phones have only been out 10 to 15 years at best,”
said Jack Dennerlein, who directs the Occupational Biomechanics and Ergonomics Laboratory at Harvard University.

“We haven’t had the long-term exposures to start seeing some of the more chronic issues that come up later in life.”

No reliable measurement of technology-related ailments exists. The closest thing is an annual survey of workplace injuries by the US Bureau of Labor Statistics, whose data suggests that cases of musculoskeletal disorders, including carpal tunnel syndrome, have dropped over the last two decades.

But these figures are at best “a very crude measure” of problems, said Dr. Kurt Hegmann, who directs the University of Utah’s Rocky Mountain Center for Occupational and Environmental Health. As Dennerlein put it: “They’re better than nothing.”

Hegmann offers some theories for why the numbers are shrinking: High-risk jobs like manufacturing are decreasing. Panicked workers in the ’90s likely reported nonexistent ailments before the hysteria subsided. Some offices may have became more ergonomic.

And there are other reasons the numbers are probably off: Non-work-related factors like obesity can contribute to carpal tunnel, and if you’re constantly sending work emails but also Instagramming for fun, it’s hard to blame your sore hand on work alone.



However widespread phone-linked injuries may or may not be, a small cluster of studies suggests that they are real. A 2011 study of nearly 140 mobile device users linked internet time to right thumb pain, as well as overall screen time to right shoulder and neck discomfort.

Another
found that smartphone overuse enlarges the nerve involved in carpal tunnel, causes thumb pain, and hinders the hand’s ability to do things like pinch.

Upright, an adult’s head puts about a dozen pounds of force on the spine, according to a 2014 paper. But tilted 15 degrees, as if over a phone, the force surges to 27 pounds, and to 60 pounds at 60 degrees. (That’s the weight of four Thanksgiving turkeys.)


“It’s harmful when you’re younger, because the bones are still malleable and pliable and they may be disformed permanently,”
said New York spinal surgeon Dr. Kenneth Hansraj, who wrote the paper after treating a patient “head down in his iPad, playing Angry Birds four hours a day.”

Older people can suffer too, he said, because their spines are prone to narrowing, making them susceptible to injury.

But the doctor insists he’s no “cell phone basher.”

“I love the ability to have a cup of coffee and contact 10 of my friends in 10 countries with one text and say, ‘I love this coffee,’” he said.

“I’m just saying, my message is to keep your head up and be cognizant of where your head is in space.”

Skylar started using an iPad a couple years ago to watch movies in the car.

Then, at age 10, she got a MacBook Air and a rose-gold iPhone 6s, says her mother, who requested to withhold her last name to protect her identity.

Game-playing, filming lip-sync sessions, Snapchatting “weird faces,” checking Instagram, FaceTiming, and texting, not to mention doing homework on the computer, keep Skylar busy three hours or so a day.



Recently, she discovered Friends, a show about “a group of friends that do a lot of weird things and they always meet up at every single day at Central Perk. It’s a coffee shop.”

When the Pew Research Center surveyed teens in 2011, one-quarter had smartphones. In 2015, three-quarters did. According to Common Sense Media, a San Francisco nonprofit that surveyed more than 2,600 young people across the US last year, 8- to 12-year-olds log nearly two hours a day on tablets, smartphones, and other mobile devices.

And the habit starts even younger: 38% of children under 2 have played games or watched videos on a mobile device.

Even lower-income teens, who are less likely to own the latest gadgets, may be catching up to their wealthier peers: In a 2015 study of 350 children under age 5 in a low-income community in Philadelphia, most already had their own mobile device, and in fact had started using one before their first birthday.


“It’s not like an hour that goes by I don’t check my phone, unless I’m asleep, you know,”
said Kendall Holle, 15.

“It’s bad. It’s bad. As soon as I wake up, open my eyes, brush my teeth, wash my face, I’m on my phone, making snaps.”

“I wake up and I start snapping,” said Jeff Ren, 19.

“When my phone got taken away,” confessed Sara, 15, “I cracked.”

“I just don’t feel normal without my phone on me now,” said Howard Lin, 18. “It would just feel like something’s missing.”

But researchers aren’t studying how so much gadget exposure, so young, affects children’s physiology - at least not to the degree they’re studying how it affects their learning, playing, and thinking.



The American Academy of Pediatrics recommends that children under age 2 avoid screen time completely, and that older children have no more than two hours a day. After more than 15 years, it’s now rethinking these guidelines.


“In a world where ‘screen time’ is becoming simply ‘time,’ our policies must evolve or become obsolete,”
it has explained.

When I asked if physical risks were being weighed along with social and psychological ones, Dr. Ari Brown, who’s leading the overhaul of the recommendations, told me by email that “the particular question you are asking … is not being addressed by our group.”

Meanwhile, people like Diane Cho didn’t see the pain coming and don’t know what will happen next.

At the news site she recently left, Cho spent her days typing 10 hours at a time, mostly on a laptop, and reading her phone - until her right arm went periodically numb, immune to icing.


“A huge reason why I wanted a career change was literally my arm was falling apart,” she said. “My body was just aching.”
She’s 26.

George McIntire, 27, occasionally sees his right thumb act up: “It starts twitching back and forth, it’s shivering, and it’s going really fast too.”

Tanner Bell, a 17-year-old who makes DIY craft videos on YouTube and helps companies digitally market to teens, feels his thumbs cramp twice a week.

“It doesn’t even happen when I’m holding it, it could happen later on in the day or night,” he said. “There’s an extra tension … sort of like a tingling.”




After trading volleys of texts with a long-distance girlfriend, Vincent Hennerty, 26, ended up with early-stage carpal tunnel. Cutting back on video games was annoying, as was doing push-ups on his knuckles.

Still, nothing could prepare him for what one might call the ultimate sacrifice.



“When I was with girls,”
he recalled, “I would either have to finger them less during sexual intercourse or messing around, or I’d have to be in a position where my wrists were completely straight.”

This, he said, “weighed on me the most: ‘I need to stop texting.’”

When neck rubs and ice packs didn’t soothe Skylar’s stiff neck, her mother took her to Dean Fishman, a local chiropractor and physical therapist. He sees so many people like her that in 2009 he started the Text Neck Institute outside Fort Lauderdale, Florida.

The clinic now handles 700 visits a month, he says.


“I started to notice very early on, when texting started to become popular as far as communicating goes, that I was seeing more and more younger people coming in with complaints we hadn’t seen before - headaches, neck pain, arm pain,”
said Fishman, whose youngest patient so far has been a 3-year-old iPad-loving girl. So-called text neck “is not a blunt force trauma,” he said.

“You’re not going to see a lot of bulging or herniated discs overnight. Over time, it’s going to be microtraumas that end up being a bigger symptom for our patients.”



Patients are utterly, unnervingly unaware of their own bodies.


“When these younger people are in the middle of studying on their digital device, or if they’re in the middle of gaming or the excitement of texting with their friends, they don’t perceive pain,”
Fishman said.

“It’s not until they put it down, lay down at night, and feel pain, and don’t attribute it to what they’ve been doing during the day.”

Cyrene Quiamco is not a patient, but has all the markings of a future one.


“I don’t even know when I don’t check Snapchat,”
said the 27-year-old, who Snapchats for brands like MTV, Jolly Ranchers, Pixar, and Disneyland - and charges $10,000 to $30,000 per Story.

“It’s like, I’m in a restaurant, and then I don’t spend all of the time I’m there (on Snapchat), but then I spend five minutes checking what’s in my Snapchat feed. It’s not one sitting, it’s various sittings throughout the day.”

How many texts does she send a day? “Oh gosh, more than a thousand.” She added, “I never actually thought about how many that would be.”

Two to three hours a day, Quiamco draws colorful, detailed cartoons for Snapchat on her phone.

“You’re so focused on creating it because you don’t want to stop,” even when a pang runs up her forearm, she said. “I tell my mom, ‘Hey, I’m getting hand cramps by using the phone.’ She says, ‘You’re going to develop something. If you lose your hand, that’s everything.’”

She laughed.

As a 6-year-old, Smolcic fell in love with The Little Mermaid. As a grown-up graphic designer at Pixar, across the bay from San Francisco, she got to make her own mark on films like Monsters University, Cars 2, and Finding Dory. For Toy Story 3, she crafted the logo of pink teddy bear and chief antagonist Lots-o’-Huggin’ Bear; for the Scotland-set Brave, she whipped up Celtic patterns for furniture and costumes.

Meetings with famous directors and other “pinch me” moments overflowed during her five years there.


“There’s just all those amazing little life lessons buried into the entertainment aspect of it that do make an impact on people,”
she said of Pixar’s movies. “It felt special to be part of that.”

Despite the grueling hours, Smolcic didn’t seriously believe that hand injuries could be a hazard of the trade. But once the aches arrived, they stayed.

Even when she felt normal after a monthlong break, the stabbing sensations would flare up when she jumped back into work. Pixar was supportive, she said, and gave her an elaborate work station with a motorized standing and sitting desk, a sideways mouse, programmable foot pedals, ergonomic chairs, extra monitors, and a tablet sensitive to touch.



Doctors and specialists put her through one treatment after another, some less conventional than others: acupuncture, acupressure, breathwork, massages, physical therapy, personal training, biofeedback, myofascial release, NeuroKinetic Therapy, reflexology, naturopathy.

According to some of her many medical professionals, her diagnosis was fibromyalgia, a musculoskeletal pain disorder. Others called it a “repetitive strain injury.”

That’s probably the first term that comes to mind for these types of impairments. But occupational health experts shy away from it because it lumps together a lot of different ailments. Take carpal tunnel syndrome: A compressed nerve in your forearm numbs and weakens your hand.

But painful thumb tendons, the cord-like structures that link muscle to bone, might mean de Quervain syndrome. Tendinitis (inflamed tendons) shouldn’t be confused with trigger finger (inflammation around a tendon). And for anything too vague or early-stage to neatly fit a diagnosis, there’s the handy label of “nonspecific pain.”

To make things more confusing, none of these injuries can be easily blamed on technology. You can fiddle with gadgets your whole life without a sore thumb. Or your ailment can build over years, making it hard to know whether gadgets are the sole cause.



Recovery, too, varies. All you may need to do is vigilantly sit up straight and take breaks, whereas others would need anything from a steroid shot to surgery.

These nuances can confound primary care physicians, who don’t necessarily know when to refer patients to specialists - who in turn don’t always have all the answers either.


“People go to the hand surgeons, who are frustrated because they’re not surgical patients, so they send them to therapy,”
said Melanie Johnke, who runs Golden Gate Hand Therapy in San Francisco. “And I’m not a doctor, either,” meaning she can’t make official diagnoses or prescribe medications.

As Savir put it: “If I go to the doctor, what is he going to say? ‘Don’t hold your phone that way.’ What’s the point?”

Despite knowing everything we should do, from sitting straight and stretching to taking breaks and using a phone stylus, we probably don’t and won’t follow suit. And maybe that’s just how things are now. Maybe only technology can save us from ourselves.

Tech giants like Apple, Google, and Microsoft are racing to turn their machines into mind readers. Every swipe saved, every “frictionless” convenience engineered, keeps us coming back for more: It’s a business strategy that also happens to be ergonomically friendly.

Speech recognition software - Siri, “OK Google,” Alexa, Dragon - promises to take the manual labor out of internet browsing and looking up directions.



But it doesn’t work perfectly, which isn’t news to anyone who’s yelled at Siri, and it’s still kind of weird, frankly, to talk to your phone in public.


“I’m in a shared office space, and I don’t know how that would work out,”
said Saima Jamshed, 42, who has chronic pain in her right arm.

Then there are the machine learning–powered apps that, seemingly magically, cue up the next word in your message, person to call, or video to watch, based on your past activity and keystrokes.

See (as of last week) Google’s new messaging app Allo, which comes with prepackaged responses and predictive texts. But accepting their help does require sacrificing privacy to an unsettling degree.



Related: Whatever You Do, Do Not Use Google Allo: Snowden

Of course, we could also use technology less. We certainly seem to want to. Virtually all 30 or so people who spoke to me wished they could leave their phones at home, stop refreshing their notifications, watch less YouTube. Asked to guess how much time this all amounted to, they answered: too much.

Cutting back would almost definitely be healthier. But we may not be willing to do that.

Skylar has almost fully recovered, thanks to physical therapy at the Text Neck Institute and exercises at home. Her mother says she’s diligent about setting her devices at eye level (and telling everyone else to as well), just like the doctor told her to. But she isn’t actually cutting back on screen time.

The peer pressure is intense: All her friends have phones, and some have iPads and computers.


“Sometimes it gets annoying when I go to a friend’s house and all we do is play on our phone or watch something on our iPad,”
Skylar said. “I went to their house to play with them or hang out with them, not just go on our electronics and be silent the whole time.”

“When I was growing up,” her mother, Kerri, recalled, “the phone was in the house, so if you left the house, the phone rang and somebody would call you later.” It was a non-negotiable break when the world had to accept that you were physically untethered from your device. “Now,” Kerri said, “it’s just everywhere.”

Smolcic has largely disconnected from technology, just not by choice.

When she was 28, a pain management specialist gave her the devastating news: She would never fully recover. She hung on for a few more years, but finally left in October 2014 for a San Francisco design agency where, she hoped, her role would be less hands-on. “I really felt like I’d tried everything I could,” she said.

But the work and pain remained more or less the same, so this March, she left the agency, and design, for the foreseeable future. Her life’s work hurt.

Since then, she’s been using money saved up to travel through Hong Kong, Greece, and Iceland, with stops to see shamans and alternative healers in Indonesia, Thailand, and Mexico. She’s also writing, which she now believes to be her true calling.

Composing an 1,800-word essay this spring - through a combination of typing and recording voice memos - took a month and a half because she could only work for an hour a day. Now she says she can write for several hours at a time with almost no pain, and she’s working on a memoir partly about her injuries.

At 33, Smolcic believes that she’s 90% recovered. She can’t be sure it’s permanent - but even if so, she no longer wants a trade design job.


“I think I’d be okay with not having a lot of the luxuries I had in my San Francisco life,”
she said, “as a trade for having more time to be actively living and out in the world, as opposed to being behind a desk.”

But despite all that she believes technology has cost her, physically and emotionally, Smolcic hasn’t been able to resist turning to her iPhone and MacBook on the road this year.

They are a source of directions and travel tips, an outlet for writing and music, a camera to record memories, a line of communication to friends and family. “These machines,” she wrote to me this summer, “put so much power at my fingertips.” And now that she’s feeling better, she uses them all the time.


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

More Confessions Of An Economic Hit Man: "This Time, They’re Coming For Your Democracy"
May 26 2018 | From: ZeroHedge

Twelve years ago, John Perkins published his book, “Confessions of an Economic Hit Man.” Today, he says “things have just gotten so much worse.”



Twelve years ago, John Perkins published his book, Confessions of an Economic Hit Man, and it rapidly rose up The New York Times’ best-seller list.

Related: The Poisoned Chalice: From Eurozone to Dead Zone

In it, Perkins describes his career convincing heads of state to adopt economic policies that impoverished their countries and undermined democratic institutions. These policies helped to enrich tiny, local elite groups while padding the pockets of U.S.-based transnational corporations.

Perkins was recruited, he says, by the National Security Agency (NSA), but he worked for a private consulting company. His job as an undertrained, overpaid economist was to generate reports that justified lucrative contracts for U.S. corporations, while plunging vulnerable nations into debt.

Countries that didn’t cooperate saw the screws tightened on their economies. In Chile, for example, President Richard Nixon famously called on the CIA to “make the economy scream” to undermine the prospects of the democratically elected president, Salvador Allende.

If economic pressure and threats didn’t work, Perkins says, the jackals were called to either overthrow or assassinate the noncompliant heads of state. That is, indeed, what happened to Allende, with the backing of the CIA.



Related: London Named ‘Most Corrupt Place on Earth’ by Italian Mafia Expert

Perkins’ book has been controversial, and some have disputed some of his claims, including, for example, that the NSA was involved in activities beyond code making and breaking.

Perkins has just reissued his book with major updates. The basic premise of the book remains the same, but the update shows how the economic hit man approach has evolved in the last 12 years.

Among other things, U.S. cities are now on the target list. The combination of debt, enforced austerity, underinvestment, privatization, and the undermining of democratically elected governments is now happening here.

I couldn’t help but think about Flint, Michigan, under emergency management as I read The New Confessions of an Economic Hit Man.

I interviewed Perkins at his home in the Seattle area. In addition to being a recovering economic hit man, he is a grandfather and a founder and board member of Dream Change and The Pachamama Alliance, organizations that work for “a world that future generations will want to inherit.”

 


Sarah van Gelder: What’s changed in our world since you wrote the first Confessions of an Economic Hit Man?

John Perkins: Things have just gotten so much worse in the last 12 years since the first Confessions was written. Economic hit men and jackals have expanded tremendously, including the United States and Europe.

Back in my day we were pretty much limited to what we called the third world, or economically developing countries, but now it’s everywhere.

And in fact, the cancer of the corporate empire has metastasized into what I would call a failed global death economy. This is an economy that’s based on destroying the very resources upon which it depends, and upon the military. It’s become totally global, and it’s a failure.



Related: Why Young Americans Are Giving Up on Capitalism

van Gelder: So how has this switched from us being the beneficiaries of this hit-man economy, perhaps in the past, to us now being more of the victims of it?

Perkins: It’s been interesting because, in the past, the economic hit man economy was being propagated in order to make America wealthier and presumably to make people here better off, but as this whole process has expanded in the U.S. and Europe, what we’ve seen is a tremendous growth in the very wealthy at the expense of everybody else.

On a global basis we now know that 62 individuals have as many assets as half the world’s population.

We of course in the U.S. have seen how our government is frozen, it’s just not working. It’s controlled by the big corporations and they’ve really taken over. They’ve understood that the new market, the new resource, is the U.S. and Europe, and the incredibly awful things that have happened to Greece and Ireland and Iceland, are now happening here in the U.S.

We’re seeing this situation where we can have what statistically shows economic growth, and at the same time increased foreclosures on homes and unemployment.

van Gelder: Is this the same kind of dynamic about debt that leads to emergency managers who then turn over the reins of the economy to private enterprises? The same thing that you are seeing in third-world countries?

Perkins: Yes, when I was an economic hit man, one of the things that we did, we raised these huge loans for these countries, but the money never actually went to the countries, it went to our own corporations to build infrastructure in those countries.

And when the countries could not pay off their debt, we insisted that they privatize their water systems, their sewage systems, their electric systems.

Now we’re seeing that same thing happen in the United States. Flint, Michigan, is a very good example of that. This is not a U.S. empire, it’s a corporate empire protected and supported by the U.S. military and the CIA. But it is not an American empire, it’s not helping Americans. It’s exploiting us in the same way that we used to exploit all these other countries around the world.

van Gelder: So it seems like Americans are starting to get this. What is your sense about where the American public is in terms of readiness to do something?

Perkins: As I travel around the U.S., as I travel around the world, I see that people are really waking up. We’re getting it. We’re understanding that we live on a very fragile space station, and it’s got no shuttles; we can’t get off. We’ve got to fix it, we’ve got to take care of it, and we’re in the process of destroying it.

The big corporations are destroying it, but the big corporations are just run by people, and they’re vulnerable to us. If we really consider it, the market place is a democracy, if we just use it as such.

van Gelder: I want to push back on that one a little bit because so many corporations don’t sell to ordinary consumers, they sell to other companies or to governments, and so many corporations have such an entrenched reward system where if one person doesn’t perform by exploiting the earth they’ll simply get replaced with somebody else who does.

Perkins: I’ve recently been speaking at a number of corporate conferences. I hear time after time after time that many of them want to leave a green legacy. They’ve got children, they’ve got grandchildren, they understand we can’t go on like this.

So what they say is;


“Go out there, start consumer movements. What I want is to receive a hundred thousand emails from my customers saying, ’Hey, I love your product but I’m not going to buy it anymore until you pay your workers a fair wage in Indonesia, or wherever, or clean up the environment, or do something.’

And then I can take that to my board of directors and my big stockholders, to the people who really control whether I get hired or fired.”



van Gelder: I agree, and those campaigns, as you know, have been going on for decades now, and sometimes they have little incremental changes around the edge. But then we look back on it later and we see that there’s enormous resistance because of the profits to be made in continuing the system.

Perkins: I think we’ve seen tremendous changes, though. Just in the last few years, we’ve seen organic foods become very big. Twenty years ago they couldn’t make a go of it. We’ve seen women having bigger positions in corporations, and minorities, and we need to get better at this.

We’ve seen the labeling of many foods. GMOs aren’t included yet, but nutrition and calories and so forth are. And what we really need to do is convince corporations that they’ve got to have a new goal.

We’ve got to let corporations know what their job is: It’s to serve a public interest, and make a decent rate of return for investors. We need investors, but beyond that, every corporation should serve a public interest, should serve the earth, should serve future generations.

van Gelder: I want to ask you about the Trans-Pacific Partnership, and other trade deals. Is there any way that we can beat these things back so they don’t continue supercharging the corporate sphere at the expense of local democracies?

Perkins: They’re devastating; they give sovereignty to corporations over governments. It’s ridiculous.

We’re seeing terrible desperation from people in Central America trying to get away from a system that’s broken, primarily because our trade agreements and our policies toward Latin America have broken them.

And we’re seeing, of course, those similar things in the Middle East and in Africa, these waves of immigrants that are swarming into Europe from the Middle East. These terrible problems that have been created because of the greed of big corporations.

I was just in Central America and what we talk about in the U.S. as being an immigration problem is really a trade agreement problem.

They’re not allowed to impose tariffs under the trade agreements - NAFTA and CAFTA - but the U.S. is allowed to subsidize its farmers. Those governments can’t afford to subsidize their farmers. So our farmers can undercut theirs, and that’s destroyed the economies, and a number of other things, and that’s why we’ve got immigration problems.

van Gelder: Can you talk about the violence that people are fleeing in Central America, and how that links back to the role the U.S. has had there?

Perkins: Three or four years ago the CIA orchestrated a coup against the democratically elected president of Honduras, President Zelaya, because he stood up to Dole and Chiquita and some other big, global, basically U.S.-based corporations.

He wanted to raise the minimum wage to a reasonable level, and he wanted some land reform that would make sure that his own people were able to make money off their own land, rather than having big international corporations do it.

The big corporations couldn’t stand for this. He wasn’t assassinated but he was overthrown in a coup and sent to another country, and replaced by a terribly brutal dictator, and today Honduras is one of the most violent, homicidal countries in the hemisphere.

It’s frightening what we’ve done. And when that happens to a president, it sends a message to every other president throughout the hemisphere, and in fact throughout the world: Don’t mess with us.

Don’t mess with the big corporations. Either cooperate and get rich in the process, and have all your friends and family get rich in the process, or go get overthrown or assassinated. It’s a very strong message.

van Gelder: I wanted to ask about your time spent in Ecuador with indigenous people. I’m wondering if you could talk about how that experience has changed you?

Perkins: Many years ago when I was a Peace Corps volunteer in the Amazon with the Shuar indigenous people there, I was dying.

I got very ill, and my life was saved in one night by a shaman. I’d come out of business school this is 1968, ’69, and I had no idea what a shaman was, but it changed my life by helping me understand that what was killing me was a mindset - what they would call the dream.

I spent many years studying all this, and working with many different indigenous groups, and what I saw was the power of the mindset.

The shamans teach us - the indigenous people teach us - once you change the mindset, then it’s pretty easy to have the objective reality change around it. So, instead of the kind of economy we have now, a death economy, if we can change the mindset we can very quickly move into a life economy.

van Gelder: So what are the mechanisms by which a change in consciousness actually shifts things on the ground?

Perkins: Well, in my opinion the biggest catalyst that needs to go forward to change this is we’ve got to change the corporations. We’ve got to move from that goal that was stated by Milton Friedman in the 1970s, that the only responsibility of corporations is to maximize profits regardless of social and environmental costs.

We change the big corporations by telling them we’re not going to buy from you anymore unless you change your goal. No longer should your goal be to maximize profits regardless of social and environmental costs. Make a decent rate of return for your investors, but serve us, we the people, or we’re not buying from you.

van Gelder : You quote Tom Paine in your book: “If there must be trouble let it be in my day that my child may have peace.” Why did you decide to use that quote?

Perkins : Well, I think Tom Paine was brilliant in that statement. He understood how that would impact people. And he wrote that statement in December 1776.

Washington had lost just about every battle he ever fought; he wasn’t getting any support from the Continental Congress; they weren’t giving his men guns or ammunition or even blankets and shoes, and he was bogged down at Valley Forge. Paine realizes that he’s got to somehow write something that will rally people, and there’s nothing that rallies people more than to think about their children.

That to me is where we’re at right now. I’ve got a daughter and I’ve got an 8-year-old grandson. Bring on the trouble for me, OK, but let’s create a world they’re going to want to live in. And let’s understand that my 8-year-old grandson cannot have an environmentally sustainable and regenerative, socially just, fulfilling world unless every child on the planet has that.

And this is new. It used to be all we had to worry about was our local community, maybe our country. But we didn’t have to worry about the world. But what we know now is that we can’t have peace anywhere in the world, we can’t have peace in the U.S., unless everybody has peace.


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Flawed Germ Theory; Unfortunately The Basis Of Modern Medicine
May 25 2018 | From: Tbyil

Ever wonder why modern medicine is not helping the populations of the western world to become healthier? Maybe the foundation for health is wrong.



Pasteur's germ theory of disease has helped forward the one germ for one disease concept that has raised Big Pharma to the wealthy business of developing drugs for one germ to purportedly cure one disease while causing autoimmune and chronic diseases to flourish from destroyed immune systems.

Related:
The Medical Dictatorship of Australia, New Zealand, Canada, England and the USA

Germ phobia, here comes the flu, get your flu shots or you may wind up as one of the 36,000 who manage to die from it each year according to the CDC. It's never more, never less - 36,000 deaths each flu season. Isn't there something fishy about that?

Then get out the antibiotics for every case of the sniffles. Don't forget the pharmaceutical antiviral Tamiflu, expensive, not so effective, and dangerous. The germ theory has turned out to be great for the pharmaceutical business model.



Related: Patients at risk and billions of dollars being wasted because of tests, scans and procedures that don't work

Now we have those nasty mosquitoes carrying the Zika virus, which has no real history of being problematic. So spray everything and everyone with toxic chemicals that do cause disease. And let's not forget those new vaccines. Over a billion dollars of government money has been recently set aside for Zika virus research and vaccines.


Why the Germ Theory is Flawed

The following quote is used by Dr. Robert O. Young in his book Sick and Tired?: Reclaim Your Inner Terrain:


“If I could live my life over again, I would devote it to proving that germs seek their natural habitat - diseased tissue - rather than being the cause of the diseased tissue; e.g., mosquitoes seek the stagnant water, but do not cause the pool to become stagnant.”

-
Dr. Rudolph Virchow (Father of Pathology 1821 - 1902)

Related:Shocking Report from Medical Insiders: a shocking amount of published research is unreliable at best, if not completely false, as in, fraudulent

Pasteur was the original scammer of the germ theory, not considered a worthy scientist by his peers. But he had good press. Media bias and corruption are nothing new.

Other scientists, especially Claude Bernard, claimed the inner terrain, which includes overall and organ specific pH levels and all facets of the immune system countered Pasteur's one germ for one disease theory with claims of pleomorphism within damaged or diseased tissue, which the Medical Mafia and Big Pharma refused to acknowledge.

Pleomorphism was proven when Royal Raymond Rife's universal microscope in the late 1930s revealed structural changes in microbes, up to 16, according their host's environment. Microbes can start out as benign then alter themselves to survive if one's inner terrain is unhealthy.

In other words, inflammation and tissue degeneration with acidic pH levels attract pathogenic microbes or encourage existing ones into morphing as pathogenic microbes if already present and harmless or even beneficial. The germ theory hoax is the basis of modern pharmaceutical medicine and killing good food with pasteurization and irradiation.

Not only do our highly acidic junk and processed foods with add sugars promote acidic pH levels under 7.3, so do overworking, stress, and anger. The combination of our environmental toxic load and inadequate nutrition lead to the stagnant pools within our tissues that become the breeding grounds for existing or new pathogenic microbes to thrive.

Detoxing and seeking fresh whole foods with the proper supplements offer more disease protection from germs than all the vaccines in the world.





Vaccinations offer the following tradeoffs for thwarting germs: Death, lifelong disability, or most commonly autoimmune disease vulnerability.

Haven't you noticed? Autoimmune diseases and allergies have risen with the rise in vaccination schedules.

There have been studies in the USA among Amish children and in Europe among those raised on small dairy farms that demonstrate how being exposed to germs at an early age exercises the immune system and make it stronger, thus rendering natural immunization.

This is where rude, crude, over the top and hilarious George Carlin comes in:




Another Reason to Not Trust the CDC's Fear Mongering

Sharyl Attkinson was the news producer for CBS's Washington Bureau. During the Swine Flu “pandemic” of 2008-9, she was intent at getting to the truth of just how much of an epidemic it really was. Sharyl, who is now independent with her own website and her book Stonewalled in circulation, questioned the authenticity of the CDC's reportage on incidents of Swine Flu.



Related: Sharyl Attkinson On The Hypnotic Power Of Germ Propaganda

After being stonewalled by the CDC with her Freedom of Information (FOI) requests for detailed statistics on the Swine Flu, she and her CBS Washington Bureau news staff did an end around – they went directly to state health departments and discovered only a very few flu cases, mostly single digit numbers, tested positive for Swine Flu.

Those numbers were not nearly enough to justify claims of a level 6 pandemic, considered the most severe and dangerous international pandemic level.

Then the CDC attempted damage control by announcing they had stopped counting because there were millions of Swine Flu cases and they couldn't keep up with it.



Related: Flu Vaccines are Toxic

Wow, if the first lie doesn't work then tell a bigger one, even if it doesn't make any sense at all. This incident forced Sharyl out of mainstream news. Can't question the CDC on mainstream TV.

You're better off sticking with alternative media and holistic health approaches for establishing a stronger immune system by lessening your toxic chemical load and increasing your nutritional level with organic foods and supplements.

See also:

Louis Pasteur, Antoine Bechamp and the True Causes of Disease

Modern Medicine: How Healing Illness became Managing Symptoms for Profit


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Make No mistake: The Royal Wedding Was A Strategic Move By The House Of Windsor To Rebrand And Survive
May 24 2018 | From: iNews

Are you wild about Harry or mad about Meghan? No? Then what are we to make of this royal wedding, if we are not fervent monarchists or happen to be (whisper it) republicans?



Should we take an interest in what’s going on at Windsor Castle? Yes, because it’s not just a supercharged reality show, or royality show if you will.

Comment: The source copy of this article clearly reads as a Public Relations exercise. The links that have been added below are not from the original article - however they serve as a poigntant reminder of the fact that the 'British Royal Family' represent nothing more than a horse-and-pony show distraction from the Illuminati agenda of which they comprise a fundamental component.

Related: A Few Inconvenient Truths About The 'British Royal Family': The Queen's Speech - Decyphered

It’s part of a strategic move by the House of Windsor to remake itself yet again, as it must always do to survive, and that’s worth understanding.

The royal biographer Robert Harris said the Queen learned how to do this from her greatgrandfather, Edward VII.

“During his reign, other royal families in Austria and elsewhere were being toppled and his aim was to save ours. To do that he realised he must stop the monarchy seeming to be at the top of the social pile and make direct links to popular feeling, and to connect it with the ordinary people directly.”

And Harris said that in 2012, even before the Queen agreed to appear as if she were jumping out of a helicopter with James Bond at the start of the Olympics, perhaps the most remarkable sight of her reign.



Related: The British East India Company: The Drug Company of the Venetian Black Nobility


Tough Act to Follow

William and Harry appear to have their late mother Diana’s common touch, of course, so there have long been wistful calls for the Crown to skip a generation, miss out crotchety old Charles and go straight to the next in line.

Last year, a poll said that if there was a choice between the heir and his son as the next king, 51 per cent of us would choose William. But that’s just not possible, legally or constitutionally. Charles gets his turn next whether he wants it or not, and he so does.

But he will come to the throne as a relatively old man, acutely aware that his mother is an impossible act to follow.

The Queen is a global icon, the bearer of wartime values we often wish we had not lost and a fine example of devotion to duty, as even those of us who would rather not have a monarchy have to admit.



Related: The Coming Fall Of The House Of Windsor

These are austere times so plans have been drawn up for a shorter, scaled-down coronation service – and to do it quickly, so there isn’t time for people to wonder out loud what it’s all about.

Charles wants Camilla to be Queen, although that remains a problem. “I don’t think the greater populace truly accept Camilla,” says PR expert Mark Borkowski. “The legacy of Diana, distant as it is now, will never be undone.”


Hearts and Minds

But William and Harry (together with Kate and Meghan) do generate the kind of warmth some people felt for their Mum and a lot more people still feel for their Granny. So in terms of PR, there are signs that the boys and the wives are beginning to do the heavy lifting.

In that sense, the House of Windsor is already skipping a generation. They’re the new front of house team, charming people, shaking hands and trading kisses, posing for selfies in a way that makes the flesh of the future King Charles crawl.

“They’ve carried out a very good strategy of succession management,” says Borkowski, aware that communications experts loyal to Charles have run things in recent years, but have lately handed the baton to those in Kensington Palace, where both the princes live.



Related: The British Empire Is Un-Masked, But Desperate

“You’re seeing a generation of people who are very loyal to the Queen easing out. And you’re seeing a very quiet and sometimes invisible Charles, testing the water on what happens when the two young royals take the lead.”

The plan is (as ever, since the Sixties) to look just like us only better. They’re helped in this by so many Britons having been led to believe they’re only a lottery ticket or an X Factor audition from fame and fortune.

It’s a terrible lie, but it means people don’t resent wealth and privilege like they used to – which is handy for those at the top of the pile as the poverty gap gets wider and wider.


Sixth in Line

Harry’s got the easier job, being only sixth in line, so is it still possible to have empathy for a prince on his £32m big day? Yes.

He didn’t ask to be born into this bizarre family, with a distant father and a mother who died young, or to walk behind her coffin in the full glare of the world, while still only a boy.

Harry was a bit of a dick in his youth, let’s be honest. Wearing a Nazi uniform to a fancy dress party is profoundly stupid and tasteless anyway, let alone when your own family, like, led the fight against them and lost people in the war and everything, yah?

Getting snapped naked in a Vegas hotel room was not clever, and there were other scandals. They were, he admitted, a sign of him being “more army than prince”. And he didn’t want to leave the army, calling it, “The best escape I ever had.”



Related: Unlawful Killing - The Murder Of Princess Diana And Why It Matters

But he did serve his country on the front line (however much the SAS resented having to protect him) and that service has clearly helped the 32-year-old mature into a man with a conscience matched by his wife-to-be. They don’t want presents, just donations to seven charities, including the homeless, kids with Aids and rather marvellously Surfers Against Sewage.

A couple of thousand people have been invited to stand in the grounds of Windsor Castle to “feel part of” the wedding as a reward for their charity work or bravery. (Let’s not get carried away, though: these peasant extras have been told to bring their own lunch. Nobody’s getting a day off work, either. And it’s FA Cup Final Day, for God’s sake.) He’s hot too, of course. They both are. That helps.


Far From a Fairytale

“I can tell you that at the end of the day I think it’s really simple,” Markle told Vanity Fair. “We’re two people who are really happy and in love.”

But it’s not that simple at all is it? Granny, for one, must have a swirl of emotions going on right now.

As anyone who has seen the sympathetically dramatised version of her life will know, Elizabeth only wears The Crown because her uncle abdicated to marry an American divorcee and the pressure of having to become king helped kill her father.



Related: The Royal Institute Of International Affairs

Princess Margaret was caused (and caused) misery after being forbidden to love a divorcee. Surely Elizabeth will wish her sister could have enjoyed the happiness Harry now has.

But it’s fair to say Meghan’s own family life is no fairytale. Take her estranged half brother Tom, who wrote an open letter to the groom saying he was making “the biggest mistake in royal wedding history”. That’s a little ignorant (Henry VIII anyone?) but it is Sopranos-level entertaining.

This is not just a family drama though, it’s a regeneration show too. Kate added the common touch to the Windsor DNA when she married William. Meghan Markle adds sparkle and Hollywood glamour but also a steely, worldly-wise cleverness.

She’s smart, eloquent and will make a direct appeal to the Americans who will surely come again in droves to walk the streets of London, spending money and believing in the royal fantasy more avidly than Britons could ever do. That will work wonders for the argument that the Royal Family brings in more cash to the country than we taxpayers have to fork out.

The American ambassador says this will be “another symbol” that our two nations are “about as close as you can get, like family”. Trump will come and go (hopefully) but this transatlantic “special relationship” will go on (hopefully).



Related: Nothing To Celebrate In ANZAC: The Bloody History Of The British Empire


Reflecting Reality

And we can’t ignore the issue of race. There has long been tension in the royal family about whether or not they should try harder to reflect the reality of an increasingly multicultural kingdom.

Charles, who understands the need, fretted about being the defender of faiths and there has been much talk behind the scenes about how to tweak the thousand-year-old coronation ceremony to allow in other religions (and that will happen) but Meghan is a game-changer.

As Britain becomes more and more mixed race, she makes the Royal Family look more like us.

Eight out of ten Brits have no problem with her becoming our first mixed race princess, which sounds as if it should be obvious except that the poll was taken to mark the anniversary of Enoch Powell’s Rivers of Blood speech, so even that indifference feels significant.



Related: The Top Of The Pyramid: The Rothschilds, The Vatican And The British Crown Rule World

Meghan brings as much to the family business as she will take. Is it all really that cynical? Probably not.

It is entirely possible to believe in the official version of events – they met on a blind date set up by a friend, had no real idea of who each other was and realised they were truly in love on a camping trip under African stars – but also recognise that Meghan is a huge gift to the Royal Family and its survival.


Sibling Rivalry

“She ticks every last box on race, on modernity, on marrying outside the system,” says Mark Borkowski. “If anything, she’s too good,” he says, predicting trouble.

“Meghan and Harry could be a power couple, any cause they choose to support is going to be turbo-charged, but that’s going to create jealousies between them and William and Kate.”

The trouble with putting them front and centre is that youth and beauty fade, cracks may emerge and popularity fall, in which case Harry’s wedding could look in retrospect like a season finale.



Related: ‘The Black Spider Memos': Prince Charles, Secrecy And The British Government

The one before the Queen died and this long-running royality show finally jumped the shark (or lost the plot) as they say in Hollywood, where Meghan grew up.

That’s what royalists dread and republicans will love.

“The Royal Family will look back on this period while the Queen is alive as a golden time, because it is all going to unravel when she’s gone. She’s the glue. When she’s not around, you’re going to get Game of Thrones.”



Related Articles:

Kate’s Tutor And Royal Adviser Is A War Criminal Weapons Dealer: Sir David Manning

Global Terror: The British Connection

The British Woke UP - Can The Americans?

The Queen 'Backs Brexit' [UK Exit Of European Union] + Who Controls The Central Banks?

Royal Deceit? The Queen's Bank Under Investigation Over Tax Evasion

Murder On Queen Elizabeth II's Orders

Their Royal Heilnesses - Secret 1933 Film Shows Edward VIII Teaching This Nazi Salute To The Queen

Brexit And The Matrix & The Sun Sets On The British Empire: Northern Irish Want Out After Brexit

Punk Icon Johnny Rotten Cheers Brexit, Calls Trump A “Political Sex Pistol” + Brexit Bill Becomes Law As
UK Queen Elizabeth II Gives Royal Assent



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

An Invisible Form Of Oppression: Our Food System
May 23 2018 | From: Sott

On April 4, 2018, the 50th anniversary of Martin Luther King Jr.'s death, I was honored to be asked to speak at Riverside Church in Harlem, the church where 51 years ago to the day MLK Jr. spoke out about the injustice of the Vietnam War. From that same pulpit, I gave a talk about the role of our food system and the food industry in deliberately subverting public health and targeting the poor and minorities.



The day was focused on MLK Jr's fight for civil rights and social justice for the minorities and poor. The harm of the food system, however, affects all of us. This is the transcript of the speech I gave on that auspicious night.

Related: Plastic found in most bottled water, triggering World Health Organisation review

As a doctor, I took an oath to do no harm. Today, I stand here because there is harm being done to millions and I must speak out. We know all too well the visible forms of racism in our society. We know the inequities in income and opportunity.

We know the brutal violence and discrimination of the police. We know the shooting of black children. We know the name of Tamir Rice. We know the name of unarmed black men shot in the back. We know the name of Stephon Clark.

But we don't know the names of millions of African Americans killed every year by an invisible form of racism, a silent and insidious injustice.





Related: Arsenic In Rice: How Concerned Should You Be?

This is an often-internalized force of racism and oppression that disproportionately affects the poor and African American communities.

We do know that 1.3% of all deaths are caused by gun violence. And it is real and tragic and needs to end.

But we may not know that 70% of deaths are caused by chronic disease - mostly the result of our toxic food system.

More African Americans are killed by bad food than anything else.

The science is clear - our processed, sugary, starchy diet is the single biggest cause of disease and death-type 2 diabetes, obesity, heart disease, stroke, high blood pressure, cancer, and even dementia.

Our food system is the deadliest weapon used against the poor and minorities- keeping them poor, sick and fat, hijacking their brains and biology.

We are told that it is our personal choice, that being fat results from eating too much and not exercising enough. That blames the victim - the subliminal message is that it's your fault you are fat and sick.

We may think that what we eat is a personal choice that is rooted in our cultural heritage and family customs.



Related: Toxins from everyday products are probably in your body – even if you’re diligent about avoiding them

But we know that the food industry designs our food to be addictive, that they hire craving experts who work in taste institutes to design what they call the bliss point of food - all with the purpose of creating heavy users. These are their internal corporate terms.

What if I told you that the food industry specifically targets the poor and minorities? It is easy to get someone who is already drinking a 20-ounce soda to buy a 2 liter bottle of soda.

Research shows that African American kids drink twice as much soda as white kids.

What if I told you that sugar and processed foods were more addictive than cocaine, that the food industry has hijacked our brain chemistry, our taste buds, our metabolism, our bodies and our minds?

When our foods are biologically addictive the notion of personal choice is a fiction. It blames the victims for their choices.

How can we take care of our communities, when 23 million Americans live in food deserts? Where the only food available is processed junk from convenience stores, fast food outlets, and the closest grocery store is more than a mile away. And where it's hard to find fresh fruits and vegetables or healthy food.

But the problem isn't only food deserts.



Related: Toxic Food Is Killing Humanity: One-Fifth Of Global Deaths Now Linked To Processed Junk Food And Toxic
Ingredient


It is food swamps - communities filled with fast food chains and bodegas plying highly processed addictive foods. They sell gallon cups of soda, and other sugar-loaded beverages, and there are fast-food chains peddling burgers, fries, and fried chicken on almost every street corner.

We know that your zip code is more important than your genetic code in determining your risk of disease and death.

And what about our kids? Forty percent of them are overweight. We now see 3 year olds with type 2 diabetes - which we used to call adult onset diabetes.

We are told that kids' behavior problems results from bad parenting. The research shows that African Americans are far less likely to graduate from high school or go to college.

But if our children go to school with a breakfast of Coke or colored sugar water and Doritos or Flaming Hot chips how can we expect them to focus or pay attention?

These are not foods. They are food-like substances with no nutritional benefit.



Related: Gender-Confused: Shocking study reveals 86% of teenagers’ bodies contaminated with gender-bending chemicals from plastics

This diet creates an "achievement gap" because kids are too sick to learn - and affects far more kids of color than any other group. These kids are less likely to go to college, earn good incomes, and more likely to get sick and die young.

One in 10 of our kids are on ADD medication. And the science shows the junk our kids eat is a big part of the cause.

The food industry spends $10 billion on marketing junk food to our kids every year. The average kid sees over 6,000 ads for junk food and soda on TV and even more through social media. And minorities and African American kids are targeted more aggressively. These companies are junk food pushers.

Do you really think it was a coincidence that Paula Abdul and all the judges on American Idol had a 24 -ounce container of Coke in front of them at every show?


Top sports stars receive tens of millions of dollars from soda and fast food giants to promote their products to our children who idolize them.

Yet it doesn't have to be that way.



Related: Ultra-Processed and Plastic-Contaminated Food Wreak Havoc on Health

Charter schools in the poorest most disadvantaged communities of color who feed the kids two to three healthy meals a day find that the kids are more likely to go to college than go to jail.

And we incarcerate African Americans at five times the rate of white Americans. Much of that is the result of racial targeting by the police and judicial system.

But it could be that much violent crime is also the result of our diet that robs us of our minds, affects our thinking, judgement, and ability to make good choices.

You may think that's too far-fetched. But studies have shown feeding violent prisoners healthy diets in prisons can reduce crime by 56%. When adding a multivitamin - because they're all so nutritionally deficient - violent crime goes down by 80%. We know that the task of ending mass incarceration and the New Jim Crow is complex and urgent.

We know that the task of building a just food system is also complex and urgent. We have to build a new food system together. Part of this task is listening to the voices of those directly affected by our toxic food system.



Related: Heavy metal poisoning causes personality shifts in birds; they become less curious and unwilling to explore new places

I once received a letter from a prison, from a murderer who changed his diet in prison and realized that his whole life of eating junk had made him violent and eating real food transformed him into a different person.

The food industry employs nefarious tactics to prevent change. They buy friends, silence critics, and sweeten their profits.

I was part of a documentary called Fed Up - a movie about how our food system makes us sick and fat with addictive sugary, starchy products.

I met with Bernice King, Martin Luther King Jr.'s daughter, and she explained to me to that non-violence also includes non-violence to ourselves. She was excited about showing Fed Up at the King Center in Atlanta.

But a few days later I got a call that the we couldn't show the film. Why, I asked? The answer: Coca-Cola funds the King Center.

The Dean of Spelman College in Atlanta told me that 50% of the entering class of African American freshman women had a chronic disease - type 2 diabetes, hypertension, or obesity.



Related: New Lawsuit Could Stop Fluoridation of Water Supply

I asked her why there were Coke machines and fountains all over campus. Coca-Cola is one of the biggest donors to the college.

The NAACP has received $2.1 million dollars from Coca-Cola alone since 1986. Coca-Cola also funded the Hispanic Federation.

Is it any surprise the NAACP and Hispanic groups oppose a soda tax?

We cannot stand for this. Martin Luther King Jr. once said, "Our lives begin to end the day we become silent about things that matter."

We can no longer be silent about this.

If you are African American you are 80% more likely to be diagnosed with type 2 diabetes, over 4 times as likely to have kidney failure, and 3.5 times as likely to suffer amputations as whites.

Yet we remain silent about the role of the food system killing millions of Americans. They tell us it is all personal choice.



Related: We’re all gobbling down 100 pieces of plastic with every meal

Nonsense. Big food corrupts public health and advocacy groups. They fund hunger groups like the Food Research and Action Center and Feeding America.

These hunger groups strongly oppose limiting the use of food stamps or SNAP to buy soda, despite the fact the single biggest item of our food stamp bill (over $7 billion a year) is soda, or 20 billion servings a year to the poor.

Soda and sugar-sweetened beverages are the single biggest cause of obesity and type 2 diabetes.

Our bodies, our health, our children, our communities have been taken from us.

It is time we take them back.

It is time we say no to big food and institutionalized food injustice that is causing this slow-motion genocide.

It is time to free ourselves from corporate interests that privatize the profits and socialize the costs of their products.


Taking back our food and our food system is a revolutionary act.

There are things we can't change as individuals. But we all eat. We vote three times a day with our fork.

The single biggest political act and the single biggest act of self-love, of rebuilding our communities, is to choose real food.



Related: What NOT to Eat

So, what is real food? It's pretty simple. Next time you pick up something to eat, ask yourself this question: Did God make this or did man make this?

Did God make Doritos or a Coke? No. Did God make an egg or broccoli? Yes. We can teach our kids and teach ourselves how to choose and eat food that brings life not death.

Big Food would have you believe that it is expensive, that it is difficult, that it takes too much time. Don't believe them. It is not true.

We need to educate our kids, ourselves, and our communities. We have to do this together. In fact, we can only do this together. Black lives matter. Yes. And black health matters, too!

The harm done by the global food industry affects nearly all humans on the planet in some way.

This must stop. We can stop it with our fork, the most powerful weapon we have to change our health, our communities, our economy and the health the of the planet.

Wishing you health and happiness, Mark Hyman, MD



Related Articles:

Lead Exposure May Be The Hidden Cause Of 412,000 Deaths Each Year

E-Cigarettes Found To Have 10 times More Cancer Causing Ingredients Than Regular Cigarettes

The Hidden Dangers of of Soylent "Meal Replacement"

4 personal care products you can pitch in the trash (and replace with something much better)

Higher Cholesterol Levels Associated With Better Health

How Air Fresheners Are Killing You

Relieve stress naturally with these scientifically proven supplements

The Age of Aluminium

Most Bottled Water Contaminated With Microplastics

How Sunscreen Could Be Causing Skin Cancer, Not The Sun

FDA found glyphosate in nearly all foods tested and hid the results


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Monetary System Is Collapsing: The Most Insidious Form Of Theft
May 22 2018 | From: FinalWakeupCall

Lack of logical foundation: President Richard M. Nixon announced on August 15, 1971, that the U.S. would no longer officially exchange dollars for gold and many are still referring to that decision as one of the biggest mistakes ever.



Nixon, for one, thought gold-price stability was bogus. It has since become clear why he went off the gold standard.

Related: Financial Fraud: Easy Money Corrupts The Monetary System

A good controlling factor over the monetary system would be the price of gold. The implications; conduct monetary and fiscal policy such that the gold markets are content to sit tight, and marvel at the economic results. Do otherwise, and the ordeal of the 1970s will be repeated today.

Rarely in the history of political economy have choices been so stark, so obvious. One wonders whether it is being done on purpose. Which as we know is actually the truth.

The USD has no logical foundation behind it with regards to any sustainable value due to a lack of hard asset collateral. It’s just air! That means all people’s money, in their checking, savings, investment and retirement accounts is simply not real! And since 1971 never has been!

When the new gold backed USN is forced into play, money will obtain real value, and matters are going to change very fast. This dramatic event for change will start happening sooner than anyone realises, while the great illusion of western dominance will end.

Three quarters of a century of military dominance will be gone in the blink of an eye. No more grace periods to extend. No more meetings to renegotiate treaties and implement international bankruptcy rulings.



Related: The Old World Is Collapsing, Where Do We Go From Here?

It is clear, that the new global financial system has evolved to a higher standard. It will prevent many forms of fraud and allow for unrestricted movement of funds from place to place as needed, instead of delays or freezes or holds due to compliance issues.

Unimpeded movement of funds is important to the wellbeing of society. The timely arrival of funds according to budgetary needs is critical to the survival of businesses.

Today’s end of the line situation is far grimmer than anyone is being told. Only the implementation of RV followed by GESARA will deliver the fiscal remedy for folks who must now live in this new reality. By the way, only Americans enjoyed the continuing endless supply of currency being forced upon them by the holders of all global debt, known as The Chinese Elders.


The Weakness of Paper Money:

Precisely this non-backing of currency is the inherent weakness of “paper money” – governments have the power to declare paper to be “legal tender” – but they do not have the power to give that money value. This is something that no one, especially not politicians will tell you.

All Central Banks should be abolished.

The average citizen doesn’t have a clue how dangerous and corrupt the Central Banking System and their governments really are. Please read here how we the people can help to abolish all Central Banks.

The world over, governments have embarked on an out-of-control experiment with debt money, that they could alternatively have issued as ‘debt-free-money’, without interest. –In today’s world, credit money is printed in absurd quantities out of thin air, and so much of it is borrowed that it can never ever be paid back in full to the creditors.



Related: The Monetary System: Downward Slide IntoTyranny, Slavery, And Self-Destruction

It took the USA “216 years to rack up $8.5 trillion in debt… and then just 8 more years to double that amount.” – Governments won’t be able to do a single thing about this crisis, as they themselves have knowingly created it!

When governments tap out their ability to increase their tax revenue and their debts become too mountainous to maintain; they have one last way they can take what they need, and it is the most insidious. They can print the currency they need to pay for whatever they want.


The Most Insidious Form of Theft

The Central Banks’ balance sheet – which represents the total amount of currency in circulation or in central bank’s reserves – has the USD blown up from $1.1 trillion in 2008 to nearly $4 trillion in 2017.

Not many people understand the misconception of these actions or their inevitable failure. The great advantage of paper money is purportedly its flexibility.

They can, in theory, print more of it when they need it to facilitate economic growth or forestall a crisis. But that doesn’t really work. Printing money doesn’t create wealth or stimulate the economy. Instead, it simply makes each unit in circulation less valuable and leads to higher prices, a monetary phenomenon that is called inflation.



Related: Babylonian Money Magic & How Modern "Commercial Law" Is Based On Ancient Babylonian Codes

It is an insidious form of stealing. People feel wealthier as the numbers on their pay checks and bank balances rise. As nominal stock prices rise, people feel as though things are going well. But they don’t notice the value of each unit is eroding steadily.

Worse still, it provides incentives for going into debt. People who borrow today will repay those obligations in the future with units that are worth much less.

Inflation has been so prevalent for so long, most people don’t even know it’s not part of a normal economic system. Data on consumer prices from 1596-1971 in Great Britain prove that during gold-standard periods, commodity prices remain stable – even over hundreds of years – during periods of massive economic growth and soaring populations.

The most important test of paper money is whether it facilitates real, per-capita economic growth. And on that score, the evidence is overwhelmingly negative. When money is sound and reliable, it doesn’t lose value over time.


The Name of the Game is the ‘Race to Debase’ Purchasing Power

Today’s monetary system, however, isn’t sound or reliable. Politicians fool around with the money supply constantly. Sometimes, they increase the amount of money by huge amounts in response to demands from powerful groups, especially banks.

As a result, the products you need to live a regular life – like gasoline, milk, housing, and medical care – constantly increase in price. And these prices go up, year after year, even when wages don’t.

Paper money works great for the rich, who can hedge their exposure to the currency and whose access to fixed-rate credit allows huge asset purchases. But it is horrible for the middle class.



Related: The Money Scam Makes Us Slaves: Gold Is Waterproof And Indestructible In The Sea Of Fiat Currencies

When the US-dollar as the reserve currency was taken off gold, it allowed the central banks to continuously debase their currency, while the wages paid in the same currency no longer kept pace with inflation.

Any reasonable study of paper-money systems versus gold-backed monetary systems demonstrates the superiority of gold straightaway. So, why does almost every modern government choose paper?

The answer is because paper money allows the wealthy and powerful vested interests in the economy to manipulate interest rates, prices, the money supply, and credit to their exclusive advantage.

Today’s monetary system dooms every average worker to poverty and almost guarantees that the rich and powerful will become richer. And it is this massive gap that is ultimately fuelling the problems the world faces today.


The Problem with Paper Assets

Wealth is either physical, by for example owning a big house or a Rembrandt painting, or it is paper wealth.



Related: The 75 Trillion Dollar Shadow Banking System Is In Danger Of Collapsing

All paper assets are a claim against tangible goods and services. No more goods and services can be obtained than the economy can produce. Since the economy of 2008-13 produced only a fraction as much real wealth as the claims against it, those claims will have to be applied to future output.


The Debt

The IMF has just reported that total global debt is now at a staggering $164 trillion, which amounts to 225% of total global GDP. Every person on this planet could turn over everything they produce for the next two to three years and the world will still be in debt.

The number is so astronomically high that it is impossible to pay off, and so there really is no point in even trying. In fact, governments are not at all concerned with paying off the debt because they know the number has lost it’s meaning in the face of such cartoonish proportions.

Currency is created by private institutions who create as much money as banks and governments desire. This money is created out of thin air, literally by punching a few keys on a computer keyboard and sending tiny currents of electricity to a screen which displays whatever number the private corporation wants.

It is not backed by anything of value, yet these private institutions charge interest to governments and private sector borrowers.



Related: Paradise Papers: The Shadowy World Of Big Money

For every unit created and loaned, the magical money-lenders demand that unit back with interest. Since the lender is demanding more than was created, it is mathematically impossible to ever pay off debt, because the currency units to pay for interest simply don’t exist.

The modern-day debt system maintains a tragic if not dramatic tension in the world, and on a planet with such abundant resources, you have to wonder with a global debt number so high, do people of the planet owe money to each other, or are they really in debt to some type of institution?

It definitely does not make sense for the human race to enslave itself with such an insane system. Theoretically the debt is owed to the central banks that created the units out of nothing. So actually there is no debt owed to anybody!


Corruption of Debt

The only way the government can give away something is by first taking it from someone else. This is critical. The governments are taking what they want, and this is exactly what has created today’s crisis.

Taxes are the most obvious way governments take for redistribution. But governments are now reaching the limits of what they can generate from new or higher taxes. When governments realise they can’t take any more from you through taxes, they use debt instruments to take from your children and grandchildren.

Governments have taken advantage of that option to a historic degree; the U.S. and EU government owe more than $20 trillion each. The number is so large, it’s meaningless. No one can comprehend how much money $20 trillion really is. A better way to think about it is to say; each taxpayer owes roughly $175,000. That’s like a whole additional mortgage for most people.



Related: The Next Move To Steal Your Money: A Plan To Rip-Off Your Wealth

This massive amount of national debt cannot be financed at any real rate of interest. If governments have to pay even 6% interest on their debt, it would cost roughly $1.2 trillion a year. And that’s just to pay the interest on the debt. The entire government brings in about $3.3 trillion a year in taxes.

This debt addiction has filtered into four critical areas of the economy. Instead of learning from the mistakes that crippled the economy in 2008 when the mortgage bubble burst, they have created three new bubbles that could soon blow up.


1. The largest threat is the corporate bond market, particularly junk bonds.

When this crash occurs, it will be the largest destruction of wealth in history. There has never been a bigger bubble in bonds.


2. Student debt forms another looming bubble

Over the past 10 years, students, most of whom have virtually no income, have racked up enormous debts. As of 2017, student debt totals more than $1.5 trillion, the second-largest source of household debt after home mortgages.

All the signs show that the debt piled on our youth will become another catastrophic bubble in the western economy.



Related: The Bankers’ Scam - The Power Of Money: Beat The Bankers Through Debt Termination & Commonwealth Bank Of Australia: One Of The Largest Banks In The World Just Accused Of Laundering Millions For Drug Cartels


3. The subprime auto lending bubble is poised to cripple the automotive-industry

Most people have no idea how pervasive subprime loans have become in auto lending. Over 90% of cars sold are financed by loans of leases.


4. The housing bubble trouble

The housing bubble is going to repeat itself with even more unsold and unfinished houses. Spain in 2008 was stuck throughout the country with over 3,5 million unsold houses. That number is set to grow again as about half of the houses ‘sold’ were bought by speculators that cannot resell. So, expect more new and unfinished properties in this upcoming crash, than ten years ago.


How is this substantiated? It’s simple. Historically, “junk” bonds – aka high-yield bonds issued by less-creditworthy companies – have never yielded less than 5% annually. But they hit that low in mid-2014, and today, they’re not much higher than that.

Likewise, in 2014, the difference between the yields on junk bonds and the yields on investment-grade bonds had almost never been lower. That means credit was more available than almost ever before for small, less-than-investment-grade companies. The last time credit was that widely available – and at such low costs – was in 2007. And that ended badly.

Throughout 2015, the spread between low-quality corporate bonds and high-quality corporate bonds began rising. That indicated a growing fear in the market as people reduced the amount of risk in their portfolios and shifted to higher-quality and higher-rated assets.

During the first half of 2016, the high-yield spread began declining. It’s now close to the post-crisis lows of 2014, indicating complacency in the high-yield debt market. But it won’t last. It never does.



Related: Democracy Is A Front For Central Bank Rule & Financial Starvation In A Fiat Debt Slavery Financial System

Most investors don’t know anything about the Central Banks quietly reversing course. They have started draining the system of reserves. In October 2017, they began to “run off” their balance sheet by about $13 billion a month.

That is, as the bonds they hold mature, these assets won’t “roll” into new securities. And so, for the last seven months, their balance sheets have shrunk by $10 billion a month in bond securities and $3 billion a month in mortgage securities.

It took the speculative bubble a long time to reach negative interest rates on junk bonds. It likewise will take a shorter time for this to fundamentally change the financial markets, hurting sentiment and securities prices. But make no mistake, the tide is going out. And the tide is going to get more powerful as it moves on.

The coming collapse in the bond market also will be far worse than it was last time. The Federal Reserve’s twin policies of keeping interest rates near zero and buying tens of billions of dollars in Treasury securities and mortgage-backed debt have driven the huge bull market in bonds and properties.

As the Central Banks buy bonds, they push bond rates down and force the other buyers of bonds to buy riskier debt that historically offers much higher yields.



Related: Unless We Kick Our Addiction To Growth, We’re Heading Towards A Debt-Fuelled Dystopia


The Real Panic in the Corporate Bond Market Could Arrive Soon

Expect the average price of non-investment debt – junk bonds – to fall by 50%. Investment-grade bonds will fall substantially too, by an estimated 25%. This is going to wipe out a huge amount of capital, which is almost 100% guaranteed to happen.

Junk-bond guru Martin Fridson has projected $1.6 trillion of bonds and loans will default. That means three times as many debt issuers will default than in the last recession.

This would have happened already, according to Fridson, but the government has kept interest rates artificially low, making it possible for many at-risk debt-issuers to refinance their debt at a lower interest rate. This delayed an inevitable wave of defaults in the junk-bond industry, but only temporarily. The government can’t keep interest rates low forever. The obvious question is:

Why on Earth did so many people borrow so much money they have no hope of ever repaying?



Related: The Khazarian Bankster Cult That Hijacked The World & Worthless Pieces Of Paper - Interest On Fake Money Is Confiscating Your Freedom

You might assume it stems from a lack of personal responsibility or a decline in moral standards in recent years. As, there is always a segment of society that wants something for nothing. But this doesn’t explain how this problem could grow so large.

The real reason is something quite different: the conclusive corruption of governments and banks.

Because it is impossible to pay off the debts that have been accumulated. Society is fast approaching the point where the government cannot even afford to pay the interest on this debt and that leaves it with one last tool to extend its power over we, the people.


Consumer Society

We have been left with a heavily indebted economy that’s still being fuelled by consumption. The system rewards debtors and punishes savers. It makes long-term capital investments nearly impossible because of economic volatility and financial risks caused by inflation.

Worst of all, the system requires everyone to become a speculator because there’s no other way to safeguard savings.



Related: How Consumerism Is Ruining Our Lives And The World


The Need for Paper Money

What the gold standard would really do would be to ensure a level playing field for all economic actors – borrowers, lenders, and even governments.

That’s why bankers – who are always highly leveraged, media barons – who constantly borrow to buy more properties, and governments – which can never balance their budgets, all hate gold. To maintain their power, they all need paper money. The system and those who profit from it would not survive a transition back to the gold standard.

The little-known reality of a paper money system is that it robs the people of purchasing power.

That means the average person works harder and produces more, but cannot buy as much as he has been used to. Meanwhile, asset prices soar.

The wealthy become wealthier as the value of everything they own becomes inflated along with the currency.



Related: The Fraudulent Monetary System & The Occult Meanings Of Mortgage: Why A Mortgage Is A Pledge To The Dead

This explains why the wealth gap has grown so much since 2000. And it explains why the wealth gap will continue to grow, so long as governments continue their corrupt policies of quantitative easing, corporate bailouts, overspending, and over-taxation.

Simply working harder – or working smarter – isn’t benefiting employees anymore. On the other hand, People who own assets and businesses have seen their wealth soar over the last 40 years.

This system dooms every average worker to poverty and almost guarantees that the rich and powerful will stay that way. And it is this massive gap that is ultimately fuelling today’s problems.


The Entire System is Collapsing, a New System is Needed




Related: CIA Veteran Robert Steele Endorses Neil Keenan - Global Open Source Revolution About To Begin


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

How Greece Became A Guinea Pig For A Cashless And Controlled Society
May 21 2018 | From: MintPressNews / Various

As Greece moves closer to becoming a cashless society, it is clear that the country’s attitude towards cash is reckless and dangerous.
The supposed convenience of switching to a cash-free system comes with a great deal of risk, including needless overreach by the state.



Day by day, we’re moving towards a brave new world where every transaction is tracked, every purchase is recorded, the habits and preferences of everyone noted and analyzed. What I am describing is the “cashless society,” where plastic and electronic money are king, while banknotes and coins are abolished.

Related: Soros Insider: Banks Ending Cash To Establish World Government

“Progress” is, after all, deemed to be a great thing. In a recent discussion, I observed on an online message board regarding gentrification in my former neighborhood of residence in Queens, New York, the closure of yet another longtime local business was met by one user with a virtual shrug: “Who needs stores when you have Amazon?”

This last quote is, of course, indicative of the brick-and-mortar store, at least in its familiar form. In December 2016, Amazon launched a checkout-free convenience store in Seattle - largely free of employees, but also free of cash transactions, as purchases are automatically charged to one’s Amazon account.

“Progress” is therefore cast as the abolition of currency, and the elimination of even more jobs, all in the name of technological progress and the “convenience” of saving a few minutes of waiting at the checkout counter.

Still insist on being old-fashioned and stuck behind the times, preferring to visit brick-and-mortar stores and paying in cash? You may very well be a terrorist! Pay for your coffee or your visit to an internet cafe with cash?

Potential terrorist, according to the FBI. Indeed, insisting on paying with cash is, according to the United States Department of Homeland Security, “suspicious and weird.”



Related: S.W.I.F.T. Defies Khazarian Mafia; Gives Board Seat to Russia

The European Union, ever a force for positive change and progress, also seems to agree. The non-elected European Commission’s “Inception Impact Assessment” warns that the anonymity of cash transactions facilitates “money laundering” and “terrorist financing activities.”

This point of view is shared by such economists as the thoroughly discredited proponent of austerity Kenneth Rogoff, Lawrence Summer (a famed deregulator, as well as eulogizer of the “godfather” of austerity Milton Friedman), and supposed anti-austerity crusader Joseph Stiglitz, who told fawning participants at the World Economic Forum in Davos earlier this year that the United States should do away with all currency.

Logically, of course, the next step is to punish law-abiding citizens for the actions of a very small criminal population and for the failures of law enforcement to curb such activities. The EU plans to accomplish this through the exploration of upper limits on cash payments, while it has already taken the step of abolishing the 500-euro banknote.

The International Monetary Fund (IMF), which day after day is busy “saving” economically suffering countries such as Greece, also happens to agree with this brave new worldview. In a working paper titled “The Macroeconomics of De-Cashing,” which the IMF claims does not necessarily represent its official views, the fund nevertheless provides a blueprint with which governments around the world could begin to phase out cash.



Related: New credit card uses biometric fingerprinting to pay

This process would commence with “initial and largely uncontested steps” (such as the phasing out of large-denomination bills or the placement of upper limits on cash transactions). This process would then be furthered largely by the private sector, providing cashless payment options for people’s “convenience,” rather than risk popular objections to policy-led decashing.

The IMF, which certainly has a sterling track record of sticking up for the poor and vulnerable in society, comforts us by saying that these policies should be implemented in ways that would augment “economic and social benefits.”


The IMF’s Greek Experiment in Austerity

These suggestions, which of course the IMF does not necessarily officially agree with, have already begun to be implemented to a significant extent in the IMF debt colony known officially as Greece, where the IMF has been implementing “socially fair and just” austerity policies since 2010, which have resulted, during this period, in a GDP decline of over 25 percent, unemployment levels exceeding 28 percent, repeated cuts to what are now poverty-level salaries and pensions, and a “brain drain” of over 500,000 people - largely young and university-educated - migrating out of Greece.



Protesters against new austerity measures hold a placard depicting Labour Minister George Katrougalos as the movie character Edward Scissorhands during a protest outside Zappeion Hall in Athens, Friday, Sept. 16, 2016. The placard reads in Greek”Katrougalos Scissorhands”

Indeed, it could be said that Greece is being used as a guinea pig not just for a grand neoliberal experiment in both austerity, but de-cashing as well. The examples are many, and they have found fertile ground in a country whose populace remains shell-shocked by eight years of economic depression.

A new law
that came into effect on January 1 incentivizes going cashless by setting a minimum threshold of spending at least 10 percent of one’s income via credit, debit, or prepaid card in order to attain a somewhat higher tax-free threshold.

Beginning July 27, dozens of categories of businesses in Greece will be required to install aptly-acronymized “POS” (point-of-sale) card readers and to accept payments by card. Businesses are also required to post a notice, typically by the entrance or point of sale, stating whether card payments are accepted or not.

Another new piece of legislation
, in effect as of June 1, requires salaries to be paid via direct electronic transfers to bank accounts. Furthermore, cash transactions of over 500 euros have been outlawed.

In Greece, where in the eyes of the state citizens are guilty even if proven innocent, capital controls have been implemented preventing ATM cash withdrawals of over 840 euros every two weeks. These capital controls, in varying forms, have been in place for two years with no end in sight, choking small businesses that are already suffering.



Related: Europe Proposes "Restrictions On Payments In Cash" & How The Cashless Society Will Track You
Everywhere


Citizens have, at various times, been asked to collect every last receipt of their expenditures, in order to prove their income and expenses - otherwise, tax evasion is assumed, just as ownership of a car (even if purchased a decade or two ago) or an apartment (even if inherited) is considered proof of wealth and a “hidden income” that is not being declared.

The “heroic” former Finance Minister Yanis Varoufakis had previously proposed a cap of cash transactions at 50 or 70 euros on Greek islands that are popular tourist destinations, while also putting forth an asinine plan to hire tourists to work as “tax snitches,” reporting businesses that “evade taxes” by not providing receipts even for the smallest transactions.

All of these measures, of course, are for the Greeks’ own good and are in the best interest of the country and its economy, combating supposedly rampant “tax evasion” (while letting the biggest tax evaders off the hook), fighting the “black market” (over selling cheese pies without issuing a receipt, apparently), and of course, nipping “terrorism” in the bud.

As with the previous discussion I observed about Amazon being a satisfactory replacement for the endangered brick-and-mortar business, one learns a lot from observing everyday conversations amongst ordinary citizens. A recent conversation I personally overheard while paying a bill at a public utility revealed just how successful the initial and largely uncontested steps enacted in Greece have been.

In the line ahead of me, an elderly man announced that he was paying his water bill by debit card, “in order to build towards the tax-free threshold.”



Related: The European Union Initiates Cashless Society Project

When it was suggested to him that the true purpose of encouraging cashless payments was to track every transaction, even for a stick of gum, and to transfer all money into the banking system, he and one other elderly gentleman threw a fit, claiming “there is no other way to combat tax evasion.”

The irony that they were paying by card to avoid taxation themselves was lost on them—as is the fact that the otherwise fiscally responsible Germany, whose government never misses an opportunity to lecture the “spendthrift” and “irresponsible” Greeks, has the largest black market in Europe (exceeding 100 billion euros annually), ranks first in Europe in financial fraud, is the eighth-largest tax haven worldwide, and one of the top tax-evading countries in Europe.

Also lost on these otherwise elderly gentlemen was a fact not included in the official propaganda campaign: Germans happen to love their cash, as evidenced by the fierce opposition that met a government plan to outlaw cash payments of 5,000 euros or more.

In addition, about 80 percent of transactions in Germany are still conducted in cash. The German tabloid Bild went as far as to publish an op-ed titled “Hands off our cash” in response to the proposed measure.



Global Powers Jumping on Cashless Bandwagon

Nevertheless, a host of other countries across Europe and worldwide have shunned Germany’s example, instead siding with the IMF and Stiglitz. India, one of the most cash-reliant countries on earth, recently eliminated 86 percent of its currency practically overnight, with the claimed goal, of course, of targeting terrorism and the “black market.”

The real objective of this secretly planned measure, however, was to starve the economy of cash and to drive citizens to electronic payments by default.



Indians stand in line to deposit discontinued notes in a bank in Jammu and Kashmir, India,, Dec. 30, 2016. India yanked most of its currency bills from circulation without warning on Nov. 8, delivering a jolt to the country’s high-performing economy and leaving countless citizens scrambling for cash. (AP/Channi Anand)

Iceland, a country that stands as an admirable example of standing up to the IMF-global banking cartel in terms of its response to the country’s financial meltdown of 2008, nevertheless has long embraced cashlessness.

Practically all transactions
, even the most minute, are conducted electronically, while “progressive” tourists extol the benefits of not being inconvenienced by the many seconds it would take to withdraw funds from an ATM or exchange currency upon arrival.

Oddly enough, Iceland was already largely cashless prior to its financial collapse in 2008 - proving that this move towards “progress” did nothing to prevent an economic meltdown or to stop its perpetrators: the very same banks being entrusted with nearly all of the money supply.

Other examples of cashlessness abound in Europe. Cash transactions in Sweden represent just 3 percent of the national economy, and most banks no longer hold banknotes. Similarly, many Norwegian banks no longer issue cash, while the country’s largest bank, DNB, has called upon the public to cease using cash. Denmark has announced a goal of eliminating banknotes by 2030.

Belgium has introduced a 3,000-euro limit on cash transactions and 93 percent of transactions are cashless. In France, the respective percentage is 92 percent, and cash transactions have been limited to 1,000 euros, just as in Spain.



Related: The War On Cash – One Giant Leap Forward For Government

Outside of Europe, cash is being eliminated even in countries such as Somalia and Kenya, while South Korea - itself no stranger to IMF intervention in its economy - has, similarly to Greece, implemented preferential tax policies for consumers who make payments using cards.

Aside from policy changes, practical everyday examples also exist in abundance. Just try to purchase an airline ticket with cash, for instance. It remains possible - but is also said to raise red flags. In many cases, renting an automobile or booking a hotel room with cash is simply not possible.

The aforementioned Department of Homeland Security manual considers any payment with cash to be “suspicious behavior” - as one clearly has something to hide if they do not wish to be tracked via electronic payment methods. Ownership of gold makes the list of suspicious activities as well.

Just as the irony of Germany being a largely cash-based society while pushing cashless policies in its Greek protectorate is lost on many Greeks, what is lost on seemingly almost everyone is this: something that is new doesn’t necessarily represent progress, nor does something different.

Something that is seemingly easier, or more convenient, is not necessarily progress either. But for many, “technological progress,” just like “scientific innovation” in all its forms and without exception, has attained an aura of infallibility, revered with religious-like fervor.



People queue in front of a bank for an ATM as a man lies on the ground begging for change, in Athens. (AP/Thanassis Stavrakis)

Combating purported tax evasion is also treated with a religious-like fervor, even while ordinary citizens - such as the two aforementioned gentlemen in Greece - typically seek to minimize their outlays to the tax offices.

Moreover, while such measures essentially enact a collective punishment regardless of guilt or innocence, corporations and oligarchs who utilize tax loopholes and offshore havens go unpunished and are wholly unaffected by a switch to a cashless economy in the supposed battle against tax evasion.

This is evident, for instance, in the case of “LuxLeaks,” which revealed the names of dozens of corporations benefiting from favorable tax rulings and tax avoidance schemes in Luxembourg, one of the original founding members of the EU.

European Commission President Jean-Claude Juncker, formerly the prime minister of Luxembourg, has faced repeated accusations of impeding EU investigations into corporate tax avoidance scandals during his 18-year term as prime minister. Juncker has defended Luxembourg’s tax arrangements as legal.



Related: The Real Reasons Behind Negative Interest Rates And Banning Cash

At the same time, Juncker has shown no qualms in criticizing Apple’s tax avoidance deal in Ireland as “illegal,” while having been accused himself of helping large multinationals such as Amazon and Pepsi avoid taxes. Moreover, he has openly claimed that Greece’s Ottoman roots are responsible for modern-day tax evasion in the country.

He has not hesitated to unabashedly intervene in Greek electoral contests, calling on Greeks to avoid the “wrong outcome” in the January 2015 elections (where the supposedly anti-austerity SYRIZA, which has since proven to be boldly pro-austerity, were elected).

He also urged the Greek electorate to vote “yes” (in favor of more EU-proposed austerity) in the July 2015 referendum - where the overwhelming result in favor of “no” was itself overturned by SYRIZA within a matter of days. In the European Union today, if there’s something that can be counted on, it’s the blatant hypocrisy of its leaders.

Nevertheless, proving that old habits of collaborationism die hard in Greece, the rector of the law school of the state-owned Aristotle University in Thessaloniki awarded Juncker with an honorary doctorate for his contribution to European political and legal values.



Cashless Policies Bode Poorly for the Future

Where does all this lead though? What does a cashless economy actually mean and why are global elites pushing so fervently for it?

Consider the following: in a cashless economy without coins or banknotes, every transaction is tracked. Buying and spending habits are monitored, and it is not unheard of for credit card companies to cancel an individual’s credit or to lower their credit rating based on real or perceived risks ranging from shopping at discount stores to purchasing alcoholic beverages. Indeed, this is understood to be common practice.

Other players are entering the game too: in late May, Google announced plans to track credit and debit card transactions.



Claudia Lombana, PayPal’s shopping specialist, stamps a guest’s passport as he visits the travel section of PayPal’s Cashless Utopia in New York (Victoria Will/AP)

Related: Cashless Crisis: “With Digital Payments, Civilization Comes To An End Until Power Is Restored”

More to the point though, a cashless economy doesn’t just mean that financial institutions, large corporations, or the state itself can monitor all transactions that are occurring. It also means that the entirety of the money supply - itself now existing only in “virtual” form - will belong to the banking system.

Not one cent will exist outside of the banking system, as physical currency will simply not be in circulation. The banking system - and others - will be aware not just of every transaction, but will be in possession of all of our society’s money supply, and will even have the ability to receive a percentage of every transaction that is taking place.

So what happens if your spending habits or your choice of travel destinations raises “red flags”? What happens if you run into hard times economically and miss a few payments? What happens if you are deemed to be a political dissident or liability – perhaps an “enemy of the state”?



Related: Challenges Arise as Sweden is Heading Towards Cashless Society

Freezing a bank account or confiscating funds from accounts can take place almost instantaneously. Users of eBay and PayPal, for instance, are quite aware of the ease with which PayPal can confiscate funds from a user’s account based simply on a claim filed against that individual.

Simply forgetting one’s password to an online account can set off an aggravating flurry of calls in order to prove that your money is your own - and that’s without considering the risks of phishing and of online databases being compromised.

Many responsible credit card holders found that their credit cards were suddenly canceled in the aftermath of the “Great Recession” simply due to perceived risk. And if you happen to be an individual deemed to be “dangerous,” you can be effectively and easily frozen out of the economy.

Those thinking that the “cashless revolution” will also herald the return of old-style bartering and other communal economic schemes might also wish to reconsider that line of thinking. In the United States, for instance, bartering transactions are considered taxable by the Internal Revenue Service.

As more and more economic activity of all sorts takes place online, the tax collector will have an easier time detecting such activity. Thinking of teaching your child to be responsible with finances? That too will have a cost, as even lemonade stands have been targeted for “operating without a permit.” It’s not far-fetched to imagine that particularly overzealous government authorities could also target such activity for “tax evasion.”



Related: The War On Cash & The Politics Of Negative Interest Rates

In Greece, while oligarchs get to shift their money to offshore tax havens without repercussion and former Finance Minister Gikas Hardouvelis has been acquitted for failure to submit a declaration of assets, where major television and radio stations operate with impunity without a valid license while no new players can enter the marketplace and where ordinary households and small businesses are literally being taxed to death, police in August 2016 arrested a father of three with an unemployed spouse for selling donuts without a license and fined him 5,000 euros. In another incident, an elderly man selling roasted chestnuts in Thessaloniki was surrounded by 15 police officers and arrested for operating without a license.

Amidst this blatant hypocrisy, governments and financial institutions love electronic money for another reason, aside from the sheer control that it affords them.

Studies, including one conducted by the American Psychological Association, have shown that paying with plastic (or, by extension, other non-physical forms of payment) encourage greater spending, as the psychological sensation of a loss when making a payment is disconnected from the actual act of purchasing or conducting a transaction.



Related: Financial Times Calls For Abolishing Cash In Order "To Give More Power To Central Banks"

But ultimately, the elephant in the room is whether the banking system even should be entrusted with the entirety of the monetary supply. The past decade has seen the financial collapse of 2008, the crumbling of financial institutions such as Lehman Brothers in the United States and a continent-wide banking crisis in Europe, which was the true objective behind the “bailouts” of countries such as Greece - saving European and American banks exposed to “toxic” bonds from these nations.

Italy’s banking system is currently teetering on dangerous ground, while the Greek banking system, already recapitalized three times since the onset of the country’s economic crisis, may need yet another taxpayer-funded recapitalization. Even the virtual elimination of cash in Iceland did not prevent the country’s banking meltdown in 2008.

Should we entrust the entirety of the money supply to these institutions? What happens if the banking system experiences another systemic failure? Who do you trust more: yourself or institutions that have proven to be wholly irresponsible and unaccountable in their actions?

The answer to that question should help guide the debate as to whether society should go cashless.


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Violence-Inducing Effects Of Psychiatric Medication & The Psychiatric Agenda Destroys Creative Children
May 20 2018 | From: KellyBroganMD / JonRappoport

On May 17, 2017, we learned that Chris Cornell of Soundgarden had reportedly committed suicide by hanging.



His family reports knowing a different Chris than one who would make this fatal decision, and suspect his anti-anxiety prescription in the altered state he was witnessed to be in the night he died.

Related:
Is Psychiatry Bullshit? Some Psychiatrists View The Chemical-Imbalance Theory As A Well-Meaning Lie + Psychotropic Drugs, Are They Safe? Fourteen Lies That Our Psychiatry Professors Taught Us In Medical School

Perhaps an “addict turned psychiatric patient”, like so many, Chris Cornell seemed to have left the frying pan of substance abuse for the fire of psychiatric medication risks.

For reasons that remain mysterious, those under the influence of psychiatric medication often specifically choose to hang themselves in their moment of peak impulsivity.

Some, like Kim’s husband Woody who was never depressed a day in his life but prescribed Zoloft by his internist, even verbalize a felt experience of his head coming apart from his body in the days before he was found hanged in his garage.



Related: Dr. Kelly Brogan's Takedown Of Big Pharma's SSRI Anti-Depressant Drug Lies Hits Bestseller Lists

Then there’s 14 year old Naika, a foster child in Florida who hanged herself on a FB livestream after being treated with 50mg of Vyvanse, a drug treatment for ADHD that leads to a domino effect of diagnoses and psychiatric meds including a 13 fold increase in likelihood of being prescribed an antipsychotic medication and 4 fold increase in antidepressant medications than controls.

Are these just rare anecdotes? Is this just the cost of treatment that is helpful for most? Are we blaming medication for what might have been severe mental illness that was undertreated and/or undiagnosed?


Informed Consent: the Premise of Ethical Medicine

I believe first and foremost in informed consent. If you are informed of the risks, benefits, and alternatives to a given treatment, you will be empowered to make the best decision for yourself based on your personal, family, philosophical, and religious life context.

But the truth is that prescribers are not in a position to share the known risks of medications because we learn only of their purported benefits with a short-tagline of dismissively rare risks that are thought to be invariably outweighed by the presenting clinical concern.



Related: Kids Meditate Instead Of Taking ADHD Medications, See Amazing Resuts + Elementary School Sends Kids To Meditation Instead Of Detention And The Results Are Astounding

But what about serious risks – including impulsive suicide and homicide – surely we are informing patients of that possibility, right?

Wrong.

In fact, the FDA and the pharmaceutical industry have gone to great lengths to conceal multiple signals of harm so we certainly can’t expect your average prescriber to have done the investigative work required to get at the truth.

In fact, from 1999-2013, US psychiatric medication prescriptions have increased by a whopping 117% concurrent with a 240% increase in death rates from these medications.



Related: Nutrition And Mental Health + ADHD Is A Fabricated Disease, Says Reputed Neurologist

So let’s review some of the evidence that suggests that it may not be in your best interest or the best interest of those around you for you to travel the path of medication-based psychiatry.

Because, after all, if we don’t screen for risk factors – if we don’t know who will become the next victim of psych-med-induced violence – then how can we justify a single prescription?

Are we at a point in the history of medicine where random acts of personal and public violence are defensible risks of treatment for stress, anxiety, depression, inattention, psychosocial distress, irritable bowel syndrome, chronic fatigue, and even stress incontinence?



Let the Science Speak

Suicide

Prescribed specifically to “prevent” suicide, antidepressants now come with a black box warning label of suicide risk since 2010.

Multi-billion dollar lawsuits like the settlement of Study 329 have been necessary to unlock the cabinet drawers of an industry that cares more about profit than human lives.

A reanalysis of study 329 which initially served as a landmark study in 2001 supporting the prescription of antidepressants to children, has now demonstrated that these medications are ineffective in this population and play a causal role in suicidal behavior.

Concealing and manipulating data that shows this signal of harm, including a doubling of risk of suicide with antidepressant treatment, has generated seeming confusion around this incomprehensibly unacceptable risk profile.

In fact, a reanalysis of an influential US National Institute of Mental Health 2007 study, revealed a four-fold increase in suicide despite the fact that the initial publication claimed no increased risk relative to placebo.



Related: 10 Monumentally False Claims Made By Conventional Medicine About Health + How Far Has The Medical Profession Fallen From The Hippocratic Oath?

According to available data – 3 large meta-analyses – more psychiatric treatment means more suicide. Well, that might seem a hazard of the field, right? Where blaming medications for suicide would be like saying that umbrellas cause the rain.

That’s why studies in non-suicidal subjects and even healthy volunteers who went on to experience suicidality after taking antidepressants are so compelling.

Benzodiazepines (like what Cornell was taking) and hypnotics (sleep and anxiety medications) also have a documented potential to increase risk of completed and attempted suicide and have been implicated in impulsive self-harm including self-inflicted stab wounds during changes to dosage.

We also find the documented possibility that suicidality could emerge in patients who are treated with this class of medications even when they are not suicidal with recent research stating:


“Benzodiazepine receptor agonist hypnotics can cause parasomnias, which in rare cases may lead to suicidal ideation or suicidal behavior in persons who were not known to be suicidal”.

And, of course, these medications themselves provide the means and the method with a known lethal poisoning profile.


Homicide

Clearly murderers are mentally ill, right? What if I told you that the science supports the concern that we are medicating innocent civilians into states of murderous impulsivity?

When Andrew Thibault began to research the safety of a stimulant drug recommended to his son, he entered a rabbit hole he has yet to emerge from.

After literally teaching himself code to decrypt the data on the FDA Adverse Event Reporting System website, he was able to cull 2,000 pediatric fatalities from psychotropic medications, and 700 homicides.



Related: The Drugs May Be The Problem – Inconvenient Truths About Big Pharma And The Psychiatric Industry + Psychologist Speaks Out: Psychiatry Is Misleading Public About Mental Disorders

A Freedom of Information Act and a lawsuit later, he continues to struggle with redacted and suppressed information around 24 homicides directly connected to the use of psychotropics including the homicide by a 10 year old treated with Vyvanse of an infant.

Another case, ultimately recovered, involved statements from a 35 year old perpetrator / patient, who murdered her own daughter, as directly implicating as:


“When I took nortriptyline, I immediately wanted to kill myself. I’d never had thoughts like that before”.

To begin to scientifically explore the risk of violence induced by psychotropic medication, a study sample needs to be representative, the reason for taking the drug needs to be taken into consideration, the effect needs to be controlled for, as do any other intoxicants.

Professor Jari Tiihonen’s research group analysed the use of prescription drugs of 959 persons convicted of a homicide in Finland and found that pre-crime prescription of benzodiazepines and opiates resulted in the highest risk (223% increase) of committing homicide.

Relatedly, eleven antidepressants, six sedative/hypnotics and three drugs for attention deficit hyperactivity disorder represented the bulk of 31 medications associated with violence reported to the FDA.



Related: 4 Facts About ADHD That Teachers & Doctors Never Tell Parents

Now an international problem, a Swedish registry study identified a statistically significant increase in violence in males and females under 25 years old prescribed antidepressants.

Implicated in school shootings, stabbings, and even the Germanwings flight crash, prescribing of psychotropics prior to these incidences has been catalogued on ssristories.org leading me to suspect psychiatric prescribing as the most likely cause in any and all reports of unusually violent behavior in the public sphere.


Is Association Really Causation?

Beyond the cases where violence to self or others was induced in a non-violent, non-depressed, non-psychotic individual, what other evidence is there that speaks to how this could possibly be happening?

The most seminal paper in this regard, in my opinion, was published in 2011 by Lucire and Crotty. Ten cases of extreme violence were committed by patients who were prescribed antidepressants – not for major mental illness or even for depression – but for psychosocial distress (i.e. work stress, dog died, divorce).



Related: The Shocking Truth About Antidepressant Drug Studies + Peter Breggin MD: How Do Psychiatric Drugs Really Work?

What these authors identified was that these ten subjects had variants to liver enzymes responsible for drug metabolism exacerbated by co-administration of other drugs and substances including herbs. All returned to their baseline personalities when the antidepressant was discontinued.

Now referred to as akathisia-induced impulsivity, the genetic risk factors for this Russian Roulette of violence are not screened for prior to psychotropic prescribing.

Akathisia is a state of severe restlessness associated with thoughts of suicide and homicide.

Many patients describe it as a feeling-less state of apathy – and what I would describe as a disconnection from their own souls, their own experience of human connection, and any measure of self-reflection.



Related: Key Factors To Overcoming Depression Without Drugs

The genetic underpinnings of this kind of medication-induced vulnerability are just beginning to be explored with identification of precursor symptoms to violence including severe agitation.

In a randomized, placebo-controlled trial, healthy volunteers exhibited an almost 2 fold increased risk of symptoms that can lead to violence.

A 4-5 fold increased risk was noted in patients prescribed a generic version of the antidepressant Cymbalta, off-label, for stress urinary incontinence (a non-psychiatric indication).


There is Another Way

Perhaps it’s as if we are offering the blade edge of a knife to those falling off the cliff of struggle and suffering. Because the idea of managing a chemical imbalance with chemicals seems to make sense.

But at what cost?


The laundry list of acute and chronic adverse effects is growing, and the unpredictable risk of medication-induced violence should lead to an urgent cessation of all psychotropics.

Because it takes 17 years for physician practice to reflect published science, we need grassroots level information sharing. We need to inform ourselves before we consent to engage a system that regards you as an impersonal statistic.

We live in a cultural context that makes no room for the relevance, meaning, and significance of symptoms – symptoms are simply bad and scary and they must be managed. We don’t make room for patients to ask why they are not ok.



Related: 7 Facts About Depression That Will Blow You Away

If you knew that your symptoms were reversible, healable, transformable, you might consider walking that path instead of assuming this level of risk for placebo-level efficacy of psychotropic medication. We would only euthanize a “mental patient” if we felt their condition was lifelong and unremitting.

In fact, every woman I have ever tapered off of psychiatric drugs into experiences of total vitality once believed that she would be a medicated psychiatric patient for life.

If you knew that radical self-healing potential lies within each and every one of us, if you only knew that was possible, you might start that journey today. It’s side effect free…




The Psychiatric Agenda Destroys Creative Children

“Take a child who wants to invent something out of thin air, and instead of saying no, tell him he has a problem with his brain, and then stand back and watch what happens. In particular, watch what happens when you give him a toxic drug to fix his brain. You have to be a certain kind of person to do that to a child. You have to be, for various reasons, crazy and a career criminal.” - The Underground, Jon Rappoport

First, here are a few facts that should give you pause:

Related: When your child is a psychopath

According to NAMI (National Alliance on Mental Illness);


“More than 25 percent of [US] college students have been diagnosed or treated by a professional for a mental health condition within the past year.”

NAMI: “One in four young adults between the ages of 18 and 24 have [we claim] a diagnosable mental illness.”

According to healthline.com, 6.4 million American children between the ages of 4 and 17 have been diagnosed with ADHD. The average age for the child’s diagnosis is 7.

BMJ 2016;352:i1457: “The number of UK children and adolescents treated with antidepressants rose by over 50% from 2005 to 2012, a study of five Western countries published in European Neuropsychopharmacology has found.”

Getting the picture?



Related: Harvard Research Finds Link Between Fluoridated Water, ADHD & Mental Disorders

Children are being diagnosed and dosed with toxic drugs at a staggering rate. But, as I have shown in many past articles, NO so-called mental disorder is based on a lab test.

No blood, saliva, genetic, brain test. ALL 300 or so official mental disorders are defined by menus of behaviors concocted by committees of psychiatrists.

On that foundation, the diagnoses and the drugs are handed out.

Let’s look at just one of the drugs: Ritalin (or any similar ADHD medicine). After a creative child is seen fidgeting in class, looking bored, studying what he wants to study, ignoring classroom assignments, focusing on what interests him, he is diagnosed with ADHD. Then comes the drug.

In 1986, The International Journal of the Addictions published an important literature review by Richard Scarnati. It was called “An Outline of Hazardous Side Effects of Ritalin (Methylphenidate)” [v.21, pp. 837-841].



Related: Before His Death, Father Of ADHD Admitted It Was A Fictitious Disease

Scarnati listed a large number of adverse effects of Ritalin and cited published journal articles which reported each of these symptoms.

For every one of the following (selected and quoted verbatim) Ritalin effects, there is at least one confirming source in the medical literature:

Paranoid delusions

Paranoid psychosis

Hypomanic and manic symptoms, amphetamine-like psychosis

Activation of psychotic symptoms

Toxic psychosis

Visual hallucinations

Auditory hallucinations

Can surpass LSD in producing bizarre experiences

Effects pathological thought processes

Extreme withdrawal

Terrified affect

Started screaming

Aggressiveness

Insomnia

Since Ritalin is considered an amphetamine-type drug, expect amphetamine-like effects

Psychic dependence

High-abuse potential DEA Schedule II Drug

Decreased REM sleep

When used with antidepressants one may see dangerous reactions including hypertension, seizures and hypothermia

Convulsions

Brain damage may be seen with amphetamine abuse.


Under this chemical assault on the brain, what are the chances that a creative child will go on in life to become an innovator, rather than a victim of psychiatric drugging?

Make a list of your favorite innovators. Imagine them as bored distracted children sitting in classrooms… and then diagnosed, and then hammered with drugs prescribed by a doctor.

This is happening now. The institution of psychiatry is making it happen. What about the consequences of diagnosing clinical depression in larger numbers of young children? What about the antidepressant drugs?



Related: The Science And Pseudoscience Of Children’s Mental Health + Creating ADHD Is The New Education

Here is just a sprinkling of information about antidepressants, from a huge body of literature:

Psychiatrist Peter Breggin: February 1990 American Journal of Psychiatry (Teicher et al, v.147:207-210) reports on:


“Six depressed patients, previously free of recent suicidal ideation, who developed `intense, violent suicidal preoccupations after 2-7 weeks of fluoxetine [Prozac] treatment.'

The suicidal preoccupations lasted from three days to three months after termination of the treatment. The report estimates that 3.5 percent of Prozac users were at risk.

While denying the validity of the study, Dista Products, a division of Eli Lilly, put out a brochure for doctors dated August 31, 1990, stating that it was adding `suicidal ideation’ to the adverse events section of its Prozac product information.”

An earlier study, from the September 1989 Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, by Joseph Lipiniski, Jr., indicates that in five examined cases people on Prozac developed what is called akathesia.

Symptoms include intense anxiety, inability to sleep, the “jerking of extremities,” and “bicycling in bed or just turning around and around.”



Related: The Roots Of Mental Health - Maybe They’re Not In Our Heads + Rising Rates Of Suicide: Are Pills The Problem?

Dr. Peter Breggin comments that akathesia:


"May also contribute to the drug’s tendency to cause self-destructive or violent tendencies … Akathesia can become the equivalent of biochemical torture and could possibly tip someone over the edge into self-destructive or violent behavior.

The June 1990 Health Newsletter, produced by the Public Citizen Research Group, reports, ‘Akathesia, or symptoms of restlessness, constant pacing, and purposeless movements of the feet and legs,
may occur in 10-25 percent of patients on Prozac.’”

The well-known publication, California Lawyer, in a December 1998 article called “Protecting Prozac,” details some of the suspect maneuvers of Eli Lilly in its handling of suits against Prozac.

California Lawyer also mentions other highly qualified critics of the drug:


"David Healy, MD, an internationally renowned psychopharmacologist, has stated in sworn deposition that `contrary to Lilly’s view, there is a plausible cause-and-effect relationship between Prozac’ and suicidal-homicidal events.

An epidemiological study published in 1995 by the British Medical Journal also links Prozac to increased suicide risk.”

When pressed, proponents of these SSRI antidepressant drugs (Prozac, Zoloft, Paxil, etc.) sometimes say, “Well, the benefits for the general population far outweigh the risk.”

But the issue of benefits will not go away on that basis.



A shocking review-study published in The Journal of Nervous and Mental Diseases (1996, v.184, no.2), written by Rhoda L. Fisher and Seymour Fisher, called “Antidepressants for Children,” concludes:


“Despite unanimous literature of double-blind studies indicating that antidepressants are no more effective than placebos in treating depression in children and adolescents, such medications continue to be in wide use.”

In wide use. This despite such contrary information and the negative, dangerous effects of these drugs.

There are other studies: “Emergence of self-destructive phenomena in children and adolescents during fluoxetine treatment,” published in the Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry (1991, vol.30), written by RA King, RA Riddle, et al.

It reports self-destructive phenomena in 14% (6/42) of children and adolescents (10-17 years old) who had treatment with fluoxetine (Prozac) for obsessive-compulsive disorder.

July, 1991. Journal of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. Hisako Koizumi, MD, describes a thirteen-year-old boy who was on Prozac: “full of energy,” “hyperactive,” “clown-like.”

All this devolved into sudden violent actions which were “totally unlike him.”



Related: Evidence Points To Ft. Lauderdale Shooter Being “Jason Bourned” With Mind Altering Psychiatric Drugs And ISIS Video Indoctrination By U.S. Intelligence Operatives

September, 1991. The Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. Author Laurence Jerome reports the case of a ten-year old who moves with his family to a new location. Becoming depressed, the boy is put on Prozac by a doctor.

The boy is then “hyperactive, agitated … irritable.” He makes a “somewhat grandiose assessment of his own abilities.”

Then he calls a stranger on the phone and says he is going to kill him. The Prozac is stopped, and the symptoms disappear.

For money, for profit, for status, for control, there exists a professional class called psychiatrists. They approach children - particularly creative children who refuse to fall into lock-step with a regimented program of learning - as outliers, as ill, as strange, as maladjusted, as threats to the system.



Related: The Cult Of 'Scientism' Explained: How Scientific Claims Behind Cancer, Vaccines, Psychiatric Drugs And GMOs Are Nothing More Than Corporate-Funded Science Fraud

And this professional class takes action. Diagnose the children, drug them, bring them back into line, make them “normal,” reduce their curiosity and independence and drive and will power.

Instead of using overt physical force, they use relatively invisible chemical force.

Under the banner of caring, they perform, on the young, a scientific ritual of sacrifice, a rite of passage into the dead world where they, the elite rulers, exist.

Public Schools Are Designed To Push Drugs And Poison Your Children





Related: Nature’s Prozac: Nutrition For Mental Health


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Former Satanic Priest Exposes The Four Main Tenets Of Satanic Ideology & Are You A Satanist? You Could Be And Not Even Know It + Ask An Ex-Satanist Anything - Katy Perry Super Bowl Ritual
May 19 2018 | From: Sitshow / MarkPassio / Various

In January of 2015, Mark Passio, former Satanic priest, gave a clear and on point, explanation of the ideology of the church of Satan. His knowledge comes from his experience as a former priest in the church of Satan, a branch of the Dark Occult.



Now Passio has changed his personal ideology 180 degrees and helps to expose the insidious precepts of Satanism. Earlier this year, Mark Passio joined Lee Ann McAdoo from Alex Jones' InfoWars for an online interview wherein he discussed the "4 main tenets of Satanism."

Related: How The Term “Satan” Originated And How Satanism Controls Entities & The Djinn (Jinn) And Their
Connection To The Shadow People


Mark's website, is www.whatonearthishappening.com. He was a speaker at a conference in Philadelphia, PA on April 10-12, 2015, advertised on his website, which sought to establish a much more inclusive and caring world view than what he previously believed in.

As Passio explains he was dissatisfied with religion and over time became angry and and gravitated towards the branch of Satanism called the Dark Occult.

His writing and music was recognized by a Satanic church figure, the late Anton LaVey and LaVey asked him to become a priest in the church and to take on the role of converting others to the Satanic counter-religion.

While he does not explain why he left the church of Satan, Passio does explain that his associates within the group were completely unconcerned with him leaving, as they felt confident that nothing he could do could affect them or their power.



Related:
Occult Holidays And Sabbats: Why Holidays Are Satanic Rituals

Is it harmful for society to associate the word Satanism solely with human and animal sacrifices and sexual crimes? Could it be that such a definition allows the more sensitive and insidious aspects of the ideology to continue on and become accepted or institutionalized?

What is very interesting about the "Satanic ideology" that Mark Passio describes is that the precepts are not specifically racism or bigotry, the kinds of hatred we frequently associate with criminal acts.


The "4 main tenets of Satanism" as he explains are:

1. Self Preservation

2. Moral Relativism

3. Social Darwinism

4. Eugenics



These concepts [detailed further below] exist on a sliding scale and it is not clear to what degree they are actually practiced by Satanists.

The individuals who practice such a selfish philosophy unbalanced by love or compassion for others would seem like sociopaths among us, perhaps free of criminal records, but who take no risk or responsibility to improve the lives of less fortunate people in society.

As Passio explains, Self Preservation is among the highest Satanic principles, and not in the acceptable sense of being defensive.



Related: The Fight to Save America From Satan's Subliminal Rock Messages

We may know many people in our lives who we consider harmless individuals, without criminal records, who indeed show philosophical traits in common with Satanism, however we would never think of calling them Satanic because we associate that offensive word with human and animal sacrifices, which is a deception that conceals the nature of Satanism as the inverse of Christianity.

For example where Christianity might practice forgiveness and freedom from dogma, Satanism prefers the tools of mercilessness and oppression.

If more corporate businesses than not identify with the ideology of Satanism in their business practices, then are we living in a pre-dominantly Satanic world?


If so, then it is only individuals, practicing self preservation balanced with Jesus' fruits of the Spirit such as compassion to other human beings, that make the world unevil. 

Today Passio  is using his knowledge not to create converts but to expose the Satanic ideology in an effort to reveal how harmful it is.



If it goes un-identified, then it will continue to overwhelm our technological society, in the businesses and sciences, and allow the elite to be dangerously misguided.

We make the world how we create it to be. We are free to create new and better systems of business based on morally objective ideology to overcome old and inferior systems of enslavement.

Despite the aesthetic symbols seen in the background of his recording location, Passio speaks powerfully and knowledgeably against Satanic tools used to oppress massive numbers of people.

He shows that he has re-wired himself in favor of love. On his website the footer reads: All is Love. Which is clearly not the belief of a Satanist.



Former Satanist Exposes Occult Secrets

De-mystifying the occult with Mark Passio. Passio, an independent researcher, public speaker, radio talk show host, conference organizer and freedom activist from Philadelphia, PA., has undertaken the task of assembling vast amounts of research in the areas of metaphysics, occultism, spirituality, symbology and consciousness studies.






Partial Transcript from "Former Satanist Exposes Occult Secrets"

7:41 -


“It has nothing to do with the Christian notion of the devil. Satanism has 4 main tenets or overarching principles of belief.

And that is that self-preservation is the highest goal. And you should do whatever you can to advance your personal power and influence in the world no matter who you really have to walk all over, step on, or hurt to get what you want.

That's really the number one tenet and if you look at society most of society is stuck in that cut-throat, dog-eat-dog, mentality."

...

"Moral relativism is the second major tenet which is that there is really no such thing as objective standards of right and wrong behavior. That we as human beings can get to decide upon our whims what right and wrong are and base our actions accordingly.

And if you look at most of society I would say more people than not are moral relativists than moral objectivists who think that there is an objective standard of right and wrong behavior. So that's also very pervasive in society."

8:02 -


"The Third major tenet is social darwinism, the idea that the most ruthless in society have some sort of a predetermined idea or pre-destined right to basically rule over everybody else in society because their genetics got them there, and made them fit for rulership.

And many people will actually think like that and think that that's ok, that that's just the natural order or the way things are. You know, and so that's also very pervasive in our society."

8:33 -


"And finally the 4th main pillar of Satanism is eugenics, the idea that those who are socially fit to rule, and they're the fittest in society and therefore they've come out on top and they're ruling the roost, well they can get to decide who basically propagates their genes and who does not, or in other words, who gets to live and who dies.

Who must die."


Related Articles:

Retired Head Of Los Angeles FBI Tells All: Illuminati, Satanism, Pedophile Rings

The Occult Origins Of Christmas

18 Reasons Why I Don’t Celebrate Halloween

Pizzagate: Melania Trump Puts Elite Pedo Ring On Notice During Easter Visit

Why You Need To Understand the Occult -Seminar: The Nature of Sacred Symbolism and Hidden Knowledge





Are You A Satanist? You Could Be And Not Even Know It + Ask Ex-Satanist Anything - Katy Perry Super Bowl Ritual

This is an interview with a former priest of the Church of Satan, Mark Passio, discussing how the Satanism normally thought of in the world today (the Worship of a "devil" by confused and misguided people) is far more insidious than we could have possibly imagined. 

Instead of small gatherings, acting as individuals (usually we think of satanists as crazy unbalanced teens or psychopaths), Passio describes Satanism is actually a recruiting mechanism for a far darker agenda. Lawyers, Doctors and nearly every other high ranking figure in society was in attendance during his time with them.

Related: Satanic Pedophilia Network Exposed In Australia - It Starts At The TOP, Just Like In The USA And UK

They revealed to him that their efforts are global in scale and have been operating for thousands of years in a cohesive unified effort under the banner of Christianity, Islam, Judaism and nearly every other major institution of thought including Science, Law and Government.

Satanism is not wholly what the official Church of Satan offers in it's writings, it is actually an organization which incorporates organize crime, and fits the profile described by Gordon Duff in his work on the OCC (Organized Crime Cabal); the "illuminati" as they are popularly known.


Goal of Occulted Satanism


Their aim is simple: to push Satanic belief systems on to the masses causing self destructive tendencies; divide and conquer.

People spend most of their lives trying to fight for their egocentric desires, destroying themselves and society in the process, "requiring authorities" at all levels to keep the ignorant masses under control.

The Cabal, or Dark Occultists, position themselves in power to be that controlling force - bringing "order to chaos".



Related: John Kerry Admits They're Making 'Order Out Of Chaos' For 'World Order'

Occulted Satanism is more a philosophy, a set of beliefs and ideas, pushed on the masses under many guises; nearly all of which are accepted unconsciously.

Materialism, Corporatism, Narcissism, Atheism and nearly all world religions (as they are practiced) - can be thought of as Satanic in this context. (read this wikipedia article on Satanism to provide a context for the popularly known version vs the Occulted version discussed by Passio).

One shocking revelation offered by Passio, and confirmed for oneself by honest investigation, is that the world at large is in a state of consciousness which could be thought of as Satanic.



Related: Vladimir Putin: The New World Order Worships Satan

Stated more simply, humanity is being indoctrinated into Satanic belief systems, modes of thought, and do not realize it because they have a false version of Satanism pushed by the media.

We think Satanism involves "the devil" and sacrificing animals by a few 'bad apples' that are not connected in anyway, but in truth this is not actually the case.

Within the definitions of Satanism provided by Mark, we have the following Tenants (I drafted these in my own words listening to the show):

1. Narcissism

"Me and my needs are the only thing that matters, even at the cost of everyone else". Survival of the self, is most important. "No one else and their personal suffering, matters unless I am affected."

Compassion for others is weakness. (Narcissistic personality disorder, also known as NPD, is a disorder in which the individual has a distorted self image, unstable and intense emotions, is overly preoccupied with vanity, prestige, power and personal adequacy, lacks empathy, and has an exaggerated sense of superiority; balancing their low self image.

NPD is closely associated with egocentrism - a personality characteristic in which people see themselves and their interests and opinions as the only ones that really matter).

2. Moral Relativism

"There is no such thing as truth, I make up what right and wrong are based on what I want. If I can get away with it, then it's "right" and I should; its only wrong, if I get caught."

The belief that objective morality doesn't exist and neither does Truth. This is Solipsism, the belief that there is no truth because we can not know it with absolute certainty; "the view or theory that the self is all that can be known to exist" - Wikipedia.

As such, "what I believe is the only thing that matters, and if I don't believe it - it doesn't exist." New Age Doctrine of - "Ignore the negative, and it will magically go away."




Related: Lucis Trust, Alice Bailey, World Goodwill And Lucifer - The False Light Of The World

3. Social Darwinism

"I focus on my survival and personal needs only; by any means necessary. What gets the job done, whatever I need to do to survive, is the only thing that matters. If someone else can't do the same, they are weak and deserve what they get."

4. Eugenics

"I get to decide who lives and dies, what their value is only in relation to my own self interest. If your not with me your against me. I am superior you are inferior."


Here the aim is to cull the masses, keep the population at a 'workable level'. In the past this was done more directly (i.e. the Holocaust) but today Eugenics is unfolding in an Epi-eugenic way. People, by their own beliefs and actions, eat food that kills them off, and kill each other off in unnecessary conflicts.




Related: Eugenics and the Depopulation Agenda


Other Points

"Humans are just animals - morality, compassion and empathy are just human inventions - only might is right."

There is no God, no organizing force in the Universe; only Entropy - Scientific Atheism is Satanic within this context.


Are you a Satanist?

That question usually offends us so much we never ask ourselves honestly. Let me cast the limelight on myself for the moment. 



The 'Cremation of Care' ritual cermony held annually by the elite in the US at Bohemian Grove, CA.

During my late teens and early 20's, I was a major drug addict. I stole from my family, friends and stores regularly to sustain my addiction.

Doing anything I could to stave off the dope sickness, I always felt the moral wrongness of my actions.

Eventually I made the choice to get clean and moved away from the situations that tempted me. Finally I healed the true cause of the addiction within myself, and now even if I had heroin within my grasp I wouldn't find value in the experience of taking it.

The point is, that I justified my actions, despite having a conscious awareness of how wrong they are, and as such, I was acting as a Satanist.

All my justifications and rationalizing won't change my Satanic behavior, because at the end of the day what I chose to do, was in harmony with the plans of the Dark Occultists.



Related: The Peace Sign And Satanism

Anyone who acts in this way is for all intents and purposes an Agent of the Cabal.

Using this very strict definition, we can easily see that nearly everyone in our modern world is acting out the plans of the Cabal unconsciously.


I know this can be a sobering realization, but can be empowering once we accept it, because we realize that we can personally take action to change.



Why is This Important?

Once we begin to realize that our world views, beliefs and ideals are indoctrinated into us subliminally, we can begin to empower ourselves to take our lives back by reviewing it consciously.

The PRIMARY reason why most people are not Moral, and adhere to passivity in their lives is because of a low self image, which was developed early on in life, and supported by many hidden belief systems pushed by our modern world.

This realization, coupled with a deep drive to rediscover who we really are and undo the years of unconscious programming, slowly heals us.



Related: Pope Francis Declares Lucifer As God?

Eventually we not only feel better on a daily basis, but we begin to realize that only through ourselves, the personal work of gaining true knowledge and acting in that knowledge, will undo the horrors of this world. 

Humanity as a whole has been conditioned to be dark and materialistic, doomed to self destruction, unless we look in the mirror and realize it is all our collective behaviors and beliefs which maintain the status quo.

Ultimately, we can acknowledge this is happening "to us" and realize only we can do something about it.

Authorities can not 'save us' because blind faith in authorities are the root of the problem. We must become our own guru's and rediscover who we really are, which will naturally undo the years of Satanic programing, and embolden us to act morally in the future. 



Ask Ex-Satanist Anything - Katy Perry Super Bowl Ritual






Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Ten Things You’re Not Supposed To Know
May 18 2018 | From: AnonymousNews

The general population doesn’t know what’s happening, and it doesn’t even know that it doesn’t know.” - Noam Chomsky.



1. It is Nearly Impossible to Pay Off the National Debt

Related: The Bankers’ Scam - The Power Of Money: Beat The Bankers Through Debt Termination & Commonwealth Bank Of Australia: One Of The Largest Banks In The World Just Accused Of Laundering Millions For Drug Cartels

“Nothing is so well calculated to produce a death-like torpor in the country as an extended system of taxation and a great national debt.”~William Cobbett

This is because money is created out of debt in a one-to-one increase in public debt. The national debt is $20 Trillion. That means the (roughly) 234 million US Americans would have to pay approximately $62,000 each to pay it off. This includes babies, children, poor people, and homeless people. There are even those who claim that it’s mathematically impossible to pay off the debt. And almost every country is in debt to every other country. It’s the height of insanity.

As former Governor of the Federal Reserve Marriner Eccles said, “If there were no debts in our money system, there wouldn’t be any money.”



2. There is No Underlying Thing Backing Money (It’s all an Illusion)

“Federal Reserve notes are not redeemable in gold, silver or any other commodity, and receive no backing by anything. The notes have no value for themselves.” ~The Treasury.

All money is fiat money. A dollar bill is a dollar bill because everyone agrees it’s a dollar bill. The dollar bill is not lawful money, but rather “legal tender.” Money used to be backed by a “gold standard” – which meant the government had $100 worth of gold in a vault from which they made a $100 bill that went out into the market (though even gold only has value because we’ve all agreed since time immemorial that it’s valuable).

However, they moved away from gold years ago, so now we must take the government’s word for it that the note is worth $100. The bill itself is just an IOU note, made from thin air, based on debt, and laundered by the government.



Related: The Khazarian Bankster Cult That Hijacked The World & Worthless Pieces Of Paper - Interest On Fake Money Is Confiscating Your Freedom

Even the debt issue discussed in the first bullet is based on nothing, and is nothing more than a financial concept financiers agree on. The debt isn’t actually there.

But since we all just go along with it, it affects us through inflation, and devaluation, and the sky-is-falling knee-jerk reactions to money meaning something only because we give it meaning. Money is little more than a cartoon in the brain that we’re addicted to watching.



3. How to Live Off the Grid

“Live simply so that others may simply live.” - Gandhi.

You’re not “supposed” to know how to live off the grid, because then you can’t be controlled by the government. The more self-sufficient you are, the less money the corporations can make off you. The more rain water you catch, the less you’ll need to pay the water companies.

The more windmills you build and solar panels you erect, the less you’ll need to pay the electric companies. The more composting toilets you install, the less you’ll have to pay plumbing companies. The more gardening you do, the less you’ll have to pay someone else for your food.



Related: 10 Government Rulers Who Have Told Us A “Secret Government” Rules The Earth

In short: the more independent you become, the less codependent you will be on the state. And the state doesn’t like that, because they like your money way more than they like your freedom.


4. Planned Obsolescence

“Armaments, universal debt and planned obsolescence – those are the three pillars of Western prosperity.” ~Aldous Huxley.

Speaking of making money off you, planned obsolescence is a way for companies to keep making money off you by capitalizing on your consumerist tendencies. Let’s face it, we’re a nation of consumers with Big Macs for brains and iPhones for hearts. We need our fix and we need it fast, and we are willing to fill all the landfills in the world, and then some, to get it.



Related: Planned Obsolescence: How The Products You Buy Are Designed To Break

Planned obsolescence is designed into a product to encourage the consumer to buy the next upgrade. Everything from toasters to automobiles, microwaves to cell phones are prone to planned obsolescence by greedy companies that know you will come back for more no matter how many times your things-things-things fall apart.

5. Civil Asset Forfeiture

“The State is nothing more nor less than a bandit gang writ large.”~Ludwig Von Mises.

As if police brutality, extortion, and overreach of power weren’t enough, unscrupulous police officials have been manipulating the deeply flawed federal and state civil asset forfeiture laws that give them permission to seize, keep, or sell any property allegedly involved in a crime. The key word is “allegedly.” Because most of the time property is taken without even being charged with a crime. That’s crazy!

Originally meant to be used on large-scale criminal organizations, it is now used almost entirely on individuals, ruining people’s lives over petty “crimes.” More and more police departments are using forfeiture to benefit their bottom lines. It’s less about fighting crime and more about profit. John Oliver did an excellent piece on the matter that gets right at the heart of the issue.

6. The US Imprisons More of its Population Than Any Other Country (And Profits Off it)


Some may say that jailing people over their debts makes poverty into a crime. Well if that’s true, maybe we should just cut out the middle man and put all poor people in jail. Of course, this will require new prison facilities, which we can build using people who can’t pay their prison fees. Not as workers, as the bricks.” 

- Stephen Colbert.

Living in what is widely considered the “land of the free,” this one should come as a body blow to anybody who truly believes in freedom. The total prison population has grown by 500 percent over the last 30 years. 500! The United States has less than 5 percent of the world’s population, yet we have almost 20 percent of the world’s total prison population. Even though crime is at a historic low.



Related: Lawful And Legal: Why You Need To Know What They Mean & It Is All A Word Game: Why “Persons” Are Not Real

The icing on this shit-cake is the deplorable fact that big corporations are making a killing off the prison system. Equal parts extortion and slavery, for-profit prisons do nothing in the way of rehabilitation and therapy, and everything in the way of profit and criminal relapse.


7. Forced Taxation is Theft

“Since few men are wise enough to rule themselves, even fewer are wise enough to rule others.” ~Edward Abbey.

When taxation is forced, one cannot say they live in a free country. When taxation is not optional, the country forcing the tax is not free. Bottom line. If one does not pay their taxes, in such a country, they are threatened with violence or prison if they don’t pay. That is point-blank extortion. And since it is being done by an authoritarian government, it is naked tyranny.

If one feels like paying taxes, then they should feel free to pay. That’s fair, because that’s voluntary. But if the state is using its monopoly on violence to get money out of you, that is not fair, that is extortion. It really is that simple.

If freedom is primary then voluntarism is paramount. The use of state services built off taxes is an entirely different matter with entirely different solutions, and is an irrelevant red herring to the issue at hand.


8. You’re Not “Allowed” to be Stateless, But You Can Be


A man without a government is like a fish without a bicycle.” 

- Alvaro Koplovich

Statelessness is an alien concept in our world, even though it can be extended to all living beings “in principle” and “in theory,” at its irreducible bedrock truth, it is exceptionally difficult to be sovereign and stateless. This is because the entire world is plagued with the disease of statism.

It is so second-nature to our existence that we never question it. We might as well be fish questioning water. But we are not fish. We are human beings with the ability for deep logic, higher reasoning, and basic common sense. That is, unless we are being oppressed into blind servitude and myopic subordination and we are unwilling to question things… And here we are.



Related: Governments: The Enemy Of Freedom & Globalists Interviewed: They Admitted They Controlled The Government

Similar to living off the grid, you’re not supposed to know this one because then the corrupt nation states of the world would have less control over you. And, don’t be fooled, it’s all about control, as Mike Gogulski found out firsthand. Unfortunately, the cons outweigh the pros on becoming a stateless person (Though these two gents seem to be enjoying it).

Especially because we are social creatures and most of the other social creatures in our world are conditioned statists. As Nietzsche famously said, “State is the name of the coldest of all cold monsters. Coldly it lies; and this lie slips from its mouth: ‘I, the state, am the people.’”


9. The Police Are Not legally Obligated to Protect You


There’s no weakness as great as false strength.” 

- Stefan Molyneux.

Most people falsely and ignorantly assume that it is the sworn duty of the police to protect and to serve. But it is actually the exception, not the rule. A cop protecting and serving is doing so in a humane capacity and not because he/she is obligated to do so. They just happen to be acting humanely while wearing a badge.

The reality is that power tends to corrupt. This applies especially to police. And especially-especially to police that are trained to be offense-minded, oppressive, extorting, overreaching, and violent enforcers of a statist agenda.

The solution is not more ill-trained offense-minded police with too much power, but more well-trained defense-minded police with just enough power (a power with built-in checks and balances in place to prevent power from corrupting). In short: a complete eradication of the Thin Blue Line.



10. We Live in an Oligarchic Plutocracy Disguised as a Democratic Republic

We may have democracy or we may have great wealth concentrated in the hands of a few, but we can’t have both.” 

- Louis Brandeis, Supreme Court Justice.

In our world, money is power. Money concentrated in the hands of a few, means power concentrated in the hands of a few. And since power tends to corrupt if it goes unchecked, the people must be free to check it, lest tyranny prevail. But because of an overreaching militarized police force, the people are not free to check it. And here we are, slipping into tyranny.



Related: The Telltale Signs The Western Oligarchs Are Doomed

If we lived within a horizontal democracy, we would have a better chance at being free. No masters, no rulers, and hence, no chance for power to become concentrated in the hands of a few. Easier said than done, sure, but nothing worth doing was ever easy.

As it stands, it is impossible to live freely within an oligarchic plutocracy. The plutocrats will simply continue buying up power by creating oppressive laws and “legal” extortion rackets that keep the people without wealth and power in a permanent state of poverty and powerlessness.

Add to that the use of lobbyists and a fiat currency based on debt, and you have a nation of hoodwinked debt slaves under the delusion that they live in a free democratic republic.


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

All The Biggest Lies About Climate Change And Global Warming Debunked In One Astonishing Interview
May 17 2018 | From: NaturalNews

Everything you’ve been told about global warming, climate change and carbon dioxide by the mainstream media - and mainstream “science” - is an outright lie.



Far from being a dangerous poison, carbon dioxide is a miraculous life-giving nutrient that plants need to thrive. Rising carbon dioxide is actually helping “green” the planet, as any legitimate science already knows.

Related:
Draining The Swamp: Top EPA Official Resigns Over Climate Change Hoax + Australia ‘Weather-Experts’ Falsify Climate Change

Without CO2 in the atmosphere, nearly all life on the planet would collapse, including both human life and plant life. (See my numerous science videos, below, which explain all this in detail.)

Now, an eye-opening interview has emerged that features István Markó, an organic chemistry researcher and professor at the Université catholique de Louvain. He was recently interviewed by Grégoire Canlorbe, a science journalist and out-of-the-box thinker. I’m publishing parts of the interview below, and I encourage you to read the full interview at GregoireCanlorbe.com.

All the words below are from István Markó, except the subhead titles, which are mine:


The Truth About Carbon Dioxide

Again, CO2 is not, and has never been, a poison. Each of our exhalations, each of our breaths, emits an astronomical quantity of CO2 proportionate to that in the atmosphere (some >40,000 ppm); and it is very clear that the air we expire does not kill anyone standing in front of us.

What must be understood, besides, is that CO2 is the elementary food of plants. Without CO2 there would be no plants, and without plants there would be no oxygen and therefore no humans. The equation is as simple as that.



Related: New Climate Study Throws Wrench In Global Warming Debate: "Our New Technical Paper... Will Likely Be Ignored"

Plants need CO2, water, and daylight. These are the mechanisms of photosynthesis, to generate the sugars that will provide them with staple food and building blocks. That fundamental fact of botany is one of the primary reasons why anyone who is sincerely committed to the preservation of the “natural world” should abstain from demonizing CO2.

Over the last 30 years, there has been a gradual increase in the CO2 level. But what is also observed is that despite deforestation, the planet’s vegetation has grown by about 20%. This expansion of vegetation on the planet, nature lovers largely owe it to the increase in the concentration of CO2 in the atmosphere.

If we study, however, what has been happening at the geological level for several million years, we realize that the present period is characterized by an extraordinarily low CO2 level. During the Jurassic, Triassic, and so on, the CO2 level rose to values sometimes of the order of 7000, 8000, 9000 ppm, which considerably exceeds the paltry 400 ppm that we have today.



Related: Inconvenient Reality: Al Gore’s Global Climate Apocalypse Never Took Place - He Now Says It Did But You Just Couldn’t Tell + Hero EPA Administrator Speaks Out Against Junk Science – Denies CO2 Is Primary Contributor To ‘Global Warming’!

Not only did life exist, in those far-off times when CO2 was so present in large concentration in the atmosphere, but plants such as ferns commonly attained heights of 25 meters. Reciprocally, far from benefiting the current vegetation, the reduction of the presence of CO2 in the atmosphere would be likely to compromise the health, and even the survival, of numerous plants.

To fall below the threshold of 280 or 240 ppm would plainly lead to the extinction of a large variety of our vegetal species.

In addition, our relentless crusade to reduce CO2 could be more harmful to nature as plants are not the only organisms to base their nutrition on CO2. Phytoplankton species also feed on CO2, using carbon from CO2 as a building unit and releasing oxygen.

By the way, it is worth remembering that ~70% of the oxygen present today in the atmosphere comes from phytoplankton, not trees: contrary to common belief, it is not the forests, but the oceans, that constitute the “lungs” of the earth.






The Truth About the “Greenhouse Effect”

About the supposed link between global warming and CO2 emissions, it is simply not true that CO2 has a major greenhouse effect. It is worth remembering, here too, that CO2 is a minor gas.

Today it represents only 0.04% of the composition of the air; and its greenhouse effect is attributed the value of 1. The major greenhouse gas in the atmosphere is water vapor which is ten times more potent than CO2 in its greenhouse effect. Water vapor is present in a proportion of 2% in the atmosphere.



Related: Climate Scare Declared Officially Over- Error In Model Calculations Discovered

Those facts are, in principle, taught at school and at university, but one still manages to incriminate CO2 alongside this learning, in using a dirty trick that presents the warming effect of CO2 as minor but exacerbated, through feedback loops, by the other greenhouse effects.





How Status Quo Science Brainwashes People and Turns Them Into Obedient Robots Who Spout Scientific Nonsense

I believe in science: I mean that I believe in the possibility of objectively knowing reality through science. I believe that there are truth and falsehood, that science allows us to distinguish between the two, and that truth must be known; that scientific knowledge must be placed in the hands of the population.

I also believe in freedom. I believe that every man is entitled to lead his life and to manage his goods as he sees fit, that he is the only possessor of himself, and that statist socio-economic control is as morally reprehensible as it is harmful in its social, economic, and environmental consequences.

I note two things distressing me: firstly, the population is increasingly misinformed scientifically; and secondly, the media and governments take advantage of this to propagate a theory that is doubtful, namely that of anthropogenic warming, and to promote coercive measures on its behalf.

Few people take the time to get vital information about the actual CO2footprint; and few people, more generally, are still interested in science. I deeply regret that our Western societies have succeeded in cultivating such mistrust of science: such a reluctance to have confidence in its capacity to know the world objectively and to transform it positively.



Related: Global Warming Scientifically illegitimate - The Carbon Con: Free energy is around the corner

The theory of anthropogenic warming claims to be scientific; but if people accept this theory, if they hold it to be true, it is clearly not out of interest for science. Such a fragile theory, in view of the CO2 facts I have presented to you above, could never have been accepted by people who truly care about science; and who possess a deep understanding in that field.

In my eyes, there are two main reasons - or if you prefer, two main types of feelings - that make people let themselves be seduced by the theory of anthropogenic warming so readily. In the first place, the Catholic religion is in decline in the Western world; and what I call ecologism comes to replace it.

In the second place, Westerners have a pronounced taste for self-flagellation; and the theory of anthropogenic warming provides justification for that tendency, possibly anchored in our Judeo-Christian heritage. So, on the one hand, we have religious feelings: faith in a new system of thought, which is ecologism; the veneration of a new divinity, which is benevolent and protective Nature.

On the other hand, we have a feeling of guilt, expressed in our conviction that, if the climate warms up, it is our fault; and that if we do not immediately limit our CO2 emissions, we will have sullied and disfigured our planet.






Rising Ocean Levels and Melting Ice Caps

Over the last 12,000 years, what we have witnessed is an oscillation between warm and cold periods, thus periods with rising and declining sea levels. Incontestably, sea and ocean levels have been on the rise since the end of the Little Ice Age that took place approximately from the beginning of the 14th century until the end of the 19th century. 

At the end of that period, global temperatures started to rise. That being said, the recorded rise is 0.8 degrees Celsius and is, therefore, nothing extraordinary. If the temperature goes up, ocean water obviously dilates and some glaciers recede. This is something glaciers have always done, and not a specificity of our time.

Thus, in Ancient Roman times, glaciers were much smaller than the ones we know nowadays. I invite the reader to look at the documents dating back to the days of Hannibal, who managed to cross the Alps with his elephants because he did not encounter ice on his way to Rome, (except during a snow storm just before arriving on the Italian plain).

Today, you could no longer make Hannibal’s journey. He proved to be capable of such an exploit, precisely because it was warmer in Roman times.

Sea levels are currently on the rise; but this is an overestimated phenomenon. The recorded rise is 1.5 millimeters per year, namely 1.5 cm every ten years, and is, therefore, not dramatic at all. Indeed, it does happen that entire islands do get engulfed; but in 99% of the cases, that is due to a classic erosion phenomenon[2] and not to rising sea levels.



Related: Weather Channel founder Tells CNN “Climate Change Is A Hoax” - 31,000 Scientists Agree & Al Gore Confuses Tides With Global Warming Ocean Rise Apocalypse, Claims Fish Are “Swimming In The Streets” Of Miami Due To Climate Change

As far as the Italian city of Venice is concerned, the fact it has been faced with water challenges is not due to any rise of the lagoon level; and is just the manifestation of the sad reality that “the City of the Doges” is sinking under its weight on the marshland.

Once again, the global sea and ocean levels are rising; but the threat effectively represented by that phenomenon is far from being tangible. I note that the Tuvalu islands, whose engulfment was previously announced as imminent, not only have not been engulfed, but have seen their own land level rise with respect to that of waters around them.

Still another phenomenon we tend to exaggerate is the melting of the polar caps. The quantity of ice in the Arctic has not gone down for 10 years: one may well witness, from one year to the other, ice level fluctuations, but on average that level has remained constant.

Right after the Little Ice Age, since the temperature went up, the Artic started to melt; but the ice level in the Arctic finally settled down. Besides, ice has been expanding in Antarctica over the last 30 years; and similarly, we observe in Greenland that the quantity of ice increased by 112 million cubic kilometers last year.



Related: NASA Confirms: Sea Levels Have Been Falling Across The Planet For Two Years - Media Silent & Dr. Tim Ball Crushes Climate Change: The Biggest Deception in History

On a global scale, glaciers account for peanuts, with most of the ice being located in Antarctica and on Greenland. One cannot but notice an almost unchanged ice level over hundreds of years.

…We are told that the level of water will increase throughout the world and increase to the point that it will overwhelm a large part of our continents. As Hans von Storch, one of the world’s leading climate modelers, has shown, the models supporting those forecasts are, for 98% of them, totally false.

We are told that the air we breathe in the big cities has never been so polluted. One only must review the documents oneself about the air that people used to breath in London in the 1960s to realize how much urban pollution has diminished.

In Peking, often castigated for poor air quality, there happens, every now and then, a fog reminiscent of the London smog. But even that pollution in Peking is far from competing with that which, a short while ago, reigned in London.






Global “Warming” and Temperature Models

Many other climate myths and legends exist. From storms to tornados, extreme events are going down all around the world; and when they occur, their level is much lower, too.

As explained by MIT physicist Richard Lindzen, the reduction of the temperature differential between the north hemisphere and the equatorial part of our planet makes cyclonic energy much smaller: the importance and frequency of extreme events thus tend to decrease. But once again, the rise of temperatures shows a magnitude considerably lower with respect to that we currently project.

If you look at satellite data and weather balloon measurements, you then note that the temperature rise around the world is relatively modest; that it is much lower than the rise that is predicted for us by authorities, and that these predictions rely on calculations that are highly uncertain.

This is because the simulation inputs cannot take into account past temperatures (for which there is no precision data[3]), except by subjectively adjusting x, y, z data that are not always known. The recent temperature spikes measured by satellites and balloons are part of a classic natural phenomenon which is called El Niño.



Related: What You’re Not Being Told About The Paris Climate Agreement

This short-term phenomenon consists of a return of the very warm waters at the surface of the equatorial Pacific Ocean. The heat thus liberated in the atmosphere pushes up the global temperature and CO2 plays no role in that process.

Another issue I would like to raise: present deserts, far from expanding, are receding; and they are receding due to the higher quantity of CO2available in the air. It turns out that greenhouse operators voluntarily inject three times as much CO2 in the commercial greenhouse as it is present in the atmosphere.

The result we can observe is that plants grow faster and are bigger, that they are more resistant to diseases and to destructive insects, and that their photosynthesis is way more efficient and that they therefore consume, less water. Similarly, the rise of CO2level in the atmosphere makes that plants need less water and thus that they can afford to colonize arid regions.

Regarding diseases and other weird phenomena hastily attributed to climate warming, there is a website - “globalwarminghoax.com,” if I recall - that collects the different rumors and contemplations on this theme.



Related: Green Gestapo Says You're Mentally Ill If You Challenge Climate Change + Over 30,000 Scientists Say 'Catastrophic Man-Made Global Warming' Is A Complete Hoax And Science Lie

The fact that masculine fertility decreases; the fact that birds’ wings shrink; the fact that a shark showed up in the North Sea; absolutely anything is likely to be connected to climate change if one displays enough intellectual dishonesty.

That is where honest journalists come into play: your role is to investigate on the true reason of phenomena and to demystify the ready-made thinking that financial and political forces ask the media to channel slavishly.

Climate-related diseases are relatively rare; and even malaria does not directly depend on the climate, but rather on the way we enable the parasite to reproduce and the mosquito to flourish in the place where we are located.

If you find yourself in a swampy area, the odds you will get malaria are high; if you have drained the system and you no longer have that wetland, the odds you will catch the disease are very low.

In the end, automatically blaming the resurgence of some disease on climate change comes down to removing the personal responsibility from the people involved: such as denying that their refusal of vaccinations, for instance, or their lack of hygiene, may be part of the problem.






The Economic Failure of Wind Power

The wind industry, over which ecologists swoon, produces highly unpredictable output, depending on the intensity of the wind. Even under good atmospheric conditions, wind delivers too little electricity to be a profitable industry on its own.

Warren Buffet, who owns one of the largest wind farms in Iowa, said it without embarrassment: “On wind power, we get a tax credit if we build a lot of wind farms. This is the only reason to build them. They do not make sense without the tax credit.”

The ecological balance is just as bad: onshore wind turbines kill hundreds of thousands, even millions of birds and bats per year. As for wind turbines at sea, they kill many marine mammals, again in the utmost indifference of ecologists.



Thoughts on World Government and Eco-Tyranny

Many persons, generally those coming from the former Eastern Bloc, let themselves be seduced by the idea that the resolution of our environmental problems would be that of global governance. In many respects, ecologism is also the communism of the 21st century. In the same way as Islam, it occupies the place left vacant by the decline of Marxism-Leninism.

I do not know if a convergence of struggles between Islamists and ecologists will actually take shape; however, I note that we already have the equivalent, on a smaller scale, of the global ecological caliphate. I am thinking of the European Union, which gives us a foretaste of the bureaucratic, global, and totalitarian governance that the United Nations manifestly endeavors to establish.



Related: Dane Wigington Exposes The Globalist Geoengineering Weather Control Agenda In Fascinating Interview With The Health Ranger

Since we are talking about globalization, envisioned in its political aspect, the prospect of a world government, but also in its economic and, say, informational aspect - the networking, sometimes instantaneous, of humans, goods, and ideas - I would like to opine a possible perverse effect.

As cultures and mentalities mingle, the Westerners’ ecologist (or Gaianist) religion, as well as their penchant for repentance, seem to even reach some of the Asian peoples. Japan, which emerged spiritually emasculated from the Second World War, is more conducive to letting itself be invaded by that Western sanctification of the self-denial of ecologism.



The Global Depopulation Agenda

The agreement of the Paris COP 21 was not signed to save the planet and to prevent us from roasting due to an imaginary temperature increase of +2°C. Behind all that masquerade is hidden, as always, the ugly face of power, greed, and profit.

All the industrialists who are in favor of that commitment, which will ruin Europe and immensely impoverish its citizens, do so for the good reason they find in it a huge and easy source of income.



Related: When Plutocrats Own The Weather & Nobody Is Buying The “Climate Change” Hoax Anymore

As for NGOs, when they are not simply motivated by greed, their motive consists in a resolutely Malthusian ideology.

Their object is to return the world to a very small population, on the order of a few hundred million people. To do so, they impoverish the world, remove the power of fossil fuel energies, and thus ensure that the number of deaths increases.



Thoughts on Glyphosate

Interestingly, Marko is pro-glyphosate, saying it is only”half as toxic as salt.” He even adds, “I am ready to drink ten grams of glyphosate in front of you,” but nowhere is he recorded as actually having done so.

It just goes to show you that real scientists are independent thinkers who may have very diverse conclusions on a variety of science-based topics. To this day, however, I have not seen any scientist gobble down ten grams of glyphosate. Sadly, Marko has already passed, so he won’t be available to demonstrate his confidence in this herbicide, either.



Related: Hollywood Sci-Fi Filmmakers Tapped To Dramatize Fictional Climate Change To Scare Everybody Into Voting For Climate Totalitarians

Nevertheless, it’s clear that Marko was a brilliant thinker and a man who was dedicated to his pursuit of scientific understanding and truth. I thank Grégoire Canlorbe for conducting and sharing this enlightening interview, and I encourage you to visit his website at GregoireCanlorbe.com.

You can also read more about real climate science at ClimateScienceNews.com.


Rrelated Articles:

Hurricanes in 2017 Demand Answers as to Weather Modification Involvement

Historic: Trump Rejects Paris Climate Treaty & Globalists Plot Against Trump And Infowars At Bilderberg

Ending The Hoax: Team Trump Removes All References To ‘Climate Change’ On Whitehouse.gov Web Site + New York Times 1989: No Global Warming Trend


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

What Is Real Wealth?
May 16 2018 | From: FinalWakeUpCall

Wealth is founded on Trust / Currency versus Money:



Most people think currency is money. If someone gives you cash, presumably it is thought of as money. It is not.

Related:
A Failing Empire, Part 2: De-Dollarisation - China and Russia's Plan From Petroyuan To Gold

Cash is simply a currency, a medium of exchange that is used to purchase something that has value, namely an asset or service. The word currency is derived from the word current – electricity – a current must move or else it will die. A currency does not store value in itself. Rather, it is a medium to transfer value from one asset to another.

Money has, unlike currency, value within itself. Money is always a currency in that it can be used to purchase other items that have value, however currency is not always money as explained above; it doesn’t have intrinsic value. The basic definition of money is; income-energy received for energy given.

The following statement illustrates this definition. The rectangle of paper representing a one-hundred-euro bill is not worth one hundred euros! The piece of paper represents the value of one hundred euros that is stored somewhere else, waiting to be purchased; the fact that a rectangle of paper, or currency, represents value in and of itself, was true only in the past, when the world was on a gold standard.



Related: President Trump: Replace The Dollar With Gold As The Global Currency To Make America Great Again

Today every bill is backed by nothing other than air or what commonly is called ‘good faith’ and the credit worthiness of the ‘issuer’ the Central Bank. In other words, authorities have the ability to create money at will without anything to back it up, in plain language money-printing or counterfeiting, but governments call it fiscal policy, and this together is called ‘fiat currency’, which is not money.

So, money is not what people think it is. Nowadays money is ‘currency’ invented and created by Governments or for that matter, the Central Banks, to steal from the people, by taxation without approval of parliament, by means of inflating the currency and consequently reducing people’s purchasing power by lowering the nominated ‘intrinsic’ value.



Money Has Value of its Own, Currency Doesn’t:

The abstract viewpoint is; Currency is a metaphysical technology that facilitates the development of trust, which in essence is what money is.

Trust that exists between two or more individuals is the true source of all wealth, allowing everyone to create on his/her own and naturally transpiring through the environment.

In other words; Wealth, in all its forms, is something of value created by people in unison with nature.

Currency, in this sense, is a social lubricant that enables two or more people to work together on some project, objective, or agenda. The objective might not be intrinsically valuable to the people involved - they might not be willing to cooperate merely to accomplish the purpose alone - but the motivation arises by offering them money, which gives them a valuable stake in the business.



Related: The Next Move To Steal Your Money: A Plan To Rip-Off Your Wealth

Generally speaking, people tend to participate in things they find valuable, which is money, as an effective motivator.

Thus, even with respect to debt-based money, which is money “printed out of thin air” it is people’s faith and trust that gives any monetary system power. If people don’t derive some kind of value from the use of money, they won’t use it.

But what makes a society benevolent is that the people within it have a genuine interest in placing their trust solely in honourable projects. On the flipside of the coin, when morality, ethics, and justice are lost, people can be bribed into malevolence through the promise of money. And this is essentially where the world is today. The powers that be, the elite, use us like cogs in a wheel to keep the systems of control alive, which we willingly participate in, mainly through the use of their created money.


Wealth is by Nature Valuable:

Personal wealth is by nature valuable for an individual and potentially for others. For example, a musician plays a piece of music that is inherently valuable to the musician but also valuable to others who listen to it, because in some way it is beautiful, inspiring, or expressive.

In nature, wealth needs to be tamed or refined, often through the collective works of individuals. When a group of people mutually agree that they value something, like farming food for their community, they can work together to bring that value into existence. The formal process for creating a mutually agreed model of value is called trust.

Money is a symbol of trust; people in a nation trust in the money the nation employs, enabling them to exchange these symbols amongst themselves.



Related: The Bankers’ Scam - The Power Of Money: Beat The Bankers Through Debt Termination & Commonwealth Bank Of Australia: One Of The Largest Banks In The World Just Accused Of Laundering Millions For Drug Cartels

Because money is a symbol of value that can be traded for other things, people can be encouraged into group projects by offering them money. If someone doesn’t see the value of doing something innately, simply for the act of doing so, they can nevertheless be motivated to participate and “rewarded” for their efforts with money.

Value is measured by what people really want and freely choose, it will not make the world poorer.

5,000 years ago gold was introduced as a money. It is money people could trust. Not a promise by someone, as it is today. This “gold money” was something very different. It was something people could count on. It made it easy to settle a transaction right on the spot. No need to remember who owed what to whom. No need to speak the same language or worship the same religion. This “gold money” was worth something in itself; intrinsically.


Gold is True Global Money:

Gold, as opposed to paper currency, is a proven form of sound money. People have bought and sold goods and services with it for thousands of years. It has survived every kind of financial crisis. And it has survived countless paper currencies. Gold’s value and by the same token silver’s value are stable.



Related: Liens Filed Against The Federal Reserve: The Key To Trump Ending The Fed & Returning The Gold Standard?

They are not going to plunge 25% or more over the course of a few days. There also isn’t a central authority in the world that controls PHYSICAL GOLD’S price or its supply. It’s a truly global currency. That’s why gold is still the best way to protect yourself from reckless governments and central banksters.


What is Real Wealth?

Money, right? Currency, gold, silver, you name it. Money is only real wealth because you can use it to buy whatever you want. Money in any form is in actual fact only the means to acquire real wealth. It is the instrument for opportunity and time to pursue your goal.

The conventional view that wealth is money and leisure is upside down. Let’s imagine the owner of a vault has conventional treasures: jewels, gold coins, etc. If the “wealth” stays in the vault, what’s the point of owning this “wealth”? The secret satisfaction of being “wealthy”?



Related: Banking & Negative Interest Rates: The Truth About "Austerity": = Wealth Transfer

If “wealth” is only an internal state, then let’s measure friendship and being needed/wanted with the metrics of “wealth.” Do you see the point; if “wealth” is merely an internal state of satisfaction, then a vault full of “money” is a poor metric.

What money buys is what real wealth truly is, which is freedom and the control over one’s life. This control over one’s life is called action. Action is defined as “the capacity of an actor to act in a given environment.” This may not seem like a profound concept, but another way to describe action is that action is the opposite of helplessness.


Forms of Wealth:

People with activity or drive define themselves and their identity. They shape the world they inhabit, rather than passively awaiting whatever circumstances may be delivered.

In the real world, people with drive are driven. They move on when things no longer work for them in a particular situation.

Action is not just the opposite of of helplessness; it’s also the opposite of victimhood, i.e. the state of being in which others are held responsible for all of one’s trials and tribulations.

Action and auto responsibility are two sides of the same coin: each manifests the other.

Opportunity is a form of wealth - and so is the ability to take opportunities that arise. Though there is a random element to opportunity – i.e. getting lucky. However, the ability to take the opportunity is not a matter of luck. It requires a specific appetite for risk, perseverance, the ability to discern how best to use the opportunity, and access to the capital required to exploit the opportunity.

Capital is a type of wealth that isn’t limited to “money”: Character traits are capital, social networks are capital, experience is capital, knowledge is capital. All of these forms of capital are often more important than “money” capital.



Related: Shocking Hillary Quotes + Hillary's Emails Confirm France And US Killed Qaddafi For His Gold And Oil

As for “money” buying leisure; Leisure in abundance is a disaster for the vast majority of people. Humans are designed to be needed by others, to be part of something greater than themselves, and to gain dignity and pride by doing useful work – whether they are paid “money” for this work or not.

This is why so many of those with the “money” to have endless leisure are miserable. Their lives are an endless treadmill of frivolous consumerism, neurotic pettiness, hypochondria, expressing their infinite heartaches to counsellors, and saddest of all, medications in abundance to relieve the ennui and the deadweight of their purposeless existence.

“Money” is only useful if it is a means to acquire real wealth, which is the activity, opportunity and time to pursue your ideals.

There are many people who can spend $600,000 a year on various things, i.e. their “lifestyle”, who don’t feel “wealthy” – and if they don’t have activity and time for work which is meaningful to them, they aren’t wealthy: they’re as impoverished as the person earning a fraction of their income.


Real Wealth Doesn’t Need Much Money:

Real wealth doesn’t actually require a vast horde of “money.” It requires some money, but how much depends on the cost of activity, opportunity and time. For those with few needs and the right priorities, the cost is minimal.



Related: Declassified Emails Reveal NATO Killed Gaddafi To Stop Libyan Creation Of Gold-Backed Currency

As for acquiring capital – the most important types of capital don’t require much money; determination, self-discipline, organisation, a voracious appetite for knowledge and work, an insatiable curiosity, a generous heart, a knack for friendship, the purposeful pursuit of goals – these are the tools to acquiring real wealth.


Money Can’t Solve the Core Problems of Humanity:

People, through no direct fault of their own, accept the mistrust of the government as an unchangeable fact; “This is just the way things work!” It is assumed that governments can be nothing but corrupt, and as such, people don’t realise they can be forces of change to address this problem of trust.

As each one takes on the burden of self-education in law and trust, they become a single unit of honesty that can one day unite with others to form a truly honest and fair society.

In short, just because human history has been plagued by tyrannies and corrupt governments this doesn’t in the least prevent us from forming truly benevolent governments. Such a benevolent body, should be built from the ground up, it should be anarchically founded on a population of educated and vigilant people, who know how to form trusting relationships as individuals and as a collective.



Related: Everywhere In The Western World, Government Is A Conspiracy Against The People & Cartels That Run The World

Our world is plagued by dishonesty, unfairness, and wholesale rejection of the truth; the founding principle of life.

In our world today Might is right, it’s the order of the day; lawlessness; where the law of the jungle and survival of the “fittest” are the primary criteria for oppression and success. And yet, despite the poverty stricken status of the human realms of trust, there is nothing stopping us from turning the ship of civilisation around and righting our course toward prosperity and abundance.

All the money in the world can’t solve the core problem humanity faces; the destruction of social trust and the capacity for individuals to restore the greater human family.


Restore the Trust:

The Cabal, for all their power through technology, their abundance of monetary wealth, and their seemingly limitless capacity to pollute and distort the minds of humans are practically powerless without the trust of their subordinates.

Even they, in their ivory towers of splendour and opulence, need a population of trusting serfs – puppets – to act as pawns for their games of domination and control.

The powers that should not be know that trust is the blood that flows through the veins of the entire social enterprise and as a result, they have worked tirelessly to ensure that we, the people never restore trust amongst ourselves.

Since we cannot trust each other, we end up placing our trust in the corrupt power structure, growing increasingly dependent on the very people who have destroyed our trust.

This is why history has been marked by the endless divisive movements, religions, creeds, sexuality and wars, all designed to destroy the human family and social trust.



Related: The Most Important Financial Meeting Since JFK’s Death Just Took Place

The most dangerous thing to these morally void fools who have managed to climb the pillars of egocentric personal power, is an awakened individual and their potential to restore honour, relationship, and trust with others of like mind.

One of the best weapons against tyranny is the love of truth, and the willingness to work in trust with others.

Trust, honour, and respect are what make all relationships work. In this sense, good faith is what money really is. If trust is broken with someone, they likely won’t want to work with them in the future. Humanity, on the whole, betrays trust, acts dishonourably and is pathologically disrespectful, making cooperation very difficult.

To solve this problem, a false form of trust is needed, a kind of forced cooperation, otherwise known as debt. That is why all money today is debt-based. Restore trust, honour, and respect, and credit-based ‘money’ can return; otherwise known as the love of faith in one’s fellowman.


The Consequences of Scarcity Are All Around Us

We are deprived of physical affection from birth, leading to lifelong personality pathology and longing for emotional acceptance.

We are materially deprived of healthy food and clean products.

We are intellectually deprived of the truth and the self-empowerment that comes therefrom. And,

We are spiritually deprived of the healing power of fellowship, the restorative bestowment of genuine human interaction, and the transcendent joy of exploring cosmic meanings and values as a unified people.





Each Human Being Has Been Effectively Reduced to a Starving Rat

We spend our modern technologically enhanced lives in overcrowded towns and cities, connected to thousands of people through social media, all the while feeling more alone, disconnected and destitute than ever before.

We chase dreams of perfect romantic love; as portrayed in movies, TV shows, and books, to compensate for the profound state of loneliness, deprivation of intimacy and chronic feelings of

We yearn for true meaning in life and personal attainment, indulging in entertainment laden with cosmological archetypes and spiritual overtones, all the while denying the spiritual nature of existence.

We fulminate against anyone labelled as the enemy by social engineers in the mainstream media, feeling a sense of righteous empowerment as a result.



The result of these seemingly endless cycles of lack and dependence is the effectiveness of the elite’s divide and conquer - the destruction of the human family.



The elephant in the room isn’t that the Cabal or the globalists exist. It’s not that extra-terrestrials or spiritual forces are here and are likely trying to help us. It’s not even that fraud, deception, and lies are the backbone of our broken civilisation.

It’s that we, the people continue to allow their programs of division and self-disempowerment to run our lives. We continue to act without trust, honour and righteousness, even within the awakening community.


The Real Source of Wealth:

But this seems to be coming to an end, as more and more people rediscover the source of true wealth: love, trust, righteousness, good health and fellowship.

The desire for material wealth in most people reflects the fact that our basic human needs aren’t being met. But if we can, as a people, come together to solve this problem and build trust in the process, we’ll become immune to the rat-in-the-trap social program. We will transcend the Rat Race!

Related: Nothing is as it seems - Capitalism multiplies wealth


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Left’s Inescapable Hate Problem: Their Hate Doesn’t Count But Your Hate Should Get You Banned From Everything
May 15 | From: NaturalNews

The Left has found a whole new weapon to silence conservative voices: “Hate.” The problem is, their hate doesn’t count. Only the hate they selectively designate to be “hate” is punished.



Here’s how the contortion works: Google, Twitter, Facebook, YouTube and other internet gatekeepers are increasingly banning and censoring users and content by rolling out terms of service that give them justification to silence anyone peddling “hate.” But what is hate, exactly?


Related:
Kim DotCom Warns End Of Mueller - Wikileaks To Destroy Far Left Narrative

According to the Left, “hate” is any criticism of gays, lesbians, transgenders, black people, abortion clinics, Muslims and so on. No thoughtful criticism of such “protected” subjects is allowed, since it’s all deemed to be “hate.”

Yet at the same time, the Left openly encourages and practices its own hatred against a wide range of targets which are automatically deemed to be “okay to hate.”


These targets include:

White people (“white privilege”)

Men (“toxic masculinity”)

Christians

Soldiers and veterans

Police officers

President Trump, Sarah Palin, Ann Coulter and other conservatives

Heterosexuals

America’s founders


Thus, the Left isn’t actually opposed to hate. They fully support hate as long as it’s directed to specific political enemies. To further pull off this contortion, of course, they make sure their own hatred is never labeled “hate.”

Instead, the Left’s HATE is called “diversity.” And diversity, by definition of the Left, excludes people of white skin color. To further the delusion, this exclusion of Whites is labeled “inclusiveness,” while attacks on Christians are labeled “tolerance.”


Left-Wing Truthism: White People are “Dangerous” to Everyone

This targeted hatred of the Left is openly repeated across the left-wing news media, Hollywood movies, universities and other outlets.

As just one example, an MSNBC panelist recently declared that white men “pose the biggest threat to Americans,” insisting that merely being white makes a person a danger to society. (She apparently has no familiarity with the work of MLK Jr. who correctly declared that judging people by the color of their skin is shallow and stupid.)

This openly racist hatred from the Left is widely encouraged and reinforced by late-night comedy shows, Saturday Night Live, stand-up comedy and other sources of “humor” that are really little more than hatred disguised as comedy. Remember when Johnny Carson ran late-night variety TV?



Related: Anti-Donald Trump: War Propaganda + Trump Destroys Leftist Judges By Reading Law Word-For-Word

A true classic, Carson was genuinely funny. But today, we get Jimmy Kimmel, a twisted, deranged Leftist who uses his late night TV platform to spew hatred and vitriol against his political enemies… all in the name of being “funny,” of course.

But it isn’t funny at all. It’s just another form of hatred disguised as political correctness. Worse, it’s turning into actual violence in the streets of America. That’s why anti-white hate crimes are the fastest-growing category of hate crimes in America, according to the FBI’s own statistics.


The Left is Hopelessly Blind to its Own Hatred

What’s so remarkable about all this is how the Left remains utterly blind to its own hatred. When UC Berkeley students penned articles in the student newspaper calling for conservative speakers to be murdered in order to halt their speech, this was widely accepted on the Left as a seemingly reasonable practice. It wasn’t deemed “hatred” at all. In fact, the Left tells itself that hating conservatives is a form of anti-hate (or “anti fascism” as the narrative goes).

According to the Left, then, if you are full of hatred for all the correct targets (Christians, solders, police, white men, etc.), that isn’t hate at all. It’s love.

This is the kind of twisted, deranged logic summarized by the Left’s mantra, “LOVE TRUMPS HATE,” which really means that if you express sufficient hatred toward Donald Trump, you will be loved by the Left, which is full of haters. Achieving acceptance and love, in other words, only requires that you hate all the same people they hate.



Related: Top 10 Most Delusional “Facts” Of The Lunatic Left-Wing Fact-Checkers

Yet the Left lives in denial about its own hate problem, refusing to acknowledge that the entire left-wing movement in America is now steeped in hatred and fantasies of murder against political enemies. Case in point? Kathy Griffin.

The Left isn’t about love, you see. It’s about bullying people with hatred, then using selective enforcement of anti-hate rules to censor and suppress all conservative voices. See this article on The Daily Sheeple: VIDEO: Angry mob of Hillary Clinton supporters attack female reporter, attempt to silence free speech.


Why Isn’t Twitter Banning Users Who Express Hatred Toward White People, Christians or the President?

Although Twitter aggressively bans users who express anything resembling hatred toward gays or transgenders, Twitter almost never bans users for expressing the same degree of hatred toward Christians, whites or President Trump.

Ever wonder why? It’s because to the Left, hatred toward Christians, whites and President Trump isn’t recognized as hate. It’s actually a form of virtue signaling to other leftists, which is necessary to be accepted and loved by the Left. Hatred, you see, is the prerequisite to left-wing love.

This is why the liberal mob has become so dangerous to society. Far from promoting love and unity, the Left has actually transformed into a dangerous cult of totalitarian thought control and demanded obedience, all powered by intense emotional hatred coupled with a total abandonment of reason.

If you do not agree with the Left on a given topic - no matter how absurd the Left’s stance - you are immediately branded as being engaged in “hate.” Once branded, you can then be censored, insulted and blacklisted from society in the name of the Left “stopping hate.”



Related: Facebook To Become Left-Wing Propaganda Echo Chamber With Orwellian Plan To Label Independent
Journalism “Fake” + Facebook Jumps On ‘Fake News’ Fact-Checker Train, Will ‘Roll Out’ With PolitiFact


This is how Google, Facebook, YouTube and Twitter plan to make sure Democrats win the next presidential election in 2020: The Democrat candidate will be selected from one or more victim groups of the Left - transgenders, women, minorities, gays, etc. - and then any rational criticism of that candidate’s policies will be stifled via accusations of “hate speech.”

Even rational, science-based questioning of the Left’s deranged narratives earns any thinking person this same label of “hate.” For example, the Left now believes that biological sex is no longer determined by genetics. Instead, according to the Left, a person’s biological sex is now determined by a wish or a hope… and it can be changed at any moment by merely declaring such a change.

Remember, this is the same Left that has, for decades, insisted that gay people are born gay, reminding us that being gay “isn’t a choice.” A rational person might point out the glaring contradiction in these two beliefs - that gay people are “born gay” but biological sex is a “choice” - but that person would be immediately branded a purveyor of HATE for the simple reason that when it comes to left-wing narrative myths, no questions are allowed.

Raising intelligent questions, you see, is now considered an act of hate according to the Left. In fact, any challenge to the false narratives of the Left is branded HATE as a crude control mechanism to stifle speech and punish intelligent thinking.



Related: Google And Soros-Backed ‘Fact-Checkers’ Join Forces To Control News Search Results & USG Conspiracy To Censor Alternative Views As Fake

The Owellian overtones in all this are, of course, too obscene to ignore: The Left has become the Ministry of Truth even when nearly everything the Left espouses is based on lies.

Remember, according to the Left, if you HATE all the correct people, you will be LOVED. In other words, “Hate = Love” to the deranged, lunatic Left.


Fake News, Fake Facts and Narrative Myths

Part of the Left’s descent into derangement and cultism is their reliance on false reality reinforcement via fake news, fake “facts,” fake science and narrative myths. The Left has historically relied on narrative myths to explain to themselves how things work, even when such myths stand in total contradiction to reality.

As mentioned above, the transgenderism myth is one such example. It involves Leftists denying biological reality to such an insane degree that transgenderism-promoting Bill Nye - who absurdly claims that “transgenderism is evolution” - even edited his own “Science Guy” shows from the 1990s to remove all the lessons about genetics, chromosomes and biological sex.



Related: President Donald Trump Interview - Fake Media; Trump Rips Clinton + CNN Launches “Facts First” Campaign
While Burying Uranium One Scandal


Quite literally, left-wing science figures are now engaged in revisionist history and selective editing of educational materials to alter the narrative in order to fit the modern-day lunacy of the Left (which has permanently departed from physical reality).

Similarly, in the world of media, the Left has constructed an elaborate narrative myth that claims President Trump colluded with “the Russians” to steal the election from the rightful President, Hillary Clinton. This narrative lacks even a shred of credible evidence in the real world, but through the construction of an elaborate media bubble, nearly all Leftists believe that myth, even when it has no basis in reality whatsoever.


Fake Hate Crimes, Fake “Documentaries” and Left-Wing Hoaxes

Fake “facts” are universally used throughout the twisted realm of Leftism to rile up hatred against intended targets. For example, a shockingly high percentage of so-called “hate crimes” supposedly carried out against blacks, Jews or Muslims eventually turn out to be perpetrated by those very same people against themselves.

The huge number of such examples makes them too numerous to list in this article, but here’s a list of just 15 “hate crime hoaxes” that were all reported as true by the left-wing media.

The left-wing media, of course, reports all hate crime hoaxes as true events. But once the perpetrator is discovered to have carried out a hoax, the left-wing media never informs its audience of the hoax.

Thus, readers of the NYT, Washington Post, CNN, etc., are left with the utterly false believe that hate crimes are happening everywhere, all the time, and that they’re all genuine hate crimes. In truth, many of them are false flag crimes.



Related: Trump: Russian Uranium Deal "Is The Biggest Story That Fake Media Doesn't Want To Follow" + Putin:
Hillary Behind “Russian Collusion” Hysteria And Elites Disrespect Trump Voters

The broadcast industry further underscores all this with staged, fake “documentary” TV shows that are all fabricated with the intention of catapulting the continued propaganda of hate crimes. A&E, for example, desperately tried to stage a KKK documentary, but they were so unsuccessful in finding actual KKK members that they had to script the whole thing and bring their own Nazi props, direct the actors to say “ni##er” on camera, and so on.

The entire thing was pure theater… not merely theater for entertainment’s sake, but theater to populate the minds of Leftists with more narrative myths that further the agenda of the Left.

The Left, in other words, has to engineer hatred in order to keep its myths alive. And when there’s not enough actual hatred to be found, they are happy to invoke total fictions to depict the necessary hatred anyway.

That’s why nearly all the so-called “white supremacists” you might see marching around in public rallies these days are actually Leftists pretending to be KKK members. After all, how hard is it, really, to don a white hood and march around with a Nazi poster in your hands, all for the CNN cameras that broadcast the staged video into the minds of Leftists everywhere?



There is Real Racism, Hatred, Intolerance and Marginalization in America… and it’s Mostly Coming From the Intolerant Left

There is real racism in America, however. There are no doubt still pockets of bygone culture where blacks or Jews are despised. But institutional racism against black people is ancient history (except in the realm of science and medicine, where there remains a specific agenda to exterminate blacks, as I’ve publicly exposed).

The real, institutionalized intolerance in America today is squarely aimed at Christians, white people and conservatives. That brand of intolerance is openly taught in the schools, encouraged at universities and reinforced through the hatred and intolerance of the left-wing media (Hollywood, late night TV, Netflix shows, etc.)

The assault against “whiteness” has become so intense across America’s universities that some indignant students have begun posting signs on campus that read, “It’s okay to be white.” This brilliant social experiment was pioneered at 4chan, eventually leading to the increasingly popular hashtag #IOTBW.

 


These signs, naturally, are widely condemned as being “racist.” “Those messages, instead of being ignored, have triggered university administrators and campus leftists into seeing the postings as outbursts of dangerous racism,” reports The Daily Caller. Indeed, the mere affirmation that it’s okay to be the skin color you were born with is now condemned by the deranged Left as a form of hatred all by itself.

“HLS [Harvard Law School] will not let that happen here. We live, work, teach, and learn together in a community that is stronger, better, and deeper because of our diversity and because we encourage open, respectful, and constructive discourse,” Harvard Law School dean Marcia L. Sells wrote in a letter to students, apparently oblivious to the obscene contradiction in her own words. To the Left, you see, “diversity” is contingent on the exclusion of whites.

Truly, to the Left, white people are incapable of being diverse, meaning the Left judges people solely by the color of their skin rather than the content of their character.

 


According to Leftists, White People Cannot be “Diverse” in Any Meaningful Way

As proof of this, Apple’s “vice president of diversity and inclusion” Denise Young Smith was recently forced to resign after daring to proclaim that white people can be diverse. “During a summit in Colombia, Young Smith, a black woman, claimed she likes to focus ‘on everyone’ and that ‘diversity goes beyond race, gender, and sexual orientation.'” reports Breitbart News.

For daring to suggest that diversity is more than skin deep, Smith was forced to profusely apologize to everyone. “I’m sorry,” she said. “More importantly, I want to assure you Apple’s view and our dedication to diversity has not change.” Weeks later, she was forced to resign.

This is precisely how the Left has earned the nickname “libtards.” To such libtards, diversity is exactly skin deep, and any person with white skin has no standing whatsoever. In other words, the Left has become a deranged cabal of intolerant, dangerous racist totalitarians.

Their self-deluded tyranny is so off the charts that they now declare people to be unworthy of participating in civil society based solely on the color of their skin - a physical trait that we’re born with, just like biological sex.



Related: Lawmaker Calls For Federal Investigation Of Seth Rich Murder + Liberal Media In Panic! Latest #FakeNews
Accuses Kim Dotcom Of Hacking Into Seth Rich’s Gmail - Kim DotCom Responds

An Apple spokesperson underscored the lunacy of the Left’s spiraling intolerance by saying, “We deeply believe that diversity drives innovation,” proclaiming that people should be hired based on whether they are gay, or transgender, or black rather than based on the quality of their ideas and work.

This, again, is now a key tenant of the deranged Left: That the worth of a human being is no longer measured by their ideas or contributions. Rather, their entire worth as a human being is now graded solely on how gay they are, how transgender they are, how Muslim they are, or how much the pigment in their skin diverges from whiteness.

The Left has reached the depths of insanity and intolerance, and yet they keep on digging deeper. Having once condemned racist white people for judging blacks by the color of their skin, the lunatic Left has now institutionalized the “correctness” of judging people solely on the color of their skin or their commitment to LGBT values.

This, to any rational person, is absolute proof that the Left has become a racist totalitarian regime of insane lunatics and crybullies who are desperately seeking power and control over everyone else.


Action Item: Reject the Left’s Shallow Stupidity, Intolerance, Hatred and Racism

The takeaway from all this? It’s time for all rational people to reject the Left’s skin-deep stupidity, intolerance, hatred and racism. Amazingly, it’s time to call for the Left to stop being intolerant bullies and racists.

This means speaking out against left-wing insanity at every opportunity. Some other actions you can take to help restore sanity across our society include:

Stop using left-wing tech services like Google and Facebook

Review your own behavior and make sure you are judging people solely by their character, ideas and ethics

Vote against Democrats at every election, as they are now universally running on a platform of hatred and intolerance

Stop watching left-wing Hollywood movies, TV shows and hate-filled comedians such as Jimmy Kimmel

Speak out against schools and universities that teach false anti-science myths (transgenderism) to children

Stop purchasing products and brands from companies that donate money to left-wing groups that spew hatred and intolerance


Delusional Left-wing Definitions:

Finally, understand the real terminology of the Left so you can decode their linguistic nonsense.

“Inclusiveness” means advancing the LGBT agenda while insulting straight white men and Christians.

“Tolerance” means agreeing with the Left while calling for the murder of those who oppose your ideas.

“Diversity” means a room full of people with different skin color who all obediently agree on the exact same liberal ideas.

“Equality” means allowing biological male athletes who claim to be women to beat up actual biological women in Mixed Martial Arts competitions.

“Cooperation” means silencing those who refuse to cooperate with your agenda.

“Coexistence” means getting along nicely with those who obediently conform to your beliefs.


Or, better yet, as I previously mentioned in a Natural News post that describes the philosophy of the Left:

HATRED is tolerance

CONFORMITY is diversity

CONSENSUS is fact






Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

'Rulers', 'Foolers', & 'Shooters': They're Closing The Cage In Plain Sight
May 14 2018 | From: Zerohedge

A picture that has been around a while depicts Homo sapiens society at its finest... as it truly is.



There are four “tiers,” so to speak, with the politicians, royalty, and rulers occupying the uppermost level, followed by the clergymen and religious swamis on tier two, and then the gendarmes/police/soldiers on tier three.

Related: Are Elite Controllers A Fantasy? Read This

The bottom tier is occupied by the people, supporting the other three tiers upon their back. The caption is “We rule you [Leaders], we fool you [Religious Heads], we shoot you [the “Enforcer” class].

These “tiers” are to be found in every nation, among every people and tongue. It is not a new concept: these three levels of nabobs have existed ever since man formed social communities that encompassed more than the nuclear family.



Related: Deep State? What About Elite Television News Anchors?

The difference between the past and now: for the first time, these tiers will soon be interconnected regardless of location and mutually supportive of one another to obtain global totalitarian rule.

They already have so much in place, as outlined in previous articles: cell phones for most of the populations that transmit user location along with biometrics (in the latest models), interconnected CCTV (Closed Circuit Television) cameras that coordinate and fix your position with the phones, and a record of all that you buy or sell at a POS (Point of Sale) in the happy big-box stores.

They have laws to make you pay taxes on income, property, and they will come to seize your property and/or you if you don’t pay it…with force.

The laws are increasing in number, tightening the corral around you in your daily life…controlling where you can live, what type of home you can build, how you can communicate on the Internet, how you conduct business. Every business has a corresponding government inspector or regulator.

The death of cash is coming soon, as governments replace it with EFT (Electronic Funds Transfer) completely: they will then be able to keep track of every dime you earn or spend, keep track of what they can tax you (overt theft) and what they can pilfer (covert theft, in the case of an electronic “glitch,” a “matter of national security,” or some other nonsensical operation).



Related: Globalists Unite: Elites Target Trump, Nationalism At Davos

Many people do not realize the depth…the lengths these people are going to in order to achieve global totalitarian rule over all mankind. Recently Bill Gates announced a decision to invest with corporations to place 500 satellites in orbit to be able to monitor every inch of the globe in real-time surveillance.

Last week he announced his intentions to develop a “super vaccine” in order to “safeguard” the health of the planet from an outbreak that could kill tens of millions of people.

There is one “biggie” that must be “taken care of” before all this control can be finalized: They must first confiscate all firearms.

The most recent news headlines show their intent to do just that. Let’s take it by “category” of the three tiers:


1. Rulers:

The United States’ very own Representative Eric Swalwell, (D-CA) is the one representing the first big push toward totalitarian takeover via gun seizures.

On Thursday, 5/3/18, Swalwell (as reported by NBC News on an interview with Swalwell by USA Today) proposed a complete ban of what he describes as “military-style semiautomatic assault weapons,” along with a government “buy-back” of these rifles…and pursuit of those who refuse it.



Related: Nobel Prize Winner: Trump Has Launched A Nationalist “Revolution” Against the Elite + Ex-CIA Agent:
Deep State ‘Terrified’ Of Trump, ‘Want Him Taken Out’


Swalwell describes this last part as “criminally prosecute any who choose to defy [the buyback] by keeping their weapons.” Swalwell cited the Australian mandatory gun buyback laws and as an example used the “unprompted” walkout and demonstrations of Parkland High School students after that school’s shooting. Here’s what Swalwell had to say:


"There’s something new and different about the surviving Parkland high schoolers’ demands.  They dismiss the moral equivalence we’ve made for far too long regarding the Second Amendment. 

I’ve been guilty of it myself, telling constituents and reporters that ‘we can protect the Second Amendment and protect lives.’  The right to live is supreme over any other.  Australia got it right.”


2. Foolers: 

On Sunday, 5/6/18, the Pope came out and said that all firearms must be confiscated and taken away, and that the only firearms must be in the hands of the UN (United Nations). 

This is not a new thought, as it was John F. Kennedy who proposed a ban of all nuclear weapons and firearms, with the UN “peacekeepers” being the only ones who retained any weapons. 



Related: Eleven Whistleblowers Who’ve Shared Information The Global Elite Don’t Want You To Know

That “clarion call” has been echoed by the UN Small Arms Treaty (the one that Bolton…current Secretary of State…refused to sign when he was UN ambassador under Bush Jr.).  Sure, many may try to disregard what the Pope is saying…but you can’t completely discount anyone who has a billion people under his dominion, spiritually and economically.


3. Shooters: 

There are two excellent articles for your perusal written by John W. Whitehead of the Rutherford Institute. One of them isentitled Armed and Dangerous: If Police Don’t Have to Protect the Public, What Good Are They? on 2/28/18. The other more recent article of 5/2/18 is entitled Dial T for Tyranny: While America Feuds, the Police State Shifts Into High Gear.

In “tier 1” of the “Rulers,” we have a sitting Representative of Congress who openly advocates bypassing the 2nd Amendment of the Constitution of the United States by banning a specific type of rifle; he also proposes the governmental “buying” of those semiautomatic rifles.

It would do well here to remember the words of Alexis DeTocqueville in “Democracy in America,” [para.] “The end of the Republic [America] will come when the government can buy the people with their own money.”

 Then(so-called) Representative Swalwell suggested the government follow (in the event weapons owners do not submit) a violation of due process, as well as the supreme law of the land to illegally confiscate any weapons not submitted under a proposed government buyback…a clear violation of the 2nd Amendment.

It runs deeper, as we can see how the “Parkland Students” cited as an example by Swalwell are the new mantra, the new paradigm to enforce social consciousness and supplant Constitutional law with the law of the mob…the “tyranny of the majority” (a phrase of DeTocqueville) inflicting its wishes.



Related: Brave New World And Individual Power & How The Elite Dominate The World: They Buy Politicians, And
Incumbents Almost Always Win


Then there’s the “Australia got it right” grammatical eyesore of Swalwell’s populist jargon, a phony attempt to appear “grass roots” and an average guy…jargon that also pushes the “groupthink” (Australia’s doing it, why shouldn’t we?) so necessary to obtain global governance.

In “tier 2” we have a Marxist who is the leader of one of the world’s largest religions openly calling for a confiscation of the guns, with only the UN holding them. As mentioned, this guy has more than a billion people under his control, and he’s clearly in the “pocket” of those moving toward global governance.

Standard Alinsky principle in “Rules for Radicals” is “organizing the organized.” His loyal followers will follow his lead. Don’t worry: Protestants, Jews, Mormons, and all the others are also “subjected” to the same playbook, perhaps not under one “figurehead” but with their own “Master of Puppets” enforcing their submittal to his/her authority and then compliance with outside directives of the governments.

In “tier 3,” when you read these articles, you will come to see how there is no more “Officer Friendly.” The police are duty-bound to protect the taxpaying corporate entities, businesses, and politico-oligarchy, and nothing more. They are our jailers, not our protectors.

They ensure the continuity of the establishment: the existing social, political, religious, and economic order of things, nothing more. Those who mistakenly believe in the law (as police officers) will eventually be marginalized and drummed out of the force.



Related: The Large Families That Rule The World

Recently it was reported in Austin, TX that trainees/police cadets were informed by their instructors that the public are nothing more than cockroaches. In truth, the public pays for their funding…and they are under governmental control and direction: to obtain ad valorem for the municipal and state coffers while keeping the beeves moving, “tagging” the strays with tickets for the quotas and ensuring the docility of the herd.

The rulers, “foolers,” and shooters are tightening their grasp by the day, aided by the ever-increasing technology that allows for more surveillance and control, along with the stultified and complacent mentality of the public.

There is a conspiracy, but it is not a theory: it is a fact. It is no longer a hidden agenda, but openly being pursued in plain sight.
  The goal is global governance and the complete abrogation of all rights. We’re seeing it today, and it becomes worse with the passage of time.


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Financial Fraud: Easy Money Corrupts The Monetary System
May 13 2018 | From: FinalWakeUpCall / Various

Virtual Money: “Money” is virtual, a mental concept, an accounting system. Our currency is like a coupon, in other words, money is a medium of exchange. The Central Banking Cartel creates it out of thin air, as a debt to itself, something our government could do interest and debt-free.



But our governments belongs to a small group of elites, not to us. The aim of the New World Order is to expand this racket into a global political, cultural and economic monopoly.

Related: 10 Biggest Corporations Make More Money Than Most Of World Combined

This is the real meaning of Communism. This is why our national, racial, religious and gender identities will always be under occult assault.

The government borrows money that in fact does not exist, lends it to an even greater evil, the treasury, sells the debt to the banks, which in turn lend out said imaginary money to the people, all the while creating an ever-increasing amount of debt for a currency that never existed in the first place. More and more promissory notes are created to make the richest richer and the poor poorer.

The freezing of the accounts in Greece is only a taste of what’s to come. Right now the highest levels of government and the banking system are locked in a desperate last stand against a disturbing monetary shock, one that will make what’s happening in Greece seem mild by comparison.

And it could disrupt people’s lives in ways you never thought possible. You will suddenly be locked out of your bank account, unable to withdraw cash or deposit a check. Your stocks will swing wildly out of control. Your government-controlled payments will stop.



Related: The Next Move To Steal Your Money: A Plan To Rip-Off Your Wealth

Remember: media disinformation serves the interests of global banks and institutional speculators, which use their command over the financial and commodity markets to amass vast amounts of monetary wealth. The corporate establishment, including the speculators, controls the corridors of governments.

Meanwhile, the “bank bailouts”, presented to the public as a requisite for economic recovery, have facilitated and legitimised a further process of appropriation of people’s wealth.

Vast amounts of monetary wealth are acquired through market manipulation and deceit.

With inside-information and foreknowledge, major financial actors, using the instruments of speculative trade, have the ability to fiddle and rig market movements to their advantage, precipitate the collapse of a competitor, or even the system itself, and wreak havoc in the economies and societies of developing countries.



Related: The Bankers’ Scam - The Power Of Money: Beat The Bankers Through Debt Termination & Commonwealth Bank Of Australia: One Of The Largest Banks In The World Just Accused Of Laundering Millions For Drug Cartels

Take the Greek’s valuable lessons to heart, and let other people know that the upcoming crash will cause the world to descend into chaos, as planned by the RK Mafia, to rob people blind and bring them to their knees so that they will accept the New World Order without any revolt.

It is the long time phenomenon, their well-orchestrated Problem – Reaction – Solution.



Since it is very likely that things may get out of control even for the RK Mafia, you had better use the coming few months for the preparation of your survival.


Governments Can Seize Your Property Without Having to Convict You of a Crime:

Governments are trying to abolish cash. Leading economists are pushing for it to be banned, too. Limits on cash use are already in place in many countries.

Having a large amount of cash is already considered “suspicious,” subject to forfeiture without due process – thanks to civil forfeiture laws, governments can seize your property without having to convict you of a crime.


"Mandrel Stuart, a 35-year-old African American owner of a small barbecue restaurant in Staunton, Va., was stunned when police took $17,550 from him during a stop in 2012 for a minor traffic violation on the Interstate 66 in Fairfax. He rejected a settlement with the government for half of his money and demanded a jury trial.

He eventually got his money back but lost his business because he didn’t have the cash to pay his overheads. – “I paid taxes on that money. I worked for that money,” Stuart said. “Why should I give them my money?”



Related: The Fraudulent Monetary System & The Occult Meanings Of Mortgage: Why A Mortgage Is A Pledge To The Dead

As the Washington Post reported here last year, police have made 61,998 cash seizures – totalling $2.5 billion since 9/11 – without search warrants or indictments.

Why do governments want to eliminate cash? Isn’t it obvious? They want to control you and your money. Where did you get it? They’ll want to know everything. What will you do with it?

They’ll want a say. Could you not be planning to use it for something “bad”? – You might support “terrorists” – evade taxes – or buy a pack of illegal cigarettes. The possibilities are too vast to ignore. And the arguments are too persuasive to stop the Witch Hunt.



Easy Money Corrupts the Monetary System:

The system is corrupt and dangerously dysfunctional. But why does no one say anything? Central Bankers have, since the 1980s, been fighting credit corrections – being themselves the originators of the credit bubbles.



Related: The Khazarian Bankster Cult That Hijacked The World & Worthless Pieces Of Paper - Interest On Fake Money Is Confiscating Your Freedom

And for the last six years, the Central Bankers have been so actively and aggressively defending the past that the future doesn’t have a chance. Their easy money has corrupted the entire system. So, there can never be a true recovery of the economy.

Zero Hedge summarizes the “pros”: Enhance the tax base, as most, if not all transactions in the economy can now be traced by the government. – Substantially constrain the parallel economy, particularly in illicit activities. Force people to squander their savings on consumption and/or convert them into investments, thereby providing a boost to GDP and employment!



The United Nations Agenda 21 Program:

The Archon bloodlines want us to accept their Agenda 21 program. Unfortunately for the people of the world, so far everything is going according to the New World Order Plan.

But what is this New World Order Plan?



Related: Six Issues That Are Agenda 21 & Myth Busters: Introducing Agenda 2030

Agenda 21 is so-called as it is the ‘the agenda for the 21st century’ and that constitutes global fascism/communism. Here is a summary of what Agenda 21 includes: ‘Sustainable’ development – don’t use more than can be replaced – sounds sensible enough at first, until it is realised what this and ‘biodiversity’ really means in the context of the conspiracy.

As, ‘Sustainable Development’ and ‘Biodiversity’ is seeking to impose the following:

Termination of national sovereignty

State planning and management of all land resources, ecosystems, deserts, forest, mountains, oceans, and fresh water; agriculture; rural development; biotechnology; and ensuring ‘equality’ e.: equal enslavement

The State defines the role of business and financial resources
Abolition of private property – as it is not ‘sustainable’

‘Restructuring’ the family unit

Children raised by the State

Telling people what their job will be and where to live

Major restrictions on the movement of people

Creation of ‘human settlement zones’

Mass resettlement as people are forced to vacate their land; homes, where they currently live

Dumbing down education-form – achieved, in effect.

Mass global depopulation in pursuit of all of the above.


Agenda 21, the term coined already over two hundred years ago – implies the goal for the completion phase lies in this century.

The secret plan of the New World Order is to reduce the world’s population to a “sustainable” level “in perpetual balance with nature” by a ruthless Population Control Agenda via Population and Reproduction Control.

A Mass Culling of the People is accomplished via Planned Parenthood, toxic adulteration of water and food supplies, the release of weaponised, man-made viruses – like AIDS, EBOLA, etc. – man-made pandemics, mass vaccination programs and the planned Third World War.



Related: The Truth About Money Is Out & Austerity In 8 Minutes: Why It Does Not Work, Why It Is Still Practised

Then, Agenda 21 will impose upon the drastically reduced world population, a global feudal-fascist state with ‘one’ World Government, World Religion, World Army, World Central Bank, World Currency and a micro-chipped population for optimal control.

In short, they plan to kill 90% of the world’s population in order to control all aspects of human life and thus rule over everyone, everywhere from the cradle to the grave.

WAKE UP PEOPLE – Research everything while we can still join forces to overthrow these Criminal Mafioso that control every government in the world, as all are governed by corrupt politicians, most, if not all them being RKM bought puppets. They have literally sold their souls to the devil and they know they won’t survive if they don’t obey RKM orders.

Not only the monetary system, but also the whole geopolitical system is corrupted. We will very soon have no freedom anymore, unless we wake up and join forces. We are currently enslaved through the tax system through our birth certificates. People have become assets to exploit and earn money off of.



Related: The Vatican Is A Criminal Hornets’ Nest

Our tax money is deposited in the RKM controlled Vatican bank. Things are getting worse by the day. The point of no return is rapidly approaching and soon it will be too late. We have only very little time left to come to our own defence by waking up and joining forces.

If you do nothing you deserve what you’re going to get.


The Truth About Our Civilisation and You:

This video clearly explains in a nutshell how deeply we, the people are caught up in the network that has been continuously functioning since the year1860. In this system you are not whom you think you are, because a legal person owns his DNA, but at birth your DNA was stolen.

Our oppressors created from every person a corporation with his name in Capital letters, that’s why your name on all official documents is written in capital letters, which does NOT represent the physical you. Check your driver’s licence for confirmation. Only a birth certificate supported by its DNA is evidently a person or citizen.



Related: The Secretive Bank Of England - Controlling The World's Money Supply + Banking Data Dump

The Crown in the City of London backs all these corporations, which in reality represents the Vatican. Meanwhile countless Lawyers worldwide are working on the reclamation of DNA, as soon as more progress is made it will be published, as it is in everyone’s interest to break-up the diabolical system in which we live.

By owning your DNA, they own you, your money, your property; they can create a bank holiday to steal your money, as it is not yours as a person, but theirs as the owner of the company that bears your name in CAPITAL letters! You are living under Admiralty Law, you neither have natural rights, nor Civil Rights. YOU ARE A SLAVE!

After controlling the monetary system, and stealing your civil rights, other Archon bloodline (RKM) Agenda 21 implementations are nearing completion, such as the total control of the food supply, weather, water, pharmaceuticals, energy, in order to render people in dire economic straits with no way out.

And so it has come to pass that the unelected EU government in 2013 proposed, rubberstamped and implemented new laws, making it illegal to grow your own food, reproduce or trade any ‘untested’ vegetables, awaiting approval by the Orwellian ‘EU Plant Variety Agency’, which charges a fee for each registration – ever-increasing payments for our food and for our own prison.



Related: Cashless Society: China’s KFC Introduces Facial Recognition Payment System

The ‘Plant Reproduction Material Law’ will make home gardening with non-regulated seeds a criminal act. This law will stop the professional development of vegetable varieties for home gardening, organic growers, and small-market farmers.

All these new laws do, is to create a whole new raft of EU civil servants who will be paid to move mountains of paper around all day long, while killing off the seed supply to home gardeners and interfering with the right of farmers to grow what they want.

It is also very disturbing that they have given themselves the power to regulate and license any plant species of all sorts in the future – not just agricultural plants, but grasses, mosses, flowers, absolutely everything – without having to bring it back to the Council to vote.


The Global Fascist / Communist Structure:

This is all connected to the plan to ban the population from growing their own food, destroy seed-diversity and allow the Archon food and biotech corporations to monopolise the global food supply – ‘Growing food can hereby be banned by simply stating that it isn’t safe, and then big RKM corporations would control all the food production of the entire planet.’



Related: Gun Control Is Not About Safety - It Is About The Deep State Fascists Controlling The Dumbed-Down Public

The global fascist/communist structure would subsequently decide what you should eat and if you are permitted to eat; and what you eat would invariably be full of chemical cocktails beyond anything consumed today to control the masses mentally, emotionally and physically.

The water supply would also be drugged so that people would end up ‘loving their servitude’ as Aldous Huxley wrote in his book the Brave New World.

If you ate, would depend on whether you were a good little mindless slave or not. No acquiescence, no food, and no water – the supply and distribution of food would be monitored so that no-one could give food to a fugitive of the system, as Dr Day put it in his lecture in 1969.

A terrible future prospect for all of us, but – for not too long – the power is still with the people if only we would come together in mutual support and if only international publicity and response to this would steadily lead to opposing and rejecting these horrible laws relating to growing our own food.

The bloodline families are terrified that the people will unite, that’s why ‘dividing and conquering us’ is their top priority.



Related: How To Stay Rich In Europe: Inherit Money For 700 Years

It’s important to understand the reasoning of our Archon bloodline tyrants. They have no empathy, no compassion – they are narcissistic, psychopathic, sociopaths. They have falsely invented the global warming scam– with the climate change narrative as their argument to depopulate, to cull the world’s populace from seven billion at present to 500 million by 2050.

Dr Richard Day, the Rockefeller insider and weather manipulator during WW2, said in 1969: The weather will be modified and used as a weapon of war to create drought or famine.’

Producing record-breaking snow in the mountains and constant heavy rains to flood the Missouri and the Mississippi is easy with the technology at the Archon bloodlines’ disposal – especially HAARP, in Alaska and various other locations worldwide, that transmits high-powered radio waves to the upper atmosphere, the ionosphere, heating it up and eventually bouncing back to earth.


Ken O’Keefe Exposes Jesuits, World Bankers, Illuminati, Reptilians, Freemasons:






Related Articles:


The Secret Symbol That Stops You From Counterfeiting Money

Paper Money, the bridge between economics and politics

Train ticket chipped in your hand

Hawaii Becomes First U.S. State To Go Cashless For Marijuana Sales


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

New Study Provides Further Evidence Of Low IQ In Children Due To Fluoride Exposure
May 13 2018 | From: ActivistPost / Various

A new study has found that prenatal exposure to fluoride may contribute to lower IQ in children, the latest in a number of studies indicating health and cognitive issues as a result of fluoride exposure.



On September 19, the journal Environmental Health Perspectives published the study “Prenatal Fluoride Exposure and Cognitive Outcomes in Children at 4 and 6–12 Years of Age in Mexico,” examining the results of prenatal exposure to fluoride and the potential health concerns.

Related: Children's IQ Could Be Lowered By Mothers Drinking Tap Water While Pregnant

The researchers called the study “one of the first and largest longitudinal epidemiological studies to exist that either address the association of early life exposure to fluoride to childhood intelligence or study the association of fluoride and cognition using individual biomarker of fluoride exposure.” The study was funded in part by the U.S. National Institutes of Health.

The research team studied participants from Mexico’s Early Life Exposures in Mexico to Environmental Toxicants (ELEMENT) project by measuring the amount of fluoride present in the mothers’ urine during pregnancy and again when their children were 6 to 12 years old. 

The researchers found that higher prenatal fluoride exposure was associated with lower scores on tests for cognitive function at age four and between ages six and twelve. The researchers acknowledge that their results are “somewhat consistent” with past ecological studies which indicate children living in areas of high fluoride exposure have lower IQ scores than those in low-exposure areas.

“Our findings, combined with evidence from existing animal and human studies, reinforce the need for additional research on potential adverse effects of fluoride, particularly in pregnant women and children, and to ensure that the benefits of population-level fluoride supplementation outweigh any potential risks,” the researchers write.



Related: Report Reveals Fluoridation Researchers Misled Media, Public, and Decision-makers

Dr. Leonardo Trasande, a pediatrician who studies potential links between environmental exposures and health problems at New York University Langone Health, told Newsweek the study was “well-conducted” and “raises serious concerns about fluoride supplementation in water.”

The Fluoride Action Network, an advocacy group focused on promoting an end to fluoridation, noted that the researchers made efforts to control for a range of variables that could skew the results, including socioeconomic status, smoking, alcohol use, and health problems during pregnancy.

FAN also noted that the fluoride levels ingested by the Mexican mothers “was about the same as that in women in the USA.” More specifically, the organization notes that “the higher levels were similar to what is found in areas in the USA with fluoridated water, and the lower levels were similar to what is found in most unfluoridated parts of the USA.”  Mexico does not have a water fluoridation program, but instead adds fluoride to table salt.

However, despite the new study and its provocative conclusions, the American Dental Association continues to ignore a growing body of evidence indicating the health dangers of fluoride. After looking at the study, the ADA “concludes the findings are not applicable to the U.S.



Related: Lawsuit Could End Water Fluoridation Once And For All By Demonstrating Its Neurotoxicity

The ADA continues to endorse fluoridation of public water as the most effective public health measure to prevent tooth decay.” Consumers should note that exposure to fluoride via dental cleaning is vastly different from exposure via water fluoridation.


What is Fluoride?

The substances added to municipal water supplies known by the name fluoride are actually a combination of unpurified byproducts of phosphate mining, namely hydrofluorosilicic acid, sodium fluorosilicate, and sodium fluoride. In the United States thousands of tons of fluorosilicic acid is recovered from phosphoric acid plants and then used for water fluoridation. During this process the fluoride ion is created.

This process of taking waste from the phosphate industry and putting it into drinking water has long been criticized for its effects on human health and the environment. It is well known that water fluoridation has led to dental fluorosis for millions of children. This discoloring of the teeth was called “cosmetically objectionable” by the Centers for Disease Control.

Beyond the cosmetic effect there have been several studies indicating overwhelming health issues related to fluoride, especially for children. Another recent study found a connection between exposure to water fluoridated at relatively low concentrations and a reduced IQ among children.



Related: Fluoride Officially Classified As A Neurotoxin In World’s Top Medical Journals & Former EPA Senior Scientist Confirms Fluoride Lowers Children’s IQ

A study published in the journal General Dentistry warns that infants are at risk of dental fluorosis due to overexposure from fluoride in commercially available infant foods. The researchers analyzed 360 different samples of 20 different foods ranging from fruits and vegetables, chicken, turkey, beef, and vegetarian dinners.

Chicken products had the highest concentrations of fluoride, followed by turkey. The New York State Coalition Opposed to Fluoridation (NYSCOF) reports that the fluoride levels were due to pesticides, fertilizers, soil, groundwater, and/or fluoridated water. The high levels found in the chicken and turkey can be attributed to “fluoride-saturated bone dust” involved in the process of mechanically separating the meat.

Another study published in Environmental Health found a potential connection between fluoride exposure and the prevalence of adult attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) in children.

The researchers studied data on ADHD among children age four to seventeen collected in 2003, 2007 and 2011 as part of the National Survey of Children’s Health, as well as state water fluoridation data from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) collected between 1992 and 2008 .

It is the first study to analyze the relationship between exposure to fluoridated water and ADHD prevalence.

The team discovered that children living in areas with a majority of the population receiving fluoridated water from public water systems “tended to have a greater proportion of children and adolescents diagnosed with ADHD. ” The researchers concluded that:


“This study has empirically demonstrated an association between more widespread exposure to fluoridated water and increased ADHD prevalence in U.S. children and adolescents, even after controlling for socioeconomic status (SES). The findings suggest that fluoridated water may be an environmental risk factor for ADHD.

Previous studies have  shown rats exposed to fluoride chemicals also exhibit ADHD-like symptoms.



Related: New Zealand Government Preparing To Drown Whole Country In Fluorides + New Zealand Grants Human Rights To River

In addition to these studies related to fluoride and children, dozens of other studies have indicated a variety of health problems. A recent study published in the Journal of Analytical Chemistry indicates that fluoride ions found in fluoridated water and toothpaste may lead to an increase in Urinary Stone Disease (USD).

The study was conducted by chemists from Russia and Australia, led by Pavel Nesterenko at the University of Tasmania. The team studied 20 urinary stones from patients at a Russian hospital and discovered fluoride ions in 80% of the stones. This could be due to high levels of fluoride in patients’ urine, possibly from drinking water containing fluorides and ingesting fluoride toothpaste.

A study published in the BMJ’s Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health confirmed fluoride’s negative effect on the thyroid gland and a possible connection to depression, weight gain, and other negative health effects. Researchers with the University of Kent in England examined thyroid activity for those in areas with fluoridated water and those without.

The team examined 95 percent of the English population in 2012 and 2013 and found that high rates of underactive thyroid were 30% more likely in areas with high fluoride concentration. An underactive thyroid can lead to depression, weight gain, fatigue and aching muscles.

On top of that, a 2016 study from Ohio’s Case Western Reserve University School of Medicine also found a connection between water fluoridation and type 2 diabetes.



Related: Fluoride Action Network: A Report From New Zealand

The reasons for opposing water fluoridation include: fear of a variety of health concerns; the belief that it is force to medicate the population without their approval; financial waste; and environmental concerns related to phosphate mines where the chemical is found.

Whatever reason you choose for standing against fluoride, it is abundantly clear that fluoride is an outdated, dangerous process that should cease immediately.



Fluoride Causes Cancer - Dr Dean Burk Ph.D

"In point of fact, fluoride causes more human cancer death, and causes it faster than any other chemical."

- Dean Burk - Congressional Record 21 July 1976


"They (ACS) lie like scoundrels."

- Dean Burk, Ph.D., 34 years at the National Cancer Institute.


- Dr Dean Burk National Cancer Institute says his Fluoride study links to increase cancer risk - "When you have power you don't have to tell the truth. That's a rule that's been working in this world for generations. And there are a great many people who don't tell the truth when they are in power in administrative positions."

- Dr. Dean Burk former head of National Cancer Institute Research







Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Vatican Has Paid Nearly $4 Billion To Settle For Children Harmed By Sexual Abuse
May 12 2018 | From: CollectiveEvolution

The reality of child molestation by the Roman Catholic Church has surfaced time and time again, and yet, somehow, it continues to happen.



If you watched the movie Spotlight, perhaps you have an idea of just how things are going down. But let’s break it down to date.

Related: Another Huge Vatican Linked Pedophile Ring Has Been Exposed

While you can’t put a price on the innocence of a child, you can put a price on just how much the Roman Catholic Church has paid out in lawsuits over the never-ending epidemic of child molestation wreaking havoc in its ranks.

According to Jack and Diane Ruhl of the National Catholic Reporter, who decided to research this particular topic, since 1950, the Vatican has spent a disgusting $3,994,797,060.10. That’s nearly $4 billion to keep things hush hush.

That number may even be a bit conservative, as we cannot know for sure the agreed upon “under the table” amount. 

The figure is based on a three-month investigation of data, which includes a review of over 7,800 articles from LexisNexis Academic and NCR databases and information from BishopAccountability.org. Reports from the U.S. Conference of Catholic Bishops were also used. 




Reality Check: How Prevalent is the Global Child Sex Trade in the U.S.?





If the amount of money dished out was divided evenly amongst the U.S.’s 197 dioceses, each one would get almost $20 million.  An incredible amount of cash from hard working people who support the good faith and intentions of the Church - people who are parents to little boys being sexually abused - is being used to cover up unfathomable crimes executed by priests.

In the early nineties, a monk who worked at the Vatican opened up to The New Yorker, admitting: “You wouldn’t believe the amounts of money the church is spending to settle these priestly sexual-abuse cases.”

By 1992, U.S. Catholic dioceses had given 400 million dollars to settle hundreds of molestation cases. That was a shocking chunk of change then, and that figure has only risen exponentially since.

The men running the Vatican are well aware of the problem, and yet they refuse to provide justice.

When Pope Francis addressed hundreds of bishops on the issue, he said:


"I realize how much the pain of recent years has weighed upon you, and I have supported your generous commitment to bring healing to victims - in the knowledge that in healing we too are healed - and to work to ensure that such crimes will never be repeated.
."

His words of “generous commitment” only further show just how tightly knit the Church truly is - worried more about reputation than morality.

“The people he was talking to are the people who moved the pedophiles around to prey on kids,” said John Salveson, a 59-year-old Philadelphia businessman who was abused as a child by a priest. “If you gave me 100 years to pick a word to describe the U.S. bishops’ reaction to this crisis, ‘generous’ would never make the list.”


Related Articles:

Facebook apologizes for search suggestions of child pornography videos

Actor Corey Feldman confronts N.Y. senators opposed to passage of the Child Victims Act at state Capitol

Elite-Backed Cult Leader Keith Raniere Arrested for Sex Trafficking

Corey Feldman stabbed by knife-wielding thug in frenzied attempted murder attack

Clinton-Linked Cult Leader Who Hot-Branded Women Arrested For Sex Trafficking

ITNJ Pedophilia Commission Roll-Out - Judicial Commission of Inquiry into Human Trafficking and Child Sex Abuse

ITNJ: Lithuanian Government Elite Pedophile Scandal

Australian Pedophile Judges - The Noose Tightens

FB Asks Users If It Should Allow Pedophiles to Ask Kids for Sexual Pictures

Why Is Jeffrey Epstein Pedophilia Master Spending $29 Million to Fill in Tunnels under the Temple on Lolita Island?

Parkland False Flag Pedophilia Deep State Anon Bread Crumbs Baking Nicely

Founder of One of the Largest Children’s Charities in the World, Arrested for Pedophilia

PedoGate Indictment Unsealed - 73% Of Suspected Child Trafficking Reports Involved Backpage And The Trump Administration Shut Them Down

Secret Underground Tunnel Network Linking Pizzagate Properties Discovered

Police Raid Multiple Catholic Church Properties in Sweeping Child Sex Abuse Scandal

NXIVM: The Powerful Cult That Turns Rich Women Into Mind Controlled Slaves

Sex cult partied on Richard Branson’s private island

NXIVM is also a *child* sex-trafficking cult

Hollywood Sex Cult Linked To Rothschilds, Clintons


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

An Encouraging Look Forward
May 11 2018 | From: ThriveMovement

Like anyone with their eyes open, I recognize the dangerously heated divide among people throughout our country and the world.



I appreciate the high levels of engagement, and at the same time find the lack of open dialogue across worldview, and the outside provocateurs, to be unfortunate components of the recent activism. Nonetheless, I am encouraged by much of what I see happening in the world, and given my awareness of so much of the corruption, I wanted to explain why I feel optimistic.

Related: Part 3: 8 Signs That The Global Elite's Ship Is Sinking + The Bilderberg's Website Hacked By Anonymous: "We Will Watch You"

As people who have seen Thrive or follow Thrive Movement know, I am committed to following assumptions and money upstream, analyzing actions (not rhetoric) and assessing events through a lens of principles, not politics.

In THRIVE we laid out how the U.S. was at risk of being subsumed by a globalist agenda, with individual sovereignty and personal accountability both being annihilated in the name of one-world governance and control.



I continue to watch government land grabs for Agenda 21/2030, ramped up efforts to control the Internet, the move toward Bail-In legislation and the further authorization of the FBI to break into any computer anywhere, and more - all promoted by a media that is more than ever a megaphone for the globalists, the primary promulgators of “fake news.”

So my optimism is not naive or absolute.


Through the Lens of The Global Domination Agenda (GDA)

I suggest the quickest path to find some sense of inner peace about the controversial Trump administration is to acknowledge and look through the lens we revealed in THRIVE - that a small, elite international cadre of sociopaths is hell-bent on creating a New World Order - a One World Totalitarian State with them in charge. Comment: President Trump is WELL aware if the situation.

The “GDA” has been using the government takeover of Healthcare, Education, the TPP, NAFTA, WTO, the Fed, false flag imperialist wars, unlimited immigration, mandatory vaccines and flu shots, the destruction of the economy, suppression of free energy, promotion of Agenda 21/30, Global warming and global carbon tax, the UN front for a global state with the NATO enforcement arm, the consolidation of dishonest mainstream media fronting for the globalists and much more, to create the conditions to seduce us into their New World Order, one world government, totalitarian police state.

For all his crass, ego-filled tweets and rants, his undermining of women’s right to choose what happens with their own bodies, his support of fracking and nuclear and coal, his inclusion of Goldman Sachs reps and neocons in his cabinet as well his lack of unifying principles for his policies, Donald Trump is nonetheless the only person I know of who could have both been elected and then gone directly after virtually all of the corrupt and lethal deceptions (listed above) upon which the Global Domination Agenda is built and depends.

Comment: There are strategies underway that are something other than what they appear to be. Some things that appear to be negative, are part of a process of change for the better.

Amidst all the divided and conquered hatred and vitriol, this guy has just in his first month confirmed his support for auditing the Fed, busted up the Big Pharma monopoly on U.S. government health insurance drugs, called out the bias and lies of the mainstream news and taken steps to counter toxic vaccines and to eliminate what was poised to be a mandatory vaccine policy nation-wide.



He has cancelled the Trans-Pacific Partnership and seems to be listening to people whose experience he has elicited.

There is increasing evidence that Trump, along with Xi Xinping and Putin, is a dealmaker and not a warmonger - actually looking for ways to strengthen America from the inside out, as opposed to the political tyrants and imperialists that have waged non-stop wars of aggression from Johnson through Obama.


Setting Down the Sabres

And there is real and increasing evidence that the world is waking up. Superpower world war has been avoided in Ukraine, in the South China seas and in Iran.

The same powers that manipulated the U.S. taxpayer to support imperialist wars in Iraq, Afghanistan, Sudan, Libya and Yemen are finally being neutralized.



Syria is stabilizing as the U.S. shadow government war monster has been called out with the whole world watching. This could have been a proxy standoff with both Russia and China that could have easily led to nuclear confrontation and holocaust.

The unfunded death-web of obligations that is NATO - which started out as an alliance of protection against the threat of communism - has become a tool of Western imperialism that obligates all members to participate in any war that is claimed to threaten any of them.



With such a structure, a single false flag or set of propaganda lies could trigger the use of countless missile bases that the U.S. shadow government has been installing around Russia and China.

Here, too, I see Trump helping to weaken the stranglehold of the GDA by unpacking some of the real motives and dismantling many of the risky structures.


International Finance Moving Toward Reality

Another source of optimism is in the international arena where, on the financial side, the BRICS countries (Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South Africa) - especially China - are skillfully and patiently orchestrating a non-violent move toward asset-backed financial systems on a worldwide scale.



Globalist and Trilateral Commission co-founder (with David Rockefeller) Zbigniew Brzezinski, in handbook for world empire, The Grand Chessboard, described the greatest threat to Western dominance to be the possibility of an emerging alliance in the East that would draw in other countries.

Now it is happening, and the emergence of a multi-polar world, based on trade instead of conquest, is a profound move toward peace.

Gold, silver and other commodity backing are moving free market transactions to a real, accountable and common sense basis. This move, along with Bitcoin and other peer-to-peer transactions, undermines the whole basis for globalist, central banking power - the fraudulent and counterfeit monopoly on printing money with no basis in real value.

This means fiat, debt-based money is going away and that fractional reserve lending will decrease and ultimately disappear. Gold exchanges will be for real minerals, not inflated paper supposedly owned by many entities simultaneously. Deals are being done between nations at the multi-billion dollar level through gold rather than the illusionary petrodollar.

The war on cash, intended to create a global cashless society with total financial control in the grips of the bankers, is ramping up, but is also being exposed by alternative media and obsoleted by alternative currencies.

The Asia Infrastructure Investment Bank was launched with $200 billion in gold backing - and countries all over the globe are joining in, despite the U.S.’s attempts to discourage them from participating in this alternative to the IMF and the World Bank.

The Dragon Alliance of Asia is willing to share its vast gold resources with the West to erase the unpayable debts and reboot the global financial system in a healthy manner - if only the so-called “leaders” from the West are willing to cooperate with the rest of the world rather than try to continue to cheat and dominate it.

I am told by representatives of the Asian Dragon Alliance, that, whereas the Obama administration as puppets for the Rockefeller/Rothchild cabal blocked this offer at every turn, Donald Trump is reportedly aligned with potentially the biggest and most important deal in human history. We are watching this closely.

Related: What’s Happening Outside Keenan’s Reach - The Illegal Casinos Are Closing Down


The Sword of Truth Cutting Away the B.S.

The desperate attempt by the would-be controllers to censor and suppress dissident opinions and information, and especially to cover up their agenda for global domination and the international pedophilia rings which are used as a control mechanism to scare and steer their puppets in positions of power, are finally coming to light.



Drumming up the term “fake news” (replacing the no longer credible smear of “conspiracy theory”) is blowing up in the face of the would-be dominators as it brings to light the countless ways they have been creating their own fake news propaganda to manipulate our behavior.

Readership and profits of the Washington Post and New York Times have plunged into the red as the masses turn to alternative media for any semblance of what the heck is really going on.

The desperation is blatant when the control cabal has to send self-admitted liar-before-congress James Clapper back to congress to tout Internet censorship, and to counter Trump’s calling out of the “blame the election on Russia” ruse.

The attempts to censor and shut down truth-tellers like Alex Jones, Mike Adams and Ben Swann show the desperation of the would-be controllers to keep the truth about conspiracies, banking schemes, toxic pharmaceuticals, pseudo-foods, and pedophilia from coming to light. But it won’t work.



Major exposés of pedophile rings among so-called “leaders” are happening in England, the Netherlands, Indonesia, Canada and are even beginning in the U.S. with “Pizza-gate,” Los Angeles and others.

Exposing their role in pedophilia provides an understandable and acceptable basis on which vast numbers of the psychopathic controllers are being and will continue to be arrested and taken out of positions of power.



Pivot Toward Sovereignty

We are seeing a dramatic global turn by awakening people away from the corrupt rule of increasingly centralized power. It is expressing itself in Brexit, the Trump election, the probable Frexit in France (and we will be seeing more in Europe).

Many do not know what to turn toward, because they do not yet recognize that it is the State itself that creates, condones and constructs the tyranny of the few over everyone else. But even without realizing this, the arc is toward increasing sovereignty.



It’s a turn away from globalism toward nationalism and toward localism that will, if allowed, continue until it finds the true unit of human wholeness - which is the individual, not the abstraction of “the group.”

Meticulously honoring the intrinsic rights of the individual is what leads to true, voluntary community - which in fact best honors the needs of most people.



World-Changing Technology

Kimberly and I are privileged to have met and vetted numerous geniuses with authentic and historic breakthroughs in health, energy, justice, environment, agriculture, economics and more.

There is a tragic war on holistic doctors that has taken out more than 60 of them in the last year and a half - especially those working on effective natural treatments for cancer and exposing the autism / vaccine connection.

This lethal battle is being waged in virtually every Sector, but that too is being exposed and skilled, principled professionals are focusing their efforts on protecting those who are bringing whole system breakthroughs to humanity.



Related: Introduction / Overview: The ‘Healing Computer’ Technology

Many of our best healers are in hiding offshore after attempts on their lives, but we are working diligently with others now to create safe, legal systems and models to bring their offerings out.

As the corrupt exoskeleton of the would-be controllers is crumbling, that will be accelerating. As it is, around the world, and finally even in the U.S., awareness and resistance are emerging on GMOs, glyphosates and chemtrails. Monsanto stock is plunging.



End of Empire

We are seeing not only the end of the American Empire but arguably of the whole concept of Empire.



The Clintons, Bushes, Rockefellers and Rothschilds as well as the likes of Kissinger, Cheney, Blair, Sarkozy and Brzezinski are being exposed, some having to limit their travel and fearing their own arrests and incarceration for a myriad of crimes and abuses.


Freedom Rising - Light at the End of the Statist Rabbit Hole


Perhaps most importantly of all, an understanding of the distinctions, history and potential of true liberty and the Non-Aggression Principle is blossoming all over the world. For example, Stefan Molyneux, arguably history’s most advanced philosopher, had over 100 million downloads and views of in-depth material through his website in 2016.

Even the so-called “alt right”, many of whom are still mired in the dogmas of religion and nationalism, but are otherwise devoted to anti-globalism, free speech, free but accountable markets, honest banks and individual sovereignty, is having a vast effect on hundreds of millions of young people worldwide and has a strong influence on the incoming U.S. presidential administration.



Many on both sides of the political divide are feeling shaken and embarrassed by the brazen, anti-free speech violence perpetrated by so-called Antifa and black bloc elements - especially at U.S. universities as happened with the Milo Yiannopoulos event in Berkeley - the birthplace of the free speech movement!

In Brazil, fast growing organizations among the youth are waking others up - through protests, education and clever social media campaigns - to the fact that socialism is dangerous - NOT cool, but protecting equal rights for everyone is what will work.

More and more signs are appearing among the young at protests saying “Less Marx, More Mises!”

Acknowledging some of the significant good that I see Trump doing is not a blanket endorsement of his policies. I see a host of unprincipled violations in addition to the ones mentioned above: ignoring Israel’s treatment of Palestine, allowing water-threatening pipelines without sufficient safeguards, proposing “taking” Iraq’s oil, etc. (Releasing free energy tech will obsolete the whole issue of invading countries to take their oil.)

However, for me, the key to separating out his ethical actions from his immoral policies is the compass of the Non-Aggression Principle - not partisan politics.
Comment: Again, Trump is making strategic moves in sequence.


Turning the Light on Secret Societies

More international good news: Secret societies are getting exposed - including the Council on Foreign Relations, Trilateral Commission, Bilderberg group, Roundtable, Royal Institute of international Affairs, Opus Dei, the Masons, Jesuits, Knights Templar, Parushim, Skull and Bones and on and on.



People are waking up to why these powerful societies have to be secretive - that domination of human lives requires covert means, sexual exploitation and fraudulent accumulation of wealth and power.

The light of truth, through the Internet and alternative media, is beginning to cleanse this scourge on humanity and protect countless lives both young and old.

I believe we have dodged a major bullet this election cycle with the still emerging rise of Socialism duping a caring but gullible and uninformed youth movement - seduced once again with the same false promise of free stuff - healthcare, education, housing, welfare etc.- that led thousands into tyranny, torture, starvation, murder, and wars in the Soviet Union, Germany, China, Vietnam, Cambodia, Chile, Argentina, Venezuela and many more.

Fortunately, I could go on and on about all of the signs that I am seeing that the life force is breaking through the concrete of oppression, speaking truth to power and lifting the veils of illusion that have kept human beings willingly voting for and paying their slave masters for centuries.

This is going to be a year like no other. We could see free energy released, the waters decontaminated and coral reefs beginning to be restored, extraterrestrial contact disclosed, the Fed audited, the mainstream media held to account for their lies, financial systems restored to honest voluntary exchange, a surge in jobs and prosperity, humanitarian projects funded worldwide, cures for cancer, AIDS, ALS, MS, chronic fatigue, Parkinson’s and more supported and unleashed…



Principles of Peace - Science of Love

The power of reason and truth and the evolution of consciousness are ultimately unstoppable. They are who we are, and I feel grounded in my confidence that in my lifetime I will see at least the tipping point toward a global civilization based on integrity, true freedom and unprecedented voluntary collaboration dissolving illusionary boundaries and limitations.

The human family is still deep in strife - but now with the capability to blow ourselves off the face of the Earth. We are having to learn the principles of peace - and they are centered in the Non-Aggression Principle and moving beyond the superstition of having to be ruled.

Sovereignty with accountability is the key to unleashing our suppressed creativity, aligning with natural forces and liberating the already existing solutions in every Sector of human behavior. This is the science of Love applied. This can manifest heaven on Earth - in our lifetimes.



We can look for deeper truths than propaganda and whose team should rule the rest of us. We can choose our loyalties based on eternal and universal natural principles, not on power politics.

This is what fills my outlook with light as I move forward into this new time.


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The Crown Of England Is Owned And Operated By The Vatican
May 10 2018 | From: OmniThought

The Vatican is one of the most powerful corporations in the world. It is powerful because it controls the Crown of England and nearly every church in the world, especially Catholic churches.



Furthermore, the Vatican operates under Roman law and controls most of the Western courts and some Eastern courts.

Related: The United States is Still a British Colony

In the USA today, nearly every U.S. court is controlled by the Crown Temple, a corporation controlled by the Vatican. This is why there is always a Crown agent in the courtroom during a trial. Any country that has Crown agents running its legal system is controlled by the Vatican / Rome to a large degree.

This means that the United States, Canada, United Kingdom, Australia, New Zealand, and “countries” that are operating under the Western legal system are all Roman “colonies”.

The Vatican is a religious corporation run by religious leaders who are loyal to the Roman Empire. In other words, Rome still rules the world! It rules the world through the Crown of England, the Roman Catholic Church and the Vatican.



Related: Pope Francis: Is He Obsessed With The Devil?

They did not call it the ROMAN Catholic Church for no reason. It is right in your face and hidden in plain sight!

According to an article published by BBC.com, there are an estimated 1.2 billion Roman Catholics in the world. This means that the Vatican/Rome has about 1.2 billion “citizens”, or more accurately slaves.

Because nearly every Christian church is controlled by the Vatican to a certain degree, the Vatican/Rome has more than 1.2 billion slaves to exploit and sell. Do you innerstand now why Rome still rules the world?



Related: The Top Of The Pyramid: The Rothschilds, The Vatican And The British Crown Rule World


The Crown is Owned and Operated by the Roman Cult, and Has Been Since 1213

The Definitive Treaty of Peace of 1783 says that King George was the Arch Treasurer and Prince Elector of the Holy Roman Empire and the United States of America.

This video goes through how the Roman Cult orchestrated the slave trade, then the War of Independence, then the War of 1812, then the Civil War, then WW1, WW2, and now they are building up to WW3 [which will not take place].

All warfare is commerce, and all commerce is warfare. All fictitious entities operate under Roman Law.

www.sovereigntyinternational.fyi | www.sovereigntyinternational.wordpress.com

Comment: As is often the case, these Christian researchers are very good at research - but you'll need to excuse the religious ranting...







Related: Articles:

What / Who Is "The Crown"?

7 Leadership Qualities We Can Learn From Julius Caesar

Timeline of the Great Fraud, by Judge Anna Von Reitz

U.S. Admiralty Courts Exist Because the United States is Under Martial Law

Subjects and Serfs of the Lesser Gods (Part I)


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Trump Foiled Soros’ Master Plan To Impose New World Order + Theresa May: Brexit Britain And Donald Trump Can Lead The World Together
May 10 2018 | From: Geopolitics / Express / Various

President Donald Trump came to power just in time to prevent billionaire George Soros and Bill and Hillary Clinton achieve a Trans Pacific free trade deal hidden from the public, Wall Street hedge fund manager and financial analyst Mitch Feierstein told Sputnik



“George Soros and Clinton Inc. were nearly able to declare ‘Mission Accomplished’ on their vision of establishing an opaque ‘New World Order’,” Feierstein, a hedge fund manager who has spent 38 years working in the New York, Tokyo and London global financial markets, said on Tuesday.

Related: Day One: Trump Devastates Decade-Old Globalist Agenda

Last Monday, Trump announced that he was scrapping the 12-nation Trans-Pacific Partnership (TPP) that his predecessor President Barack Obama had sought to complete during his eight years in office.


“Forget Soros’s New World Order for now because a new sheriff, Donald Trump, the 45th US President arrived on in Washington promising to drain the swamp. TPP is a now history and it will be interesting to see who is naked at low tide,” Feierstein noted.

The top-secret TPP free trade agreement was one of the worst trade deals ever crafted by Washington’s pay-to-play culture of corruption, Feierstein stated.





“How could any rational individual or sovereign be supportive of a secret ‘trade deal’ with zero transparency and legal language drafted by multi-national corporations?” he asked.


The TPP was deliberately crafted to ensure a form of “globalization” so that these same corporations who designed the “rules” could operate in the dark with total impunity while stripping member nations of their sovereignty and denying consumers of all their rights and protections, Feierstein explained
.





Related: Trump Has Been Planning His Whole Life To Take Down NWO


“TPP was Obama’s ‘Crown Jewel’ achievement after 35 years of failed neoliberalism funded by oligarchs for the benefit of oligarchies,” he observed.

Feierstein is a British-American investor, banker and writer who has worked as a columnist for the Daily Mail and currently works as a columnist for The Independent and the Huffington Post.

Related: Trump War On Fake Media: The ‘Default’ Position Is ‘You Are Lying’



Theresa May: Brexit Britain And Donald Trump Can Lead The World Together

Note: This article was written before the meeting took place but it is still relevant. The video of the press conference follows.



Brexit Britain and Donald Trump-led America can lead the world together

The Prime Minister is due to kick off a two-day visit to the US with an optimistic and heartfelt call for a renewal of the "special relationship" between the two nations.

Related: Theresa May: Donald Trump to make state visit to UK

She will use a speech to congressmen and women in Philadelphia to say that the firm transatlantic alliance that won two world wars is vital for "a new age".


“We have the opportunity to lead, together, again," the Prime Minister will say on Thursday.

Her speech to senior members of 's Republican Party comes ahead of her visit to the White House on Friday.

She will be the first national leader to hold a face-to-face meeting with the new president in what is being seen as a massive vote of confidence in the special relationship from the new administration.



Related: Ted Cruz to Alex Jones: Trump ‘The Start Of A New Era’

And Mr Trump is to show  the that has been returned to the Oval Office on his instructions in a symbol of his regard for Britain.

Speaking at the annual gathering of Republican congressmen and women, the Prime Minister will point out that Britain and the US are facing periods of drastic change following the Brexit vote and the election of President Trump.


“As we rediscover our confidence together – as you renew your nation just as we renew ours – we have the opportunity – indeed the responsibility – to renew the Special Relationship for this new age".

"We have the opportunity to lead, together, again,"
Mrs May will say.

“The United Kingdom is by instinct and history a great, global nation that recognises its responsibilities to the world."

“And as we end our membership of the European Union – as the British people voted with determination and quiet resolve to do last year – we have the opportunity to reassert our belief in a confident, sovereign and Global Britain, ready to build relationships with old friends and new allies alike."

She will add: “The leadership provided by our two countries through the Special Relationship has done more than win wars and overcome adversity. It made the modern world.

“The institutions upon which that world relies were so often conceived or inspired by our two nations working together."

“It is through our actions over many years, working together to defeat evil or to open up the world, that we have been able to fulfil the promise of those who first spoke of the special nature of the relationship between us - the promise of freedom, liberty and the rights of man.”

Mrs May and President Trump are expected to begin discussions on a new trade deal between Britain and the US following the UK's departure from the EU. Downing Street officials expect the pair to establish a "strong and productive working relationship" between the pair.

Mr Trump has already spoken of his desire to replicate the warm personal chemistry that his predecessor Ronald Regan enjoyed with Margaret Thatcher.

The two leaders will also discuss tackling the menace of the so-called Islamic State terror group in Syria and Iraq, strengthening security cooperation and the West's relations with Russian President Vladimir Putin.



Related: Putin’s Telephone Conversation with US President Donald Trump

Mrs May will fly to Washington tonight after her speech in Philadelphia. She is expected to visit Arlington Ceremony tomorrow to lay a wreath at the Tomb of the Unknown Soldier.

In the Commons yesterday, Mrs May said her visit just a week after the presidential inauguration showed how close the links between the two countries are. But she also vowed to speak "frankly" to the US President on areas of disagreement.


"I am pleased that I am able to meet President Trump so early in his Administration," Mrs May said at Prime Minister's Questions in the Commons.

"That is a sign of the strength of the special relationship between the United Kingdom and the United States of America - a special relationship on which he and I intend to build."

She added: "I am not afraid to speak frankly to a President of the United States."

"I am able to do that because we have that special relationship."

One area of disagreement could be over torture after the president yesterday signed an executive order allowing the return of so-called "black sites" for terrorist interrogation.

Critics claim the move could mean a return to the "rendition" to terrorist suspects carried out under former president George Bush in his "War on Terror".



Related: Nicole Kidman’s Reported “Bizarre Behavior”: How Mass Media Destroys Those Who Dare Not Follow its Agenda

In answer to a question about the issue raised by senior Tory Andrew Tyrie, the Prime Minister said: "Our position on torture is clear: we do not sanction torture and do not get involved in it. That will continue to be our position."



President Trump and PM May Joint Press Conference






Related: Trump Orders Pentagon to Defeat Daesh “Within 30 Days”



Vast Majority of Voters Say Trump Right: DC Establishment Screwing Americans

New poll shows citizens desperate to Make America Great Again.

Most US voters are in agreement with newly-inaugurated President Donald Trump’s contention that the Washington DC establishment benefits political insiders more than American citizens.

Related: Trump to Launch Investigation Into Voter Fraud

A recent poll from Rasmussen Reports says 72 percent of “likely US voters” agree with a remark the president made during his inaugural address, stating that;


"For too long, a small group in our nation’s capital has reaped the rewards of government while the people have borne the cost.”

The president’s speech outlining he would hand over more control of the government to the people continued:


"Washington flourished, but the people did not share in its wealth. Politicians prospered but the jobs left and the factories closed.”



Kellyanne Conway on How Trump Will Get the Economy Going




Related:
Trump: Promises Made, Promises Kept


"The establishment protected itself, but not the citizens of our country. Their victories have not been your victories. Their triumphs have not been your triumphs. And while they celebrated in our nation’s capital, there was little to celebrate for struggling families all across our land.”

While nearly three quarters of voters agree with Trump, the Rasmussen poll finds only 17 percent disagree and 11 percent are unsure.

Another Rasmussen poll released Tuesday found the president has a 57 percent approval rating, up from 52 percent last Thursday following a series of executive actions Trump signed fulfilling many of his campaign promises.

Related: Trump Leaving UN-NWO with HR193 American Sovereignty Restoration Act 2017




Trump To Hang Photo Of Inauguration Crowd In Front Of White House Reporters

A panoramic photo of Donald Trump’s inauguration crowd will hang in the West Wing, the president announced Tuesday afternoon on Twitter, where reporters skeptical of his “unbelievable, perhaps record-setting turnout” will see it every day.

Trump made no reference to the clash between his administration and the press corps over the weekend regarding the attendance at his inauguration, only writing that the photo was delivered yesterday and that it “will be displayed in the upper/lower press hall.”

Related: CNN Quietly Releases Updated Pic Showing Trump’s Inaugural Crowd Size Greater than Obama’s 2009 Inaugural Crowd

The upper press and lower press are specific areas in the West Wing where administration press and communications officials work and to which reporters have access.

The upper and lower press areas were also decorated with photos during President Barack Obama’s administration. Those photos were rotated somewhat regularly to reflect the president’s recent activities and in the administration’s final weeks included highlights of his eight years in office.



Related: Confirmed: More People, More Hotel Rooms Booked for Trump Inauguration than Either of Obama’s

The photo, posted to Twitter by Trump, incorrectly lists the date of his inauguration as Jan. 21, 2017, instead of Jan. 20. The Women’s March on Washington, believed to have drawn a significantly larger crowd than Trump’s inauguration, was held on Jan. 21.

Trump also thanked photographer Abbas Shirmohammadi, whose name and signature appears at the bottom of the photo.




Related Articles:

US Intelligence Finds No Evidence of Trump's Administration Ties to Russia

Trump To Release Secret DARPA Technology To The World

President Trump Dominates Anti-American Media

Here Is The List Of Donald Trump's "Priority" Infrastructure Projects

Dow Jones Industrial Average Hits 20,000 for First Time Ever!

Trump Meets with Heads of the Auto Makers Industry

Nationalism, Globalism, Empire, and the vision of self-sufficiency


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Are Elite Controllers A Fantasy? Read This
May 9 2018 | From: JonRappoport

We rarely get a chance to see a smoking gun that proves elite controllers are running the show from behind the curtain. That’s why there is a curtain.



So I’m republishing a conversation between two members of the Rockefeller Trilateral Commission (TC) and a US reporter.

Related: Combating The Elite Rulers Divide And Conquer Tactics

First, a bit of background:

In 1969, four years before birthing the TC with David Rockefeller, Zbigniew Brzezinski wrote:


“[The] nation state as a fundamental unit of man’s organized life has ceased to be the principal creative force.

International banks and multinational corporations are acting and planning in terms that are far in advance of the political concepts of the nation state.”

Goodbye, separate nations.

Any doubt on the question of TC goals is answered by David Rockefeller himself, the founder of the TC, in his Memoirs (2003):


“Some even believe we are part of a secret cabal working against the best interests of the United States, characterizing my family and me as ‘internationalists’ and of conspiring with others around the world to build a more integrated global political and economic structure—one world, if you will. If that is the charge, I stand guilty, and I am proud of it.”



Related: More Than Half Of Young Europeans Say They Would Join An “Uprising” Against The Elite: Europe’s Youth Don’t Care To Vote - But They’re Ready To Join A Mass Revolt

Who is in charge of destroying national economies, in order to create a new international order?

Who keeps pushing new economy-destroying trade treaties?

Who demands that these treaties must be ratified?

Who is in the business of killing jobs and hope?

Who demands that more US jobs disappear overseas and never come back?

The Trilateral Commission (TC).



Related: The Round Table: The Hub Of The CFR, Trilateral Commission, RIIA, Club Of Rome, Bilderberg Group And The UN

The original stated goal of the TC was to create “a new international economic order.”

Here is a stunning piece of forgotten history, a 1978 conversation between a US reporter and two members of the Trilateral Commission. (Source: “Trilateralism: The Trilateral Commission and Elite Planning for World Management”, ed. by Holly Sklar, 1980, South End Press, Pages 192-3).

The conversation was public knowledge at the time. Anyone who was anyone in Washington politics, in media, in think-tanks, had access to it. Understood its meaning.

But no one shouted from the rooftops. No one used the conversation to force a scandal. No one protested loudly.

The conversation revealed that the entire basis of the US Constitution had been torpedoed, that the people who were running US national policy (which includes trade treaties) were agents of an elite shadow group. No question about it.

And yet: official silence. Media silence. The Dept. of Justice made no moves, Congress undertook no serious inquiries, and the President, Jimmy Carter, issued no statements.



Related: 10 Signs The Global Elite Are Losing Control

Carter was himself an agent of the Trilateral Commission in the White House.

He had been plucked from obscurity by David Rockefeller, and through elite TC press connections, vaulted into the spotlight as a pre-eminent choice for the Presidency.

The 1978 conversation featured reporter, Jeremiah Novak, and two Trilateral Commission members, Karl Kaiser and Richard Cooper. The interview took up the issue of who exactly, during President Carter’s administration, was formulating US economic and political policy.

The careless and off-hand attitude of Trilateralists Kaiser and Cooper is astonishing. It’s as if they’re saying, “What we’re revealing is already out in the open, it’s too late to do anything about it, why are you so worked up, we’ve already won…”

Here we go:


Novak (the reporter): Is it true that a private [Trilateral committee] led by Henry Owen of the US and made up of [Trilateral] representatives of the US, UK, West Germany, Japan, France and the EEC is coordinating the economic and political policies of the Trilateral countries [which would include the US]?

Cooper:
Yes, they have met three times.

Novak: Yet, in your recent paper you state that this committee should remain informal because to formalize ‘this function might well prove offensive to some of the Trilateral and other countries which do not take part.’ Who are you afraid of?

Kaiser: Many countries in Europe would resent the dominant role that West Germany plays at these [Trilateral] meetings.

Cooper: Many people still live in a world of separate nations, and they would resent such coordination [of policy].

Novak: But this [Trilateral] committee is essential to your whole policy. How can you keep it a secret or fail to try to get popular support [for its decisions on how Trilateral member nations will conduct their economic and political policies]?

Cooper: Well, I guess it’s the press’ job to publicize it.

Novak: Yes, but why doesn’t President Carter come out with it and tell the American people that [US] economic and political power is being coordinated by a [Trilateral] committee made up of Henry Owen and six others? After all, if [US] policy is being made on a multinational level, the people should know.

Cooper: President Carter and Secretary of State Vance have constantly alluded to this in their speeches. [a lie]

Kaiser: It just hasn’t become an issue.

This interview slipped under the mainstream media radar, which is to say, it was buried.

US economic and political policy run by a committee of the Trilateral Commission - the Commission had been created in 1973 by David Rockefeller and his sidekick, Zbigniew Brzezinski.

When Carter won the presidential election, his aide, Hamilton Jordan, said that if after the inauguration, Cy Vance and Brzezinski came on board as secretary of state and national security adviser, “We’ve lost. And I’ll quit.” Lost - because both men were powerful members of the Trilateral Commission and their appointment to key positions would signal a surrender of White House control to the Commission.



Related: Pope Francis: World Government Must Rule U.S. ‘For Their Own Good’ & Pope Francis Declares He Fears Trump And Losing Control Of The New World Order

Vance and Brzezinski were appointed secretary of state and national security adviser, as Jordan feared. But he didn’t quit. He became Carter’s chief of staff.

Now consider the vast propaganda efforts of the past 40 years, on so many levels, to install the idea that all nations and peoples of the world are a single Collective.

From a very high level of political and economic power, this propaganda op has had the objective of grooming the population for a planet that is one coagulated mass, run and managed by one force. A central engine of that force is the Trilateral Commission.

How does a shadowy group like the TC accomplish its goal?

One basic strategy is: destabilize nations; ruin their economies; ratify trade treaties that effectively send millions and millions of manufacturing jobs off to places where virtual slave labor does the work; adding insult to injury, export the cheap products of those slave-factories back to the nations who lost the jobs and undercut their domestic manufacturers, forcing them to close their doors and fire still more employees.

Related:
More Confessions Of An Economic Hit Man: "This Time, They’re Coming For Your Democracy"



Related: How A Secretive Elite Created The EU To Build A World Government

And then solve that economic chaos by bringing order.

What kind of order?

Eventually, one planet, with national borders erased, under one management system, with a planned global economy, “to restore stability,” “for the good of all, for lasting harmony.”

If you were a young ambitious reporter for The New York Times, if you read this astonishing Trilateral interview, wouldn’t you go to your editor and demand to be put on the story?

Wouldn’t you want to dig deep and find out more details and names? Wouldn’t you want to blow the whole, yes, conspiracy, wide open? Wouldn’t you want readers to know the truth about who is running their country from behind the scenes?



Related: The Power Elite’s Plans For You

Well, yes, you might. But if you did, and if you wouldn’t back down after your editor told you to forget about it, you would end up with no job, and eventually you would be covering picnics for some small-town newspaper.

With the rise of independent media, however, reporters don’t need to worry about Sunday picnics.

The truth suffices.

With the rise of independent media, reporters know some of their stories will be linked and forwarded all over the world, and people with curiosity and intelligence and alert minds will discover the truth that major media have been hiding from them.

Hiding, for decades.

Related: Pulitzer Prize-Winning CNN Journalist Busted For Fabricating Fake News, Resigns From CNN + Google Gestapo Goes Full Nazi Against Independent Media - Hiding “Controversial Content” And “Redirecting” Searches


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Digging In The Dirt Makes You Happy - Here’s Why
May 9 2018 | From: WakeUpWorld

“It came to me while picking beans, the secret of happiness. I was hunting among the spiraling vines that envelop my teepees of pole beans, lifting the dark-green leaves to find handfuls of pods, long and green, firm and furred with tender fuzz. I snapped them off where they hung in slender twosomes, bit into one, and tasted nothing but August…” - from Braiding Sweetgrass: Indigenous Wisdom, Scientific Knowledge and the Teachings of Plants




For anyone who has spent time cultivating a garden - vegetable, landscaping with ornamentals or a bit of both - there’s no question about it’s mood-boosting quality.

Related: Magnesium found to treat depression better than antidepressant drugs: New science

Even a potted plant or two can have an uplifting effect. During my most bleak times in dealing with depression and bone-crushing fatigue, the simple act of caring for an outdoor plant by watering and plucking the dead bits has had a near miraculous effect, with a tangible boost in energy and overall brighter outlook.

Whether this shift is attributed to the fresh air, slowing down to appreciate a bit of greenery or nurturing another living thing, the entire experience tends to border on the mysterious. Whatever the reason, one aspect is clear: gardening is strong medicine.


The Power of Soil-Based Organisms for Health and Happiness

Science has shown time and again that spending time in nature - along with playing in the dirt and gardening - has a powerful impact on our physiological and psychological health.

Over the last decade, researchers have explored why soil microbes improve the nutritional value of our food and why rural children - like those who live on farms - are far healthier than their city-dwelling counterparts.



Related: Ten Ways To Easily Boost Your Serotonin Levels And Live A Happier Life

Clean air, water, and fresh produce aside, one of the main factors for the health of farm-living kids boils down to soil microbes.

As it turns out, these microbes help develop healthy human immune systems. Not only that, but soil organisms can boost our production of serotonin - a feel-good neurotransmitter that keeps anxiety and depression at bay.

Writes Daphne Miller in The Curious Case of the Antidepressant, Anti-Anxiety Backyard Garden:


"[Jill] Litt, a professor at the University of Colorado School of Public Health, was studying gardening’s impact on a variety of health outcomes - including mood disorders.

She rattled off a list of possible explanations, including that gardens create community, encourage physical activity, offer a bounty of nutrient-rich food, and expose one to Vitamin D-producing sunshine, which helps regulate serotonin, the “happiness” neurotransmitter.

But then Litt surprised me by adding, “Also there are the microbes themselves. We have no idea what they are doing.”’

It all began with a study where British researchers were testing to see if Mycobacterium vaccae - a benign microbe found in soil and water, along with unwashed vegetables - could help treat lung cancer in humans. While the life expectancy of the participants wasn’t affected, those who received the microbe reported enhanced mood and quality of life.



Related: Natural Health Special + What Is the Natural Allopathic Protocol Useful For? & Why Whole Foods Are Always Better Than Nutritional Supplements

The torch was then taken up by Chris Lowry, a behavioral endocrinologist at the University of Colorado, Boulder. His research team found that rodents who were injected with heat-killed M.vaccae exhibited less depression and anxiety - and had more endurance - during a forced swim test.

The control mice paddled on average for two and a half minutes, while the M. vaccae-injected animals swam for four. It’s already been established that antidepressants increase active swimming and decrease immobility. Interestingly, the soil organism “had the exact same effect as antidepressant drugs,” explained Lowry.

The researchers believe that an immune reaction to the microbe activates the release of brain serotonin. Low levels of this important neurotransmitter are linked with a range of disorders, including aggression, anxiety, depression, obsessive compulsive disorder (OCD), bipolar disorder, irritable bowel and fibromyalgia.

The results so far suggest that simply inhaling M. vaccae - you get a dose just by taking a walk in the wild or rooting around in the garden - could help elicit a jolly state of mind. “You can also ingest mycobacteria either through water sources or through eating plants- lettuce that you pick from the garden, or carrots,” Lowry says.



Related: Research Reveals Plants Can Think, Choose & Remember

Graham Rook, an immunologist at University College, London and coauthor of the paper, points out that depression may partly be an inflammatory disorder. By triggering immune cells that diminish the inflammatory response to allergens, M. vaccae could actually ease inflammation and, in turn, depression.

Further studies on M. vaccae’s mood-boosting properties followed, one of which by Susan Jenks and Dorothy Mathews of Sage Colleges in Troy, New York. The team cultured the live organism and fed it to mice with Wonderbread and peanut butter.


"It was just amazing,” said Jenks about a stressful maze test used for the rodents. “We would place them in the maze and could clearly see that there were some mice doing better than others.

We would think: ‘Is that the M. vaccae [mouse]?’ And sure enough it was.” She adds, “What our research suggests is that eating, touching, and breathing a soil organism may be tied to the development of our immune system and our nervous system.”

The takeaway from all this? If you struggle with depression or immune disregulation, gardening without gloves and spending time in nature may be just what the doctor ordered. Or, as Danielle Mariott writes in a piece for Backcountry magazine, “Get outside, get in the dirt, get happy.”

Related: Ninth Grade Girls Show Plants Won’t Grow Near Wi-Fi Routers


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Why Mainstream Economists Don't See Recessions Coming
May 8 2018 | From: Mises

In his article released on March 21 2018 - Economics failed us before the global crisis – Martin Wolf the economics editor of The Financial Times expressed some misgivings about macroeconomics.



"Economics is, like medicine (and unlike, say, cosmology), a practical discipline. Its goal is to make the world a better place. This is particularly true of macroeconomics, which was invented by John Maynard Keynes in response to the Great Depression. The tests of this discipline are whether its adepts understand what might go wrong in the economy and how to put it right. When the financial crisis that hit in 2007 caught the profession almost completely unawares, it failed the first of these tests. It did better on the second. Nevertheless, it needs rebuilding."

Related: More Confessions Of An Economic Hit Man: "This Time, They’re Coming For Your Democracy"

Martin Wolf argues that a situation could emerge when the economy might end up in self-reinforcing bad states. In this possibility, it is vital to respond to crises forcefully.

It seems that regardless of our understanding of the key causes behind the crises authorities should always administer strong fiscal and monetary policies holds Martin Wolf. On this way of thinking, strong fiscal and monetary policies somehow will fix things.


“A big question is not only whether we know how to respond to a crisis, but whether we did so. In his contribution, the Nobel laureate Paul Krugman argues, to my mind persuasively, that the basic Keynesian remedies - a strong fiscal and monetary response - remain right.
"

While agreeing with Krugman, Martin Wolf holds the view that, we remain ignorant to how economies work. Having expressed this, curiously Martin Wolf still holds the view that Keynesian policies could help during an economic crisis.

For Martin Wolf as for most mainstream economists the Keynesian remedy is always viewed with positive benefits - if in doubt just push more money and boost government spending to resolve any possible economic crisis.

It did not occur to our writer that without understanding the causes of a crisis, administering Keynesian remedies could make things much worse.

The proponents for strong government outlays and easy money policy when the economy falls into a crisis hold that stronger outlays by the government coupled with increases in money supply will strengthen monetary flow and this in turn will strengthen the economy. What is the reason behind this way of thinking?



Related: Keynes Must Die

In this way of thinking, economic activity is presented in terms of the circular flow of money. Spending by one individual becomes a part of the earnings of another individual, and spending by another individual becomes a part of the first individual's earnings.

So if for some reason people have become less confident about the future and have decided to reduce their spending this is going to weaken the circular flow of money. Once an individual spends less, this worsens the situation of some other individual, who in turn also cuts his spending.

Following this logic, in order to prevent a recession from getting out of hand, the government and the central bank should step in and lift government outlays and monetary pumping, thereby filling the shortfall in the private sector spending.

Once the circular monetary flow is re-established, things should go back to normal and sound economic growth is re-established, so it is held.


The Problem with the Mainstream View

Given that the government is not itself a wealth generator, this means that whenever it raises its outlays it also lifts the pace of the wealth diversion from the wealth-generating private sector. Hence the more the government plans to spend the more wealth it is going to take from wealth generators.



Related: The World’s Best Economist

By diverting real wealth towards various non-productive activities, the increase in government outlays in fact undermines the process of wealth generation and weakens the economy’s growth rate over time.

The whole idea that the government can grow an economy originates from the Keynesian multiplier. On this way of thinking an increase in government outlays gives rise to the economy’s output by a multiple of the initial government increase.

Let us examine the effect of an increase in the government's spending on an economy's overall output. Can such an increase give rise to more output as popular wisdom has it?

On the contrary, it will impoverish producers. By means of taxation or other means such as borrowings, Government forces producers to part with their products for Government services i.e. for goods and services that are likely to be on a lower priority list of producers and this in turn weakens the production of wealth.

As one can see, not only does the increase in government outlays fail to raise overall output by a positive multiple, but on the contrary this leads to the weakening in the process of wealth generation in general.



Related: Democracy Is A Front For Central Bank Rule & Financial Starvation In A Fiat Debt Slavery Financial System

According to Mises;


“…there is need to emphasize the truism that a government can spend or invest only what it takes away from its citizens and that its additional spending and investment curtails the citizens' spending and investment to the full extent of its quantity.
"

For most commentators including Martin Wolf, the occurrence of a recession is due to unexpected events such as shocks that push the economy away from a trajectory of stable economic growth. Shocks weaken the economy i.e. cause lower economic growth so it is held.


The True Cause of Recessions

Following the Austrian Economics School of thinking - which Martin Wolf seems to ignore -  as a rule a recession emerges in response to a decline in the growth rate of money supply.

Usually this takes place in response to a tighter stance of the central bank. Various activities that sprang up on the back of the previous strong money growth rate (usually because of previous loose central bank monetary policy) come under pressure.

These activities cannot support themselves - they survive because of the support that the increase in money supply provides.



Related: The Fundamental Flaw Of ‘Mainstream Economics’

The increase in money diverts to them real wealth from wealth generating activities. Consequently, this weakens these activities. That is, it weakens the the wealth-generating activities.

A tighter stance and a consequent fall in the growth rate of money undermines various nonproductive activities and this is what recession is all about.

Given that, nonproductive activities cannot support themselves since they are not profitable, once the growth rate of money supply declines, these activities begin to deteriorate. (A fall in the money growth rate means that nonproductive activities access to various resources is curtailed).


“Recession then is not about a weakening in economic activity as such but about the liquidations of various nonproductive activities that sprang up on the back of increases in money supply..
"

Obviously then both aggressive fiscal and monetary policies, which will provide support to nonproductive activities, will re-start the weakening process of real wealth generation thereby weakening the prospects for a meaningful economic recovery.

It is for this reason that economists from the Austrian School such as Ludwig von Mises and Murray Rothbard held that once an economy falls into a recession the government and the central bank should restrain themselves and do, as soon as possible, nothing.

Contrary to Martin Wolf, during an economic crisis what is required for the government and the central bank is to do as little as possible. With less tampering, the more real wealth remains with wealth generators, which allows them to facilitate a further expansion in the pool of real wealth.



Related: Financial Feudalism & The Economics Of Control

With a larger pool of wealth, it will be much easier to absorb various unemployed resources and eliminate the crisis. Aggressive monetary and fiscal policies will only hurt the process of wealth generation thereby making things much worse.

As long as the pool of real wealth is still growing, the government and the central bank could get away with the illusion that they can grow the economy.

Once the pool starts to stagnate or decline the illusion of government and central bank policies is shattered.

The key reason why Keynesian economics fails to explain the occurrence of recessions is because it ignores the key factor behind this, which is the tampering policy of the government and the central bank.


Related Articles:

Babylonian Money Magic & How Modern "Commercial Law" Is Based On Ancient Babylonian Codes

$21 Trillion Of Unauthorized Spending By US Government Discovered By Economics Professor

Varoufakis’ Alert: Financialized Capital May Choose To Support Fascists + On The Need To Re-Boot The World Economy

The World Economy Explained With Just Two Cows

The Foul Stench Of Desperation + Whatever Became Of Economists And The American [Cabal Driven Global] Economy?

‘Limits To Growth’ Vindicated: World Headed Towards Economic, Environmental Collapse

Jeremy Corbyn threatens to make bankers 'servants of industry' in fresh attack on the City

Real Money: Economic law demands that the golden Dawn is upon us

DC Lawmaker Claims ‘Rothschilds Control the Federal Government’ & the World Bank

Switzerland Follows Iceland In Declaring War Against The Banksters

An Inside Look At Two "Unrelated" Banker Suicides Reveals A Fascinating Rabbit Hole


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Leaks, Fake News, And Hidden Agendas
May 7 2018 | From: JonRappoport

Thousands of articles have been written about the so-called Russian hack of the US election. The term “Russian hack” suggests the Russkies actually found a way to subvert the results of voting machines.



But of course, no convincing evidence has been presented to support such a charge. In fact, when you drill down a few inches below the surface, you find this charge instead: Russia hacked into email accounts and scooped up Hillary, DNC, and Podesta emails, and passed them to WikiLeaks, who then published them.

Related: Degeneracy And Fundamentalism Of Western Media Control & Truth In Media

No chain of evidence supporting this claim has been presented to the public, either. But even assuming the assertion is true, an important factor is intentionally being ignored: THE CONTENT OF THOSE LEAKED EMAILS.

In other words, if making all this content publicly available cost Hillary the election, and if no one is seriously questioning the authenticity of the emails, then THE TRUTH undermined Hillary. However, no major media outlet is reporting the story from that angle.

After all, how would this headline look? TRUE CONTENT OF LEAKED EMAILS SINKS HILLARY CLINTON. Or this? HILLARY COULDN’T REFUTE CONTENT OF LEAKED EMAILS AND SO SHE LOST THE ELECTION.

Those headlines would attract millions of clicks. Why weren’t they printed? Big news outlets didn’t want readers to think about the story from that perspective.

Why not? Why was the heavy emphasis put on the hacking of the emails? To obscure the importance of their content: for example, DNC collusion to obstruct and undermine the campaign of Bernie Sanders.



Related: FBI: Hillary’s “Shadow Government” Buried Email Scandal

“Let’s make the story all about WHO we claim stole the emails, rather than WHAT THE EMAILS CONTAINED.”

When a tape surfaced in which Trump spoke about women who were eager to have sex with famous men, did major media make the story all about who had the tape and who released it to the press? No.

Perhaps you remember this 2009 email-hack controversy. Wikipedia sums it up: “The Climatic Research Unit email controversy (also known as “Climategate”) began in November 2009 with the hacking of a server at the Climatic Research Unit (CRU) at the University of East Anglia (UEA) by an external attacker, copying thousands of emails and computer files, the Climatic Research Unit documents, to various internet locations several weeks before the Copenhagen Summit on climate change.”

One of the most revealing elements in the email exchanges: an obvious attempt to sideline scientific critics of global warming. But major media quickly began to reframe the story.

It was all about illegal hacking, and investigations were launched to determine the criminal. The contents of the emails were brushed off as “proprietary work product” and “misleading” because “context was missing.”



Related: Edward Snowden: Facebook Is A Surveillance Company Rebranded As "Social Media"

The case of Edward Snowden was somewhat different. There the media felt compelled to expose the CONTENT of the NSA documents Snowden stole. They also gave considerable space to Snowden himself.

To some degree, this was a fait accompli, because The Guardian newspaper was committed, from the beginning, to publishing NSA documents and an analysis of their meaning - so other media outlets followed suit.

Big news media decide whether to focus on the WHO or the WHAT, in each case. “Should we give primary coverage to the leaker or what he leaked?”

But that is not a choice you are making. It’s a choice being made for you.

Government agencies and spokespeople leak news to the press all the time. In these instances, of course, the press doesn’t turn around and launch a probe aimed at exposing the WHO and discovering WHY a particular tidbit was passed along for publication. Newspapers and television news departments simply run with the stories.

“Okay, Bob. Here’s a little gem for you. The White House and the Congress are cooperating on this one. In the next few days, a piece of legislation is going to be inserted into a current bill in the House. It’ll establish a working group to combat ‘fake news’ operations that confuse the public…”



Related: Six Ways To Break The Hypnotic Spell Of The Mainstream Media

Does Bob, the reporter, bite the hand that feeds him? Does he write a story accusing his source of trying to knock out independent news competitors who contradict official reality? Of course not. Bob plays along.

Sometimes, both the WHO and the WHAT are censored. Such was the case with CDC whistleblower, William Thompson, who confessed publicly, in August of 2014, that he and colleagues at the CDC committed fraud in a 2004 study of the MMR vaccine, by covering up the vaccine’s connection to autism.

Thompson admitted the study was cooked. The mainstream press put a chokehold on the story. Aside from scattered references, and official denials, the story faded quickly. The leaker and what he was leaking remained in the shadows. Independent news outlets (such as this one) kept the story percolating.

You can find examples of government actors spying on Trump - in these instances, the press decides to focus on the WHAT, the content gained from spying; and downplays the WHO, the people who green-lighted the surveillance.

There is no logic in the mainstream approach to leaks and leakers. The WHO and WHAT are decided on the basis of serving official interests and agendas - and repressing the public interest.



Related: The Surveillance State Is Creating New Meta-Crimes

The NSA, with its gargantuan reach into the lives of the population (including government officials), has enough content to keep the press busy for the next 50 years reporting leaks; but the NSA decides when, and for what reasons, to hold back what it knows. Or to leak bits and pieces through cut-outs.

A seasoned reporter, who obtains a leak from a trusted source, doesn’t ask pressing questions about exactly who the source is fronting for.

The leaks-game is played over and over, and the rules of the game are shifted, depending on unrevealed agendas. Who do we want to expose this time? Who do we want to come out looking like a winner? Who are our friends at the CIA supporting?

Editors are there to keep reporters in line and correct oversights. Not in so many words, an editor would let a reporter know: “You picked the wrong source this time, Bob. Your guy is telling a story we don’t want to promote. Find a different source with a better take, in line with our agenda to attack (fill in a name).”

That’s what the editor means. But he might simply say: “Bob, that source of yours…I don’t trust him anymore. I’ve been hearing odd things about him. Don’t use him for this piece.” The reporter gets the message.



Related: Life And Death In The Fake News Business & What Is Public Relations? How To Run A Public Relations
Campaign Based On The Truth

This technique of casual ad hominem criticism and rumor even extends to the realm of science. In 1987, a prestigious molecular biologist, Peter Duesberg, “leaked” what many virologists privately knew: the evidence for HIV as the cause of AIDS was full of gaping holes. Duesberg published a paper in the journal, Cancer Research, exposing the con.

Overnight, a whisper-campaign against Duesberg spread through the research community. “We always knew Duesberg was an odd duck. He likes publicity. He hates authority. He runs his mouth off. He doesn’t care about evidence. He’ll take a contrary position just to stand out.”

The game of leaks, sources, and fake news takes many shapes.

Welcome to mainstream news.


Related Articles:

Media Outlets Slam Facebook’s Plan to Act as Gatekeeper of ‘Trustworthy’ News

Fake News and the Programmed Viewer

The Mandate To Overthrow Mainstream News


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Thousands Of Israeli Protesters Call For Benjamin Netanyahu To Step Down
May 7 2018 | From: TheAntiMedia / RT

Israeli protesters gathered in Tel Aviv in February to urge Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu to resign after police recommended he be charged with bribery in two corruption cases.



Police announced that enough evidence had been found for Netanyahu to be charged, saddling the four-term premier with one of the biggest challenges to his long dominance of Israeli politics.

Related: Abby Martin Interview Critical of Israel is Blocked by YouTube in 28 Countries

Netanyahu, 68, denies wrongdoing in both cases and has said nothing will come of the police investigations. It is now up to the attorney general to determine whether to press charges against him.

Around 1,000-2,000 protesters rallied in a Tel Aviv square, some with signs saying “crooks go home” and “crime minister.”


“We think the prime minister should immediately disqualify himself and resign,”
said Shlomit Bar, 63, a retired music teacher. “He cannot be any longer the prime minister of Israel.”

“From a moral standpoint, this is a disgrace to the state of Israel, where a prime minister is suspected of such serious crimes,” said Oren Simon, one of the protesters. “He should go home. Enough."



Related: Israeli Police Chiefs Recommend Indicting Netanyahu On Corruption Charges

poll published on Wednesday showed almost half of Israel’s electorate believe the police rather than Netanyahu.

Netanyahu is currently entangled in four political scandals: Case 1000 which involves allegations that the PM and his wife accepted illegal gifts from businessmen; Case 2000 which accuses Netanyahu of attempting to buy favorable newspaper coverage; Case 3000, also known as the “submarine scandal”; and Case 4000, in which a close associate of Netanyahu is suspected of providing confidential information to Israel’s largest telecoms company.

The prime minister’s wife, Sara Netanyahu, has also been accused of using public funds for private expenditure in the prime minister’s households. Only 20 per cent of respondents to the recent survey believe she is innocent.

It could be months before the attorney general makes a decision on whether to charge him.


Related Articles:

Israel’s Best Citizen Describes Israel

A Special Relationship Born in Hell: The United States should cut all ties with war criminal Israel

In Wake of Gaza Massacre, Israeli Leaders Should Be Prosecuted for War Crimes



‘Bibi Go Home!’ Israelis Demand Netanyahu Resignation Over Looming Corruption Charges.

Some 1,500 people have rallied in central Tel Aviv demanding the resignation of Benjamin Netanyahu over corruption allegations and a recent Israeli police recommendation that charges be brought against the Prime Minister.



The “Bibi Netanyahu go home” slogan once again united the Israeli crowd holding their weekly anti-government corruption protest in Tel Aviv.

Related: Israeli Teens Tell Netanyahu They Won’t Serve In IDF, Slam Occupation Of Palestine

Waving signs that read “Bibi, you are not above the law,”“Love Israel, separate from Netanyahu,” they chanted, “A mafia country and a corrupt Prime Minister.”

Earlier this month Israeli police recommended that Benjamin Netanyahu be indicted over allegations of bribery, fraud and breach of trust. Despite the pressure and daily calls to resign, Netanyahu maintains his innocence, further exacerbating the public anger.





"In the past, whenever there was an indictment recommendation with the police, politicians used to resign,”
one protester told RT’s Ruptly video agency. “It's very difficult to see Bibi resigning. He’s not the kind of [person] who resigns.”

“I came here to protest and to defend the democracy in Israel because it’s important that people will fight corruption wherever it is because the government here forgot that they need to serve us and not we need to serve them,” noted another activist present at the rally.

Police earlier announced that they gathered sufficient evidence to start legal proceedings against the premier in two separate probes – Case 1000 and Case 2000.



Related: Israel’s Takeover Of The Internet

Although the recommendations were submitted to the attorney general, it may take months before the decision is made.

Case 1000 alleges that Netanyahu, along with his wife Sara, received lavish gifts worth thousands of dollars from Hollywood producer Arnon Milchan and Australian billionaire James Packer, in exchange for favors.

The other probe revolves around suspicions of Netanyahu conspiring with the owner of the top-selling Israeli newspaper, Arnon Mozes, to get a more positive coverage of himself. The Prime Minister has repeatedly denied the allegations as “baseless.”


Related Articles:

Israel's Internet Censorship War

Philip Giraldi Explains that Criticism of Israel, Difficult Today, Will Soon Be Illegal

The Latest Act in Israel’s Iran Nuclear Disinformation Campaign


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

House Intel: No Evidence Trump Campaign Colluded With Russia
May 6 2018 | From: WashingtonTimes / Infowars

There is no evidence President Trump’s campaign colluded or conspired with the Russian government during the 2016 election, but both his team and the Clinton campaign had “poor judgment and ill-considered actions,” the House intelligence committee concluded in a recent report.



The report dings Mr. Trump’s family for making an attempt during the 2016 Trump Tower meeting with a Russian lawyer to try to get damaging information on Hillary Clinton, but says that was ultimately unsuccessful.

Related: Russiaphobia Is Out Of Control

And the report blames the anti-Trump attitude among the GOP establishment in 2015 and 2016 with forcing the campaign to turn to less accomplished and more questionable foreign policy advisers George Papadopoulos and Carter Page - both of whom became subjects of FBI investigations over their relationship with Russian entities.

But there is no evidence of successful conspiracy or collusion, the panel concludes.


"When asked directly, none of the interviewed witnesses provided evidence of collusion, coordination, or conspiracy between the Trump campaign and the Russian government,”
the report says.

Mr. Trump saw vindication.


House Votes To End Trump Russia Probe



Related Articles:

Group of Wealthy Donors Paid $50 Million to Fund Trump-Russia Investigation

Selected Articles: Racism, Russophobia and the Western Media

Congressman Louie Gohmert: Robert Mueller is a Dead Man Walking - Easily Indictable for High Crimes and Misdemeanors

Swiss lab says ‘BZ toxin’ used in Skripal poisoning, not produced in Russia, was in US & UK service

Russia Has "Irrefutable Evidence" UK Staged Syrian Chemical Attack

House Intel Report Finds “No Evidence” of Collusion Between Trump and Russia

Theresa May’s Husband’s Firm made a “Financial Killing” from Syria Bombing

Skripal Case Bombshell: Swiss Lab Reports 'BZ Toxin' Used In Salisbury - Chemical Not Produced In Russia, Only NATO States

OPCW Investigators Found ‘No Evidence’ of Chemical Weapons at Syrian Facilities Bombed by US


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

World Of Naked Lies
May 5 2018 | From: DrSircus / AllGovernmentsLie / Various

Lying seems to be the foundation of human intelligence and civilization. Robert Fisk writes, “We do not live in a “post-truth” world, neither in the Middle East nor in the West – nor in Russia, for that matter. We live in a world of lies. And we always have lived in a world of lies.”



Anyone alive today that believes we are living in a world of truth, justice and love needs to have their heads examined.

Related: Why The Truth Is Vilified (And Lies Are Celebrated) Everyw here Across Our Twisted Society

We live in a world of lies and half-truths, which are really the same or worse than outright lies, because they confuse the human mind. Lies cause unmeasurable amounts of human suffering and lead people to early graves.

We lie and we never stop lying, even to ourselves. Governments lie and they want us to believe in their lies. The press lies pretending to represent the truth but that is understandable because they are wholly owned by elite masters who tell them what to publish. Historians lie but not all of them.

Egyptologists lie because they do not want to know anything besides what they have already thought of as the truth of Egypt’s ancient past.

Certainly, bankers lie about their honesty and doctor’s lie about the dangers of their drugs and surgery done without supplementing with magnesium.



Related: Dear Western Peoples; There Is No Freedom Without Truth

They even lie about heart attacks never saying people who go into cardiac arrest are actually dying of magnesium deficiencies. Dentists of course lie about fluoride and their use of the highly toxic neurological poison mercury.

Therefore, we lie and our institutions are built on pyramids of lies. So why do we trust liars? How can anyone be arrogant about realities of lies when there is no truth left? What is truth if we have nothing but lies?

What is amazing is that these past years they have even been lying about the weather. Imagine the weatherman telling people in New York that it is sunny and warm but when you step outside it is cold and raining. It is that bad.

I have written for nine years on global cooling probably publishing over 70 essays on the subject. Do a Google search on, Record high temperature and Record low temperature and see what comes up. I just got 9,460,000 results (0.55 seconds) for high temperatures and 78,100,000 results (0.58 seconds) for cold temperatures.

Not that the google search means much but it does suggest one start reading about what is going down on our planet if one is interested in surviving the future.



Record Cold USA During Summer in Dakotas & Great Lakes, Media Ignores




We have become accustomed to white lies in our everyday lives and have become accustomed to not believing everything we hear. Whether it is someone’s description on a dating app or a resume for work, we take what we listen to with a grain of salt.

Some people fiercely filter information for fabrications, exaggerations, plagiarism, white lies, and most of all: deception. However, as one study suggests, we are on average only able to catch 54% of lies. Strikingly, in the same study, trained police officers, judges, and FBI agents were not that much better than the average person was.

All forms of information have lost their integrity. All institutions - from the academy to commerce to governance to non-profits - have lost their integrity. Worse perhaps, than secret agencies telling lies with no evidence and the mainstream media telling lies on command from its financial masters, is an all-out war on truth.


Related: Fluoride Officially Classified As A Neurotoxin In World’s Top Medical Journals & Former EPA Senior Scientist Confirms Fluoride Lowers Children’s IQ

“There are facts, there are opinions, and there are lies,” says historian Deborah Lipstadt who encourages us all to go on the offensive against those who assault the truth and facts. “Truth is not relative,” she says. Therefore, we really have no choice but to question and challenge everything.

What is the truth of the liberal mind? What is their greatest wet dream? They want the whole world to be one big happy family, where borders are meaningless, people can freely move from one country to the next, and no society is inherently better than another is.

They preach diversity, but they want the world to be blended into one drab monoculture that falls in line with their beliefs and violently oppose others, who believe in quaint ideas of nationalism for example.

Today nationalists and patriots are evil people in the eyes of liberals and progressives who forget the truth of what these words mean. According to the Merriam-Webster dictionary, nationalism simply means “love for or devotion to one’s country.” According to thefreedictionary.com, a patriot is “a person who loves, supports, and defends his or her country and its interests.”



Related: Many Scientific “Truths” Are, In Fact, False + A Scientist Explains Why "Everything Is Fucked"

So for sure they lied about 9-11, what started the Second World War and about how the world is doing with global debt now hitting $217 trillion, which is 327% Of GDP. We could go on forever listing lies.

Religions lie. We know that because if that were not the truth then only one religion is a true one and the rest bull because they all contradict each other.

In a world of lies one has to wonder the truth about everything, even what happened in Germany during WWII?

Come on, they even lie about iodine in salt, as if it would do anyone any good because once put on the table the iodine evaporates quickly. Most people have no idea what truth is or the process of finding it. The truth is as unpopular today as it has always been. If you are a person of truth and you hear the truth, it rather excites you. The truth, if we are not living it, is almost unbearable to hear.

The sounds of silence are the sounds of lies, omissions of fact and reality so large it is more than manipulation. Did you know that one’s silence could be deadly? One can actually do mass murder with silence by deliberately holding back information that can be lifesaving.



Related: The Truth About Money Is Out & Austerity In 8 Minutes: Why It Does Not Work, Why It Is Still Practised

Tell that to your doctor for he is the one who most needs to know this. What is going on in Fukushima is perhaps the greatest silent lie. Things are so bad there we hear nothing about it.

Perhaps the most dangerous lies today center around Russia. Sick politicians in both American and Europe are risking all of our lives in a nuclear war with their lies. Crimea is Russian. All the people there speak Russian. Almost every one of them voted to rejoin Russia.

The West is completely irrational, not only about Islam but also about just about everything. It is inviting its own destruction. They have even convinced the Russian high command, which has already announced its conclusion, that Washington is preparing a surprise nuclear attack on Russia.

The West is completely separated from reality says Paul Craig Roberts.



Conclusion – A Little Bit of Truth

The heart can only stand the truth but our minds can wonder all over the universe of lies without problem. We said in the beginning that lies hurt people. Powerful people everywhere routinely make decisions that hurt others. The old saying is right: Power really does corrupt.

No one is honest about their corruption so they have to lie. Therefore, the lies that permeate civilization start at the top among the most powerful.

Recent psychological research suggests that powerful people behave remarkably like traumatic brain injury victims. Controlled experiments show that, given power over others, people often become impulsive and less sensitive to risk.



Related: Ten Years On: Al Gore's 'Inconvenient Truth' Propaganda Film Turns Out To Be Total Bunk - How Is His Profit From Carbon Taxes Not Criminal Fraud?

Most important, test subjects often lose empathy, that is, the ability to understand and share the feelings of others. Said another way they lose their hearts, the intelligence of the heart, their own organs of truth so in a sense they become stupid.

Rich in money and possessions but without hearts leaves the most powerful without the kind of vulnerability that leads to love so actually they are poor in spirit, poor in their ability to feel but strong in their ability to abuse. They also lose their capacity to mirror and listen to others.


All Governments Lie



Related Articles:

The Truth Is Possibly Out There

The Control-Matrix Is Crashing Because The Truth-Seekers Are Winning

Canada scandal: how does Minister of Defence still have a job?

Famous Medical-Journal Editor Torpedoes Medical Journal + Why Isn’t There A Medical Edward Snowden?


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
If You Limit ANY Free Speech, This Is What You Get
May 4 2018 | From: ActivistPost

The law originally targeted the KKK. Now it has been used to arrest people protesting against white supremacists. And that is why free speech is so important.



Plenty of people would love to see new laws to stop white supremacists from exercising their–albeit offensive–free speech.

Related: Political Correctness Threatens Free Speech

But as this 1951 law demonstrates, the law as it is intended is not always how it is applied.


"
Faced with hundreds of demonstrators rallying against a crowd of neo-Nazis in Newnan, local and state authorities turned to a little-known Georgia law adopted in 1951 to combat the Ku Klux Klan.

The law, which makes it illegal to wear a mask at most public events, was cited in several of the arrests of counterdemonstrators who joined a protest Saturday against white supremacists.

And the irony was not lost upon the organizers of the counterdemonstration, who were fuming Sunday that a law aimed at weakening white supremacists was used to arrest protesters who opposed a neo-Nazi rally.

There are so many problems with this law. Why are masks not protected forms of expression? What about hats, hoods, and sunglasses? At what point do those fit the definition of a mask?



Related: Tyranny And Free Speech

Ironically, police routinely wear gas masks and face-covering riot helmets at these kinds of events.

Apparently, the law doesn’t apply to them. But that is fitting since most laws don’t apply to the people who enforce them.

Have you ever threatened to shoot someone with a rifle because they had a mask on? Me neither. Police are a different breed.

"A video posted on social media by freelance journalist Daniel Shular appeared to show authorities scuffling with counterdemonstrators. Authorities demanded that the counterprotesters remove their masks, and the footage showed an officer raising his rifle at demonstrators.”

This is another good reminder that police will enforce any law handed down on high from politicians - even dead politicians who passed the law in 1951. The only actual violence at the rally was committed by police, in the name of the law.

But free speech, the very First Amendment in the blueprint for this country’s government, is not so important to law enforcement.

Police have no problem throwing people to the ground, handcuffing them, using pepper spray, billy clubs, and aiming deadly weapons at peaceful protesters because they wear a piece of cloth obscuring their faces.



Related: Incredible: Professor’s Defense Of Free Speech Leaves Regressive Leftist Literally Speechless

And any other anti-free speech laws will be enforced with equal vigor.

Hate speech. Offensive displays. Fake news. Laws aimed at combating these will absolutely limit free speech. Maybe, maybe, at first they will only be used against the neo-Nazis and the white supremacists, just like this anti-mask law was at first only used against the KKK.

But it is only a matter of time until innocent people find themselves in the crosshairs of these freedom crushing laws.


"State law bans the wearing of masks, hoods or other devices that conceal a person’s identity if they’re on public property or on private property where the owner has not consented. It includes exceptions for holidays, theatrical productions, civil emergencies and sporting events.

The laws have been adopted by about a dozen states, most aimed at weakening the KKK in the middle of the 20th century. The Georgia Supreme Court in 1990 upheld the state’s ban after a Klansman donned a hood on the Lawrenceville Square, citing his First Amendment rights."

This is just one of many laws in the arsenal of the police state. There are enough laws that you can be arrested for basically anything. It gives an official appearance to entirely arbitrary policing. You can be arrested on any officer’s whim, and then he will be able to find an excuse.

Other counter-protesters were arrested for “resisting arrest,” a classic joke of a charge. How can you be charged with only resisting arrest? It means there was no reason for them to be arresting you, and only once they illegally tried to arrest you did you commit a crime.



Related: Silencing Free Speech

If common law reigned supreme, where attacking someone is always wrong, these police would not have the protection of the State to shield their violent actions.

A blot of ink on a 70-year-old piece of paper would not protect these cops from charges that they threw people to the ground without provocation, that they chained and kidnapped people, that they aimed loaded guns at people who had done nothing aggressive or threatening.

Make no mistake, ANY anti-free speech law will be used against innocent, non-violent, peaceful people. And the Western police states will enforce those laws on its victims with glee.


Related Articles:

Google, Tech Giants Threaten To Shut Down ‘Free Speech’ Social Site & Reason: It’s Time To Rein In
Warrantless Domestic Spying Before It’s Too Late

The US Is Now The Ultimate Police State: US Detains Journalist For Exercising Free Speech

Gestapo In The USA: FCC Intimidates Press And Kills Free Speech At 5G Rollout

The Emergence Of Orwellian Newspeak And The Death Of Free Speech


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Six Ways To Break The Hypnotic Spell Of The Mainstream Media
May 3 2018 | From: UltraCulture / Various

Here’s six steps to filter out media noise, break the hypnosis of the mainstream media, and get to the information that truly matters.



There is no information age. It doesn’t exist. There is only the Age of Noise.

Related: Mind Control Theories And Techniques Used By Mass Media

Because although we now appear to have an infinite ability to see everything that’s going on in the world at once, from photos of the world from space to the fact that our friends are indecisive about what to eat tonight, we have no ability to filter that information and sort for what matters.

We have no reliable media gatekeeper. We only have the so-called “mainstream media,” which is just the advertising wing of multinational corporations.

We used to pay people to filter information for us: these were called professional journalists, writers and artists, whose job it was to dive into the sea of information and come back up with pearls for us.



Related: London terror attacks: Keep calm and carry on replaced by Run, Hide, Tell

But we don’t pay those people anymore, because the media conglomerates that have consolidated into only a few massive holdings since the 1990s have realized that they don’t have to.

They don’t have to because their interest isn’t providing real information or truth, their interest is in providing content that gets as many people as possible to look at it, in order to get the most advertising money possible, because that’s how they get paid and can afford the salaries and insurance costs of the large staffs they need to do what they do.

That’s their daily reality. And so they’re in the business of giving people what they want.

Related: 10 Ways to Protect Yourself From NLP Mind Control

Since the 90s, the trend has increasingly been to cut out professionals and get people to generate their own content. That means reality television, YouTube, Facebook. No big budgets needed and far more profit gained. Since everybody is a star now, everybody is constantly generating more free content than we can ever consume.

And so professional creatives have gone the way of the dinosaurs, and instead of getting reporting on, say, Karen Silkwood blowing the whistle on nuclear power, or Gary Webb’s expose of CIA drug trafficking, you’re getting reporting about how some celebrity is in a Twitter feud.

We have no more professional gatekeepers. We are scattered to the four winds, drowning in Facebook feeds or aggregation blogs. These mega-blogs, which we have mistakenly expected to replace mainstream media outlets, are in the same position: largely beholden to the tastes of their audiences, and stuck having to keep people happy with unchallenging, crowd-pleasing content to drive traffic to their site advertisers so that they can eat.



Related: Mainstream Media Insults The Public's Intelligence On Vaccines & Vaccinated Vs. Unvaccinated Pilot Study: Early Vaccination Sees Exponential Increase In Chronic Disorders + Lies, Vaccines And The New Zealand Media

So where does this leave the information-poor individual who hopefully wants to get their head over the waterline enough to start to see the things that actually matter?

It means you have to be your own media gatekeeper. Flat out. You can’t outsource that job to somebody else anymore, because the mainstream media, or the alternative media, or Blog X, Y or Z, are not going to comprehensively do that job for you the way you need it done.

They’re too beholden to economics, ratings and their own viewpoints and reality tunnels.

And more and more, they’re probably not able to do that job because they’re not properly trained for that job, and I don’t mean just bloggers, because these days very few people who work in the mainstream media have any journalistic training at all

Nobody can get the information you need for you, you’ve got to do it yourself.


"They Live" Sunglasses




Luckily, we’ve got tools that can help us do that. Here’s a few beginning steps:


1. Decide What Matters

Faced with infinite information, you’ve got to decide up front what you’re going to filter for, at least initially. You’ve got to restrict your data to some extent, which sounds counterintuitive, but is necessary.

You don’t need more information, you need more information about the things that matter. I suggest that the things that matter are, simply, information that can directly positively effect the welfare of you and your family, and information about the general welfare of the planet.

2. Use Web Tools To Automate Your Info Intake

Everybody on the web is largely in the same position: grab info from a few news sources (like AP or Reuters) and then recycle it into blog content. They’re using the same tools as you to get their info. So cut out the middleman. I recommend setting up Google Alerts, for a start, to give you info about the issues you actually care about instead of waiting for somebody else to.



Related: Trump: ‘Most Of The Media Is Fake’ + Donald Trump Invites Conservative Media To White House For Exclusive Briefing

Beyond that, I highly recommend using an RSS aggregator like Feedly to dump a lot of media outlets into an easy-to-digest feed. Work done upfront will pay off in time saved later. Reddit is also an excellent tool, as long as you stay off the dreaded, time-sucking front page and keep to subreddits pertinent to important topics.

3. Expand Outside of Your Demographic Bubble

Whoever you are, you fit a demographic, which means that the mainstream media specifically tailors content that it knows you will like for the shows you watch and blogs you read, so advertisers can sell you products they’ve determined your demographic buys and use the language and images they know you will respond to, all in order to get you to make that purchase.

Related: William S. Burroughs’ 7 Occult Techniques for Smashing Reality

Expand out of the box they’ve decided you fit in. Read blogs and consume media from sources outside of your demographic, and that definitely means outside of your political and religious persuasion. Otherwise you’re blinkered not only to things that are going on around you, but also to parts of life you might be ignoring.

4. Read a Book

You still won’t get nearly as good of an info download from months on the Internet as you will from reading a well-researched, info-dense book, a book which, never forget, can represent years or decades of professional research and experience rather than an afternoon spent dashing off a blog post to throw out into the netherworld.



Related: Corporate Mass Media Controls Your Mind

Don’t stop reading, and reading better and more challenging books. The Web is really only a menu of culture; don’t forget to eat the meal.



5. Think Critically

Understand what confirmation bias is, and always consider the source of an article. Who wrote this, and what’s their agenda? What are they selling? Do they cite their own sources? Is this from a professional journalist/writer or from some wackadoo or salesman spouting off on the net?



Related: How To Spot A Media Psy-Op

 To dig deeper, get this excellent, comprehensive primer in critical thinking skills.

6. Meditate

Sounds potentially hokey, but there is no better discipline for learning how to shut off what is pointless bullshit and go only for what actually matters than meditation, because in learning to control one’s own thoughts internally, dealing with external noise becomes immensely easier.

Related: How to Meditate: A Beginner’s Guide to Meditation, the One Skill That Can Transform Every Area of Your Entire Life

Information is power. Know how to get it. Don’t outsource it to the mainstream media to do it for you.

(The image and clip above are from They Live. If you haven’t seen this classic film, you must; it’s actually the best primer on seeing through social hypnosis and the mainstream media that you could hope for. Watch it here)

Related: Insider Confirms CIA Controls CNN + Mainstream Media Exposed Its Own Cannibalism And More


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Digital Addiction Increases Loneliness, Anxiety And Depression
May 2 2018 | From: NaturalBlaze

How to Outsmart Digital Isolation and Addiction, According to San Francisco State University.



Smartphones are a permanent fixture in most people’s lives, a constant source of notification and quasi-connection.

Related: The Same Gov’t That Spies on Its Citizens is Lecturing Facebook CEO for Same Thing

The downside of that convenience is that many of us are also addicted to the constant pings, chimes, vibrations and other alerts from our devices, unable to ignore new emails, texts and images. We are addicted to “logging in.”

In a new study published in NeuroRegulation, San Francisco State University Professor of Health Education Erik Peper and Associate Professor of Health Education Richard Harvey argue that overuse of smart phones is just like any other type of substance abuse.


"The behavioral addiction of smartphone use begins forming neurological connections in the brain in ways similar to how opioid addiction is experienced by people taking Oxycontin for pain relief - gradually,”
Peper explained

On top of that, addiction to social media technology may actually have a negative effect on social connection. In a survey of 135 San Francisco State students, Peper and Harvey found that students who used their phones the most reported higher levels of feeling isolated, lonely, depressed and anxious.



Related: Edward Snowden: Facebook Is A Surveillance Company Rebranded As "Social Media"

They believe the loneliness is partly a consequence of replacing face-to-face interaction with a form of communication where body language and other signals cannot be interpreted.

They also found that those same students almost constantly multitasked while studying, watching other media, eating or attending class. This constant activity allows little time for bodies and minds to relax and regenerate, says Peper, and also results in “semi-tasking,” where people do two or more tasks at the same time - but half as well as they would have if focused on one task at a time.

Peper and Harvey note that digital addiction is not our fault but a result of the tech industry’s desire to increase corporate profits.


"More eyeballs, more clicks, more money,”
said Peper.

Push notifications, vibrations and other alerts on our phones and computers make us feel compelled to look at them by triggering the same neural pathways in our brains that once alerted us to imminent danger, such as an attack by a tiger or other large predator.


"But now we are hijacked by those same mechanisms that once protected us and allowed us to survive - for the most trivial pieces of information,”
he said.



Related: Facebook Is Violating Your Privacy via Facial Recognition Technology

But just as we can train ourselves to eat less sugar, for example, we can take charge and train ourselves to be less addicted to our phones and computers. The first step is recognizing that tech companies are manipulating our innate biological responses to danger.


Stop the Notifications

Peper suggests turning off push notifications, only responding to email and social media at specific times and scheduling periods with no interruptions to focus on important tasks.

Two of Peper’s students say they have taken proactive measures to change their patterns of technology use. Recreation, Parks and Tourism major Khari McKendell closed all of his social media accounts about six months ago because he wanted to make stronger face-to-face connections with people.


"I still call and text people but I want to make sure that a majority of the time I’m talking to my friends in person,”
he said.

Senior Sierra Hinkle, a Holistic Health minor, says she has stopped using headphones while out walking in order to be more aware of her surroundings.



Related: 30 Questions that Facebook has yet to Answer

When she’s out with friends, they all put their phones in the center of the table, and the first one to touch theirs buys the drinks.


"We have to become creative and approach technology in a different way that still incorporates the skills we need but doesn’t take away from real-life experience,”
said Hinkle.

Is our smart phone, virtual relationship, over-notified world causing a wedge between us and intimacy?

Maybe it’s called a screen because it blocks us from love and awareness.

Digital screens serve as a smoke screen among relationships, perhaps. It’s interesting that the Biblical description of hell is one where no one can recognize anyone else while they each suffer individually…


Related Articles:

What Kind of Information Does Google and Facebook Have on You?

How the EU could change the world through Data Asylum

19 Questions Mark Zuckerberg Strangely Couldn’t Answer During His Senate Hearing


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

What Will It Finally Take For Everyone To Realise That “It” Is All A “Con”
May 1 2018 | From: LTS

William Tompkins likes to say throughout his interviews that “everything you’re told is a lie”.



He claims that many of the systems and sciences we pursue, such as astronomy, medicine, etc., have been seeded with lies to trick us.

Related: Yesterday’s Conspiracy Theory Is Today’s News + Spies Tell Lies, Spying Is Lying & Wikileaks Says Less Than 1% Of Vault 7 Released

I have spent the better part of a week trying to think of a better way to approach my writing. Forgive me if I have come to the conclusion that most of what I say is not really “getting” through to people!


"It just does not seem like anything I say is making a “dent”….

Let’s go back to the article that I posted yesterday!  Located here: www.toolsforfreedom.com

And, for those of my dedicated readers and followers who decided to read it… We have this quote from William Tompkins!



Related: Secret Space Program Disclosure: Founders Of Solar Warden SSP With William Tompkins


"Tompkins: Everything You’re Told is a Lie

William Tompkins likes to say throughout his interviews that “everything you’re told is a lie”. He claims that many of the systems and sciences we pursue, such as astronomy, medicine, etc., have been seeded with lies to trick us.

This harks back to his claim that every government on Earth right now is under Reptilian control. Whether that turns out to be true or not remains to be seen, but certainly, so much deception has already been uncovered in so many areas of life that it is wisest to remain open to this possibility."


How many times have I said myself that same thing: Everything You’re Told is a Lie

You see, what we have now, and are experiencing is extreme cognitive dissonance, where the minds and brains of most human beings just can not process that ALL of it’s “programs” are faulty!

This is what the LUCIFERIANS have done to humanity. It is “they” who gave you your “beliefs”, and they who gave you your “truths” (which were lies), and they who are running the show even now. So, when somone finally comes out and tells you the REAL TRUTH, it is so huge that it is difficult to even know where to start changing things.

They gave us their “courts”, (Laws), they gave us their “religions” (beliefs), they gave us their “systems” (Governments), and let me once again state exactly what you need to hear - The Truth.

All of it is a lie. It’s a CON GAME of epic and monumental proportions, and you, (yes, even you) have been “conned” all of your life. Here is the difficulty with this: We have been trained (yes trained) just like dogs and cats, to be OBEDIANT, to what we were “told” were the rules.

Only these rules were not made in heaven as we thought, but were made in HELL instead. These rules were not GODS rules, but man’s rules! (And the worlds governments are STILL AT IT, and making crazy and insane rules which NO ONE wants to follow)

Just ask yourself this logical question…, and be very honest!

WHY do you suppose there is a plan on the drawing board to KILL 90 percent of humanity?

The answer is clear. “They” realize that the population is waking up from the CON, and they also realize that once that happens, they will have lost positive control of the surface humanity.

Now, before I continue, guys like me are ALWAYS condemned by the readers for pointing out the problem, but offering no solutions. Here, I will offer suggestions to make a difference. You, and everyone one else who you are in contact with, must make the “decision” that you will no longer play or participate in their evil game.

This means:

Taking any and every action you can to be “in defiance” of their rules, their cons, and their “systems”

We need to become the resistance

We need to stop consenting to every single thing we are told we need to do, and start OBJECTING


When India was fighting for it’s Independence from Great Britian, tens of thousands of workers and men simply stopped particpating and consenting! Even if they were beaten, they stopped consenting, and that is how they won their freedom.

This battle will not be won without COURAGE, and if you think it can, then by all means, see if being a coward gets you anything, but a first class seat in a FEMA camp.

Now, for those who don’t know me, and think I’m joking or have not done my reasearch, or am talking off the top of my head, here are several articles written by: Anna von Reitz, (posted on the Maine Republic) which spell out and show you the extent of the GREAT CON in fine details.


So You Want Solutions?

Well, how about this? The court system is messed up because it has been turned into a giant debt collection agency run by the creditors of the Federal Government and its “State of State” franchises.

The rest of the story is that they are collecting on fraudulent debts - debts that:

1) Don’t exist for the most part - and that:

2) Aren’t your debts


Moreover, these courts are being run as quasi-military tribunals in military districts, under the pretense that the “American Civil War” was ever an actual war.

It wasn’t. It was never Declared by the actual Congress and no Peace Treaty ending it exists, either. It was and is nothing but an illegal commercial mercenary operation on our shores that has been enforced and promoted by disloyal military commanders and criminals in Congress and clueless Presidents.

So, given the fact that these “courts” are foreign military tribunals here on our soil as the result of an illegal and immoral commercial mercenary action now 150 years old - and that they are collecting on debts that are odious and fraudulent by nature.

And given the fact that Donald Trump is now the “Commander in Chief” and able to order the District Commanders to shut these so-called courts down and reopen the courts we are owed….

Why not light a firecracker up Commander-in-Chief Trump’s rump and suggest that he do so, post haste? Tell him that Judge Anna can show him precisely how and when this system got set up and how it has been abused, and what his power is with respect to ending the hideous mockery that “stands for” a court system in this country right now.


The Financial Curse

Banks create money out of thin air.

Banks are thought of as deposit taking institutions that lend money. The legal reality is that banks don’t take deposits and banks don’t lend money.




Confirmed - Loans & Mortgages Are Created Out Of Thin Air By The Banks








A deposit is not actually a deposit. It’s not a bailment. It’s not held in custody. At law the word “deposit” is meaningless.

The law courts and various judgments have made it very clear that if you “give” your money to a bank, even though it’s called a “deposit”, this money is simply a loan to the bank.

So there is no such thing as a deposit. It is a loan to the bank. So banks borrow their money from the public.

“Surely they are lending money?” you say. Not at all. Banks don’t “lend” money.

Banks - again at law it’s very clear - they are in the business of purchasing “securities”. That’s it.

So you say, “I want a loan.”

Fine. Here is the loan contract. Here is the “offer letter”, and you sign it. At law, it is very clear that you have issued a “security”, namely a “promissory note”, and the bank is going to purchase that “promissory note / security”.

That’s what’s happening. What the bank is doing, is very different from what it presents to the public that it’s doing.

But, you say, “So the bank purchases my promissory note, but how do I get my money?”

The bank will then say, “You will find it in your account with us.” That would be technically correct.

If they say, “We’ll transfer it to your account”, that would be wrong because no money is transferred at all, from anywhere, inside the bank, or outside the bank.

Why? Because what we call a “deposit” is simply the bank’s record of its debt to the public. Now the bank also owes you money, and the bank’s “record” of the money it owes you is what you think you’re getting as money.

That’s all it is. And that is how the banks create the money supply. The money supply consists of 97% of bank deposits, and these are created out of nothing by the banks when they “lend”, because they invent fictitious so-called customer “deposits”.

Why? The bank simply restates - a slightly incorrect accounting term - what is an “accounts payable liability” arising from the loan contract, having purchased your “promissory note” as a customer deposit, but nobody has deposited any money.

I wonder how the FDIC deals with this because in the financial sector you’re not supposed to mislead your customers.

In such a case, you loan (“give”) the bank the title to your collateral via your signed “promissory note / security” and the bank monetizes this by selling it to the non-federal Federal Reserve Bank to get the money the bank loans (“gives back”) to you disguised as a loan.

In other words, you “give” the bank your “signature” via you “promissory note / security” which the bank then monetizes via the non-federal Federal Reserve Bank, and the bank gives you back the value of your signature as a so-called “loan”.

We are on a “promissory note” standard, instead of a “gold” money standard.

If you don’t pay the money that the bank gives you back to the bank, plus interest, the bank then takes your stuff ! (It really doesn’t want you to repay the so-called loan; it would simply rather just take your stuff).


150 Years of British Criminality – The Very Short Version

We are Third Party Beneficiaries with respect to the National Trust created in the Preamble and are indemnified in the British system under two Royal Sovereign Seals - the seal of King George the III with respect to the delegated powers, and the seal of William Belcher with respect to the undelegated powers, otherwise known as the Great Seal of the United States.



William Belcher inherited his sovereignty as a result of the Norman Conquest of Britain and Wales. Thus, the Definitive Treaty of Peace, Paris, 1783, calls George III the “prince of the United States” and does not mention who the actual Head of State - the “king” of the United States - was. Later generations simply presumed it was the British Monarch, with results disastrous to them and to us.

This split of delegated and undelegated powers held by two sovereigns in international jurisdiction ultimately resulted in the situation we have today, where the delegated powers are held by the British-backed United States and the undelegated powers are held by the “states and people” under the Belcher Seal and operated by the United States of America by default.

The misunderstanding about our states (and also, therefore, our state offices) comes about because people don’t grasp the difference between the international jurisdiction of the sea and the national jurisdiction of the land.

Everything discussed above, including the National Trust established by the Preamble, exists only in the international jurisdiction of the sea and has nothing to do with our sovereignty on the land.

We have all been taught to focus on the Constitution but that is substantially a red herring in that it discusses only our position with respect to the foreign international jurisdiction and says nothing about our own sovereign domain.

This can be excused in that our land jurisdiction was never the subject of The Constitution, so why would the Founders talk about that? We were expected to know the basis of our own sovereignty on the land, just as we were expected to know the history and protect our own Common Law Courts from British meddling.

Two centuries later, the situation speaks for itself.

As to our sovereignty on the land which vests itself in our nations called “states” for international purposes, that sovereignty derives from entirely different authorities and specifically begins with a land grant and settlement made by the King of Spain via (yet another) Treaty of Paris in 1778.

The situation was that the British King was financing both sides of the Revolution to hedge his bets - he emerged the victor to a greater or lesser extent, either way.

The King of France was intermediary funneling funds to the Americans. The King of Spain, however, had grudges against both the King of Britain and the King of France - and he was in charge of the land jurisdiction worldwide, thanks to the claims of the Holy See and its “dispensations” under the Unam Sanctum Trust.

So while the Americans were concluding their treaty with France to secure what most of them believed was French support for the American Revolution, the King of Spain quietly granted the entire continent (absent Spain’s holdings of course) to the rebels via the “other” Treaty of Paris, 1778.

If they could win the war, the land was already vouchsafed to them - and as of 1778, it was available to them to use as collateral to borrow against internationally.

This is how the Americans financed their loans from the French King who was actually acting as a pass-through agent for King George III. They wagered their claim to the land given to them by the Spanish King and used it as collateral.



If George III had won the ground war, he would have won the whole shooting match; as it was, he emerged with a tidy debt owed by the Americans and a great deal of leverage, which he used to secure the delegated powers granted to him and his proxy government in DC.

The land claim passed from the Spanish King to the colonies, which in the years immediately following the end of open hostilities with Britain (1783-1789) undertook a number of inter-colony initiatives to settle the land jurisdiction claims.

This all focused on settling the national borders of the separate nation-states, establishing trade relationships, currencies, treaties with respect to international commercial issues, taxation, interstate travel, security of the international Post Roads and Post Offices, and similar concerns.

As for the basic grant of land jurisdiction, they issued another trust known as The Supreme Republican Declaration of the United Colonies, grandfathering in the original thirteen colonies as a union of land jurisdiction states, and claiming all the rest of the land jurisdiction for themselves and their progeny subject to later arrangements and acquisitions.

The later arrangements were solidified by the Northwest Ordinance which provided for the orderly creation and inclusion of territories and from the territories the creation of new nation-states which would be enabled to enter the union under the Equal Footing Doctrine.



The inclusion of “other acquisitions” such as the Louisiana Purchase and the Republic of Texas and the Spanish Settlement followed the same basic pattern of establishing a form of territorial government and later, upon enrollment in the original union, a separate state government.

Throughout this discussion we are talking about geographically defined nations and their body politics simply called, “California” or “Wisconsin” or “Ohio”.

References in law books to these states always use the style “states”- no capitalization whatsoever. These are the sovereign states from which our sovereignty on the land of this continent derives. These states are nations in the fullest sense of the word, just like Britain or France.


They are completely different and separate from any “State of __________”, and in fact, the word “of” means “separate from, apart from, or belonging to”, so “State of Delaware” is talking about what? The international corporation used by the actual state known as Delaware and its people to operate in international commerce.

In trade, Delaware needs no “State of _________” to conduct business within its own borders or with other unincorporated sovereign states and nations. It is only when it wishes to engage in incorporated business transactions with the other nation-states, like the State of California, or with other countries like France, that it needs to use an incorporated “State of ___________”.

And therein lies the rub.

Each state retains its right to conduct trade within its borders and also retains the right to trade with other sovereign nations; it uses a “State of _________” corporation to operate in international commerce outside its borders— and the proxy “Federal Government” run by the British Monarch has delegated control of international commerce. This control is exercised by operating all incorporated businesses in all states as franchises of the United States, Inc.

So now you know the difference between the actual land jurisdiction sovereign state and the fact that each one is, in fact, a separate nation, an entire country unto itself, plus you know what the “State of _________” entity is and what it is used for and who controls it and why.

None of the states operated in international commerce until after the Civil War. At that time, The United States of America, Inc. was formed, and the original states were forced to write new “state constitutions”.

Under these new constitutions (all constitutions are debt agreements) the corporation used by the actual sovereign state was obliged to operate under names styled like this: California State, Wyoming State, Florida State.

Meanwhile, the name “State of California” and “State of Wyoming”, etc. was “adopted” by totally different entities under new ownership.

This switch and the use of the same old names applied to different corporate entities led up to the greatest fraud in human history. The “State of Illinois” prior to the Civil War was an entirely different beastie and under completely different ownership that the “State of Illinois” after the Civil War and the same pattern applies across the whole country.



There is a state constitution prior to the Civil War and a new state constitution after the Civil War.

Fast forward again to the 1930’s. FDR is working as liaison for the United States, Inc. at the Geneva Conventions, May, 1930.

As a business ploy, the G-5 nations agree by private treaty to bankrupt their “international corporations” and discharge all debts left over from the First World War.

Three years later, Roosevelt, now elected President of the United States, carries through and by sleight of hand and deceptive wordsmithing, sets up a constructive fraud by which the California State, Illinois State, and other land jurisdiction corporations are “assumed” to be sureties standing good for the debts of the United States, Inc. even though they are owned and operated by the United States of America, Inc.

This isn’t a corporate take-over. It’s just plain old commercial fraud in which false claims are made against the assets of a Third Party and false assumptions then lead to that innocent victim being charged for the debt via a process of commercial liens and titles and hypothecation of debt.

The American states and people were raped, pillaged, and plundered by the United States, Inc. and the British Crown from 1930 to 1999, when all debts of the bankruptcy of the United States of America were discharged and settled and our “States” doing business as “California State” and “Wisconsin State” were left derelict and adrift, mere shells - and in exactly the same condition as a man recovering from bankruptcy.

All this was accomplished in Breach of Trust and Commercial Contract by the British Monarch and the British Government operating under color of law on our land, pretending to be our friends, allies, and protectors.

As a result of their vicious fraud our State corporations were left in financial ruin, but like a man recovering from bankruptcy, not dead.The vermin responsible for palming off their odious debts on us have tried by every means to “finish us off” in the intervening years, without success.

All this history is necessary for you to know before I can answer your “simple” question about the oaths of office owed to our actual States.

The “vacated offices” that we are occupying belong to the land jurisdiction state and are operated as offices of the formerly bankrupted “Alaska State”, “California State” and so on. These offices were “vacated” during the long bankruptcy and so far as the vermin responsible for this circumstance are concerned, it was never anticipated that they would be re-occupied by the states and the people they belong to.

During the bankruptcy, these States were operated by “State of State Legislatures” functioning as Bankruptcy Trustees - corporate con artists overseeing the rape and the pillaging, but nonetheless “representing” the state in the position of Trustees.



These legislatures operating in that capacity continued to pass “Session Laws” to administer the affairs of the victims. Thus, for example, we have Session Laws that establish the “California State” under a new “state constitution” in 1879, and we have Session Laws established for the bankrupt entity throughout the bankruptcy.

It is via the circa 1870’s “constitutions” creating the Wisconsin State, Louisiana State and so on, that we maintain a chain of title and succession of contract back to the original Constitution and are enabled to enforce it.

It is via the Session Laws related to the “second” state constitutions that we obtain the offices and the oaths.

All land jurisdiction offices are exercised under red ink. Business signatures are in script in Upper and Lower Case.

All land jurisdiction transactions are understood to be in trade, not commerce, and are not under the control of the United States.


Our business as State officials and State Citizens is all conducted under unincorporated business structures locally (hence the need for all state and county assemblies to operate as unincorporated businesses) and under undelegated powers internationally - note the red Post Marks.

All commerce is exercised in blue ink. Commercial signatures of “Account Holders” are in script in Upper and Lower Case. All sea jurisdiction transactions entered into by US PERSONS are understood to be in commerce. You are considered to be acting as a US PERSON if you retain such a PERSON.

You surrender these PERSONS via surrendering the BC to the Secretary of the Treasury and appoint him your Fiduciary and credit the United States of America, U.S. Treasury, without recourse.

That settles the issue of whether you are operating as a State Citizen or a US Citizen.

This entire history from the Civil War to date is nothing but a nasty scam designed by the British to bilk their Creditors and palm off their debts on innocent Third Parties, but once you have the history and the names nailed down, it gets easier to comprehend.


Conclusion

So when guys like myself, start writing and asking for the rest of humanity to “please wake up”, it isn’t just some joke or some opinion we are espousing. Humanity has until now been SLEEP WALKING into it’s own grave, and was for quite some time!

The trouble with trying to do this job is that we are not only up against the Satanists and the Luciferians, but are also up against very well meaning men and women who, have “taken the bait” and swallowed the new CON of the New Age.

In the new Con of the New Age, there are countless real spiritual “teaching” which have been “bastardiszed” into something they are not. The true and real meaning has been flipped or inverted so that it does NOT mean what it was supposed to mean.

The biggest of which is very simply this: Don't focus on negative things: a teaching, which the NEW AGE has bastardized into a very strange teaching which good men and women have come to believe means that you don’t even acknowledge real and truthful “information” about what is happening in the world if it can be catagorized as negative.

(You should just ignore it or LOOK AWAY instead)

This is the height of ABSURDITY, and, as David Icke points out, INFORMATION is neither negative or positive, it is just information (or knowledge).

KNOWLEDGE IS NOT A BAD THING


And it happens to be a fundament requirement in order to make progress.

No problem can ever be solved if you don’t “know” what the problem is or how it is being created, or even better who is doing it. And it's not just the Cabal causing problems, we also have the 'New Agers' and their channeled entities!

As David Icke says in the Title of one of his books: HUMANITY, GET OFF YOUR KNEES. Get off your knees and QUESTION EVERYTHING! There are no authority figures that you need to “obey".

The only real and true authority is the prime creator. There is only ONE AUTHORITY in this Universe, and no one on Earth represents him, not the Queen, nor the Pope, nor the Jesuits, nor the Police, nor the Governments, NOT ANYONE.

What will it really take for us to become free? Courage - nothing more, nothing less. We won't get out of this mess by ignoring it.


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Governments: The Enemy Of Freedom & Globalists Interviewed: They Admitted They Controlled The Government
April 30 2018 | From: Sott / JonRappoport / Various

My friends, we're being played for fools. On paper, we may be technically free.



In reality, however, we are only as free as a government official may allow.

Related: When the Police Become Mother Hens


"Rights aren't rights if someone can take them away. They're privileges. That's all we've ever had in this country, is a bill of temporary privileges. And if you read the news even badly, you know that every year the list gets shorter and shorter.

Sooner or later, the people in this country are gonna realize the government ... doesn't care about you, or your children, or your rights, or your welfare or your safety... It's interested in its own power.

That's the only thing. Keeping it and expanding it wherever possible."


- George Carlin

We only think we live in a constitutional republic, governed by just laws created for our benefit.

Truth be told, we live in a dictatorship disguised as a democracy where all that we own, all that we earn, all that we say and do - our very lives - depends on the benevolence of government agents and corporate shareholders for whom profit and power will always trump principle.

And now the government is litigating and legislating its way into a new framework where the dictates of petty bureaucrats carry greater weight than the inalienable rights of the citizenry.

We're in trouble, folks.



Related: Government Versus Anarchy

Freedom no longer means what it once did.

This holds true whether you're talking about the right to criticize the government in word or deed, the right to be free from government surveillance, the right to not have your person or your property subjected to warrantless searches by government agents, the right to due process, the right to be safe from soldiers invading your home, the right to be innocent until proven guilty and every other right that once reinforced the founders' belief that this would be "a government of the people, by the people and for the people."

Not only do we no longer have dominion over our bodies, our families, our property and our lives, but the government continues to chip away at what few rights we still have to speak freely and think for ourselves.

If the government can control speech, it can control thought and, in turn, it can control the minds of the citizenry.



Related: Open Source Government: True Government Of The People, By The People And For The People

The unspoken freedom enshrined in the First Amendment is the right to think freely and openly debate issues without being muzzled or treated like a criminal.

In other words, if we no longer have the right to tell a Census Worker to get off our property, if we no longer have the right to tell a police officer to get a search warrant before they dare to walk through our door, if we no longer have the right to stand in front of the Supreme Court wearing a protest sign or approach an elected representative to share our views, if we no longer have the right to protest unjust laws by voicing our opinions in public or on our clothing or before a legislative body - no matter how misogynistic, hateful, prejudiced, intolerant, misguided or politically incorrect they might be - then we do not have free speech.

What we have instead is regulated, controlled speech, and that's a whole other ballgame.

Protest laws, free speech zones, bubble zones, trespass zones, anti-bullying legislation, zero tolerance policies, hate crime laws and a host of other legalistic maladies dreamed up by politicians and prosecutors are conspiring to corrode our core freedoms purportedly for our own good.



Related: Have You Ever Felt Like The Government Doesn’t Really Care What You Think?

For instance, the protest laws being introduced across the country - in 18 states so far - are supposedly in the name of "public safety and limiting economic damage."

Don't fall for it.

No matter how you package these laws, no matter how well-meaning they may sound, no matter how much you may disagree with the protesters or sympathize with the objects of the protest, these proposed laws are aimed at one thing only: discouraging dissent.


In Arizona, police would be permitted to seize the assets of anyone involved in a protest that at some point becomes violent.


In Minnesota, protesters would be forced to pay for the cost of having police on hand to "police" demonstrations.


Oregon lawmakers want to "require public community colleges and universities to expel any student convicted of participating in a violent riot."


A proposed North Dakota law would give drivers the green light to "accidentally" run over protesters who are blocking a public roadway. Florida and Tennessee are entertaining similar laws.


Pushing back against what it refers to as "economic terrorism," Washington wants to increase penalties for protesters who block access to highways and railways.


Anticipating protests over the Keystone Pipeline, South Dakota wants to apply the governor's emergency response authority to potentially destructive protests, create new trespassing penalties and make it a crime to obstruct highways.


In Iowa, protesters who block highways with speeds posted above 55 mph could spend five years in prison, plus a fine of up to $7,500. Obstruct traffic in Mississippi and you could be facing a $10,000 fine and a five-year prison sentence.


A North Carolina law would make it a crime to heckle state officials. Under this law, shouting at a former governor would constitute a crime.


Indiana lawmakers wanted to authorize police to use "any means necessary" to breakup mass gatherings that block traffic. That legislation has since been amended to merely empower police to issue fines for such behavior.


Georgia is proposing harsh penalties and mandatory sentencing laws for those who obstruct public passages or throw bodily fluids on "public safety officers."


Virginia wants to subject protesters who engage in an "unlawful assembly" after "having been lawfully warned to disperse" with up to a year of jail time and a fine of up to $2,500.


Missouri wants to make it illegal for anyone participating in an "unlawful assembly" to intentionally conceal "his or her identity by the means of a robe, mask, or other disguise."


Colorado wants to lock up protesters for up to 18 months who obstruct or tamper with oil and gas equipment and charge them with up to $100,000 in fines.


Oklahoma wants to create a sliding scale for protesters whose actions impact or impede critical infrastructure. The penalties would range from $1,000 and six months in a county jail to $100,000 and up to 10 years in prison. And if you're part of an organization, that fine goes as high as $1,000,000.


Michigan hopes to make it easier for courts to shut down "mass picketing" demonstrations and fine protesters who block entrances to businesses, private residences or roadways up to $1,000 a day. That fine jumps to $10,000 a day for unions or other organizing groups.



Ask yourself: if there are already laws on the books in all of the states that address criminal or illegal behavior such as blocking public roadways or trespassing on private property - because such laws are already on the books - then why does the government need to pass laws criminalizing activities that are already outlawed?

What's really going on here?

No matter what the politicians might say, the government doesn't care about our rights, our welfare or our safety
.

How many times will we keep falling for the same tricks?

Every despotic measure used to control us and make us cower and fear and comply with the government's dictates has been packaged as being for our benefit, while in truth benefiting only those who stand to profit, financially or otherwise, from the government's transformation of the citizenry into a criminal class.

Remember, the Patriot Act didn't make us safer. It simply turned American citizens into suspects and, in the process, gave rise to an entire industry - private and governmental - whose profit depends on its ability to undermine our Fourth Amendment rights.

Placing TSA agents in our nation's airports didn't make us safer.

It simply subjected Americans to invasive groping, ogling and bodily searches by government agents.



Now the TSA plans to subject travelers to even more "comprehensive" patdowns.

So, too, these protest laws are not about protecting the economy or private property or public roads. Rather, they are intended to muzzle discontent and discourage anyone from challenging government authority.

These laws are the shot across the bow.

They're intended to send a strong message that in the American police state, you're either a patriot who marches in lockstep with the government's dictates or you're a pariah, a suspect, a criminal, a troublemaker, a terrorist, a radical, a revolutionary.



Related: How A Secretive Elite Created The EU To Build A World Government

Yet by muzzling the citizenry, by removing the constitutional steam valves that allow people to speak their minds, air their grievances and contribute to a larger dialogue that hopefully results in a more just world, the government is deliberately stirring the pot, creating a climate in which violence becomes inevitable.

When there is no steam valve - when there is no one to hear what the people have to say, because government representatives have removed themselves so far from their constituents - then frustration builds, anger grows and people become more volatile and desperate to force a conversation.

Then again, perhaps that was the government's plan all along.

As John F. Kennedy warned in March 1962, "Those who make peaceful revolution impossible will make violent revolution inevitable."



The government is making violent revolution inevitable.

How do you lock down a nation?

You sow discontent and fear among the populace. You terrorize the people into believing that radicalized foreigners are preparing to invade.

You teach them to be non-thinkers who passively accept whatever is told them, whether it's delivered by way of the corporate media or a government handler. You brainwash them into believing that everything the government does is for their good and anyone who opposes the government is an enemy.

You acclimate them to a state of martial law, carried out by soldiers disguised as police officers but bearing the weapons of war. You polarize them so that they can never unite and stand united against the government.



Click on the image above to see more detail in a new window


Related: 10 Government Rulers Who Have Told Us A “Secret Government” Rules The Earth

You create a climate in which silence is golden and those who speak up are shouted down. You spread propaganda and lies. You package the police state in the rhetoric of politicians.

And then, when and if the people finally wake up to the fact that the government is not and has never been their friend, when it's too late for peaceful protests and violence is all that remains to them as a recourse against tyranny, you use all of the tools you've been so carefully amassing - the criminal databases and surveillance and identification systems and private prisons and protest laws - and you shut them down for good.

As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, once a government assumes power - unconstitutional or not - it does not relinquish it.




The militarized police are not going to stand down.




Related: The Proof Is In: The US Government Is The Most Complete Criminal Organization In Human History

The NSA will continue to collect electronic files on everything we do. More and more Americans are going to face jail time for offenses that prior generations did not concern themselves with.

The government - at all levels - could crack down on virtually anyone at any time.

Martin Luther King saw it coming: both the "spontaneous explosion of anger by various citizen groups" and the ensuing crackdown by the government.


"Police, national guard and other armed bodies are feverously preparing for repression,"
King wrote shortly before he was assassinated.

"They can be curbed not by unorganized resort to force...but only by a massive wave of militant nonviolence...

It also may be the instrument of our national salvation."

Militant nonviolent resistance.


"A nationwide nonviolent movement is very important," King wrote. "We know from past experience that Congress and the President won't do anything until you develop a movement around which people of goodwill can find a way to put pressure on them...

This means making the movement powerful enough, dramatic enough, morally appealing enough, so that people of goodwill, the churches, laborers, liberals, intellectuals, students, poor people themselves begin to put pressure on congressmen to the point that they can no longer elude our demands.

It must be militant, massive nonviolence,"
King emphasized.


In other words, besides marches and protests, there would have to be civil disobedience. Civil disobedience forces the government to expend energy in many directions, especially if it is nonviolent, organized and is conducted on a massive scale.



Related: A Constitutional Timebomb: Is New Zealand’s Government And Court System Unlawful?

This is, as King knew, the only way to move the beast. It is the way to effect change without resorting to violence. And it is exactly what these protest laws are attempting to discourage

We are coming to a crossroads. Either we gather together now and attempt to restore freedom or all will be lost.

As King cautioned, "everywhere, 'time is winding up,' in the words of one of our spirituals, corruption in the land, people take your stand; time is winding up."



Related Articles:

Young People Feel Betrayed By New Zealand Government

CAFR Update: How The New Zealand Government Hides Billions (Trillions) In Slush Funds




Globalists Interviewed: They Admitted They Controlled The Government

This is a bombshell. It’s a crucial piece of history that has been ignored by mass media.



I’ve published this interview before. Here I want to make new comments.

Related: Former Presidents Warn About The “Invisible Government” Running The United States

First of all, David Rockefeller’s Trilateral Commission was born in 1973, in part because the Globalist plan to ensure “free trade” (no tariffs paid by predatory mega-corporations) had run into a glitch.

That glitch was President Richard Nixon. He began laying tariffs on certain goods imported into the US, in order to level the playing field and protect American companies. Nixon, a substantial crook in other respects, went off-script in this case and actually started a movement to reject the Globalist vision.

After Nixon’s ouster from the White House, Gerald Ford became president, and he chose David’s brother, Nelson Rockefeller as his vice-president. It was a sign Globalism and free trade were back on track.

But David Rockefeller and his sidekick, Brzezinski, wanted more. They wanted a man in the White House whom they’d created from scratch.

That man was a peanut farmer no one had ever heard of: Jimmy Carter.

Through their media connections, David and Brzezinski vaulted Carter into the spotlight. He won the Democratic nomination (1976), spread a syrupy message of love and coming together after the Watergate debacle, and soon he was ensconced in the Oval Office.

Flash forward to 1978, the second year of Carter’s presidency. An interview took place.

It’s a close-up snap shot of a remarkable moment. It’s a through-the-looking-glass secret - in the form of a conversation between a reporter, Jeremiah Novak, and two Trilateral Commission members, Karl Kaiser and Richard Cooper.

The interview concerned the issue of who exactly, during President Carter’s administration, was formulating and controlling US economic and political policy.

The careless and off-hand attitude of Trilateralists Kaiser and Cooper is astonishing. It’s as if they’re saying, “What we’re revealing is already out in the open, it’s too late to do anything about it, why are you so worked up, we’ve already won…”


"
NOVAK (the reporter): Is it true that a private [Trilateral committee] led by Henry Owen of the US and made up of [Trilateral] representatives of the US, UK, West Germany, Japan, France and the EEC is coordinating the economic and political policies of the Trilateral countries [which would include the US]?

COOPER: Yes, they have met three times.

NOVAK: Yet, in your recent paper you state that this committee should remain informal because to formalize ‘this function might well prove offensive to some of the Trilateral and other countries which do not take part.’ Who are you afraid of?

KAISER: Many countries in Europe would resent the dominant role that West Germany plays at these [Trilateral] meetings.

COOPER: Many people still live in a world of separate nations [!], and they would resent such coordination [of policy].

NOVAK: But this [Trilateral] committee is essential to your whole policy. How can you keep it a secret or fail to try to get popular support [for its decisions on how Trilateral member nations will conduct their economic and political policies]?

COOPER: Well, I guess it’s the press’ job to publicize it.

NOVAK: Yes, but why doesn’t President Carter come out with it and tell the American people that [US] economic and political power is being coordinated by a [Trilateral] committee made up of Henry Owen and six others? After all, if [US] policy is being made on a multinational level, the people should know.

COOPER: President Carter and Secretary of State Vance have constantly alluded to this in their speeches.

KAISER: It just hasn’t become an issue.

Source: “Trilateralism: The Trilateral Commission and Elite Planning for World Management,” ed. by Holly Sklar, 1980. South End Press, Boston. Pages 192-3.

Of course, although Kaiser and Cooper claimed everything being manipulated by the Trilateral Commission committee was already out in the open, it wasn’t.

Their interview slipped under the mainstream media radar, which is to say, it was ignored and buried. It didn’t become a scandal on the level of, say, Watergate, although its essence was far larger than Watergate.

US economic and political policy run by a committee of the Trilateral Commission - the Commission had been created in 1973 as an “informal discussion group” by David Rockefeller and his sidekick, Brzezinski, who would become Jimmy Carter’s National Security Advisor.

Shortly after Carter won the presidential election, his aide, Hamilton Jordan, said that if after the inauguration, Cy Vance and Brzezinski came on board as secretary of state and national security adviser, “We have lost. And I will quit.”

Lost - because both men were powerful members of the Trilateral Commission and their appointment to key positions would signal a surrender of White House control to the Commission.

Vance and Brzezinski were appointed secretary of state and national security adviser, as Jordan feared. But he didn’t quit. He became Carter’s chief of staff.

Flash forward again, to the Obama administration.



Related: EXPOSED: CIA – Swamp Monsters Three Factions that Control the World

In the run-up to his inauguration after the 2008 presidential election, Obama was tutored by the co-founder of the Trilateral Commission, Zbigniew Brzezinski.

Four years before birthing the Commission with his boss of bosses, David Rockefeller, Brzezinski wrote:


"[The] nation state as a fundamental unit of man’s organized life has ceased to be the principal creative force. International banks and multinational corporations are acting and planning in terms that are far in advance of the political concepts of the nation state.”

Goodbye, separate nations.

Any doubt on the question of Trialteral goals is answered by David Rockefeller himself, in his Memoirs (2002):


"Some even believe we are part of a secret cabal working against the best interests of the United States, characterizing my family and me as ‘internationalists’ and of conspiring with others around the world to build a more integrated global political and economic structure - one world, if you will. If that is the charge, I stand guilty, and I am proud of it.”



Patrick Wood, author of Trilaterals Over Washington and Technocracy Rising, points out there are only 87 members of the Trilateral Commission who live in America.

Obama appointed eleven of them to posts in his administration. For example:

Tim Geithner, Treasury Secretary;

James Jones, National Security Advisor;

Paul Volker, Chairman, Economic Recovery Committee;

Dennis Blair, Director of National Intelligence.


Here is the payoff. The US Trade Representative (appointed by Obama in 2013), who was responsible for negotiating the Globalist TPP (Trans-Pacific Partnership) treaty with 11 other nations, was Michael Froman, a former member of the Trilateral Commission.

Don’t let the word “former” fool you. Commission members resign when they take positions in the Executive Branch of government. And when they serve in vital positions, such as US Trade Representative, they aren’t there by accident. They’re operatives with a specific agenda.

Flash forward one more time. Trump, who squashed the Globalist TPP treaty as soon as he was inaugurated, has been busy making staff appointments. Patrick Wood writes (2/6/17):


“According to a White House press release, the first member of the Trilateral Commission has entered the Trump administration as the Deputy Assistant to the President for International Economic Affairs, where he will sit on the National Security Council:

Kenneth I. Juster will serve as Deputy Assistant to the President for International Economic Affairs. He will coordinate the Administration’s international economic policy and integrate it with national security and foreign policy. He will also be the President’s representative and lead U.S. negotiator (“Sherpa”) for the annual G-7, G-20, and APEC Summits.”

Juster’s duties will take him into the heart of high-level negotiations with foreign governments on economic policy.

Keep your eye on Mr. Juster. Will he take actions in line with Trump’s avowed anti-Globalist stance? Or will Juster work as one more covert Trilateral operative in the center of American decision-making?

If the answer is “covert operative,” does Trump know this? Does he condone what Mr. Juster will do? Or is this a case of secret infiltration, on behalf the most powerful Globalist group in the world, the Trilateral Commission?



Related: ‘The Black Spider Memos': Prince Charles, Secrecy And The British Government


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
5G Network Being Pushed On The Public With Zero Concern For Safety
April 29 2018 | From: DCClothesline / Various

The FCC (Federal Communications Commission) is pushing to streamline the approval of 5G cell towers, overriding the little regulation that exists to legalize use of experimental high frequencies without extensive safety testing. 



Untested frequencies in the range of 28 gigahertz to 100 Ghz or more are set to be deployed all around us without our consent, emanating from an even greater number of new, smaller cell towers. [While this is an American story - it is universally applicable these days as this technology is in virtually every country.]

Related: 5G Telecomm Radiation The Perfect Tool To Mass Modify Human Brain Waves + More Studies Reveal Dangers


“To make this work, the 5G buildout is going to be very infrastructure intensive, requiring massive deployment of small cells.”

- Tom Wheeler, Former FCC Chairman and corporate lobbyist

Some are talking about using even higher frequencies, in the terahertz range, much higher than previous networks.

A recent statement from Take Back Your Power says:


US FCC wants to “streamline” the approval process for DAS (Distributed Antenna System) 4G/5G ubiquitous cell towers by exempting them from the 1996 Telecommunications Act!

And the US Senate will imminently be voting on S.19 and S.88, to expand DAS 4G/5G deployment!

If such efforts succeed, millions of small cell towers (on existing light poles/utility poles, or new ones) will be deployed everywhere, throughout residential neighborhoods. The millimeter microwave radiation deployed will produce horrific health effects, worsening EVERYONE’s health, and will remove the remaining pollinators.

It’s THAT serious.  The bees in particular will die off rapidly, per studies of bees and microwave radiation.”


According to Dr. Axe:


In essence, 5G will be the mobile networks, often referred to as cell phone towers, that power wireless technology. But get this: As we’re expected to start shifting toward 5G technology around the early 2020s, Federal Communications Commission Chairman Tom Wheeler says we can expect to see a lot more of those mobile towers.

So while we may enjoy anywhere from 10 to 50 times faster connection speeds that help fuel better data consumption, we may in return get millions of new cell phone towers on our street corners. (Our current 4G LTE technology relies on about 200,000 cell phone towers around the U.S.)

But 5G needs a much denser network, meaning many more cell towers of all sizes all over the place. (
3) The fact that these things have never been proven safe - and that worrisome science is cropping up around wireless technology — is cause for concern.

And it seems this 5G plan is full speed ahead. On July 14, 2016, the FCC voted to approve Spectrum Frontiers, making the U.S. the first country in the world to open up higher-frequency millimeter wave spectrum for the development of 5G fifth-generation wireless cellular technology. Environmental Health Trust is voicing concerns because health, safety and environmental evaluations to understand the impact on humans, wildlife and the environment have not been done.

In fact, before the FCC gave 5G the green light, the agency was flooded with comments in opposition to 5G.”




Related: World Health Organization: setting the standard for a wireless world of harm

5G is being presented as the next stage of evolution in communications technology, and being promoted with enthusiastic headlines, such as:


Ericsson and IBM announce 5G ‘breakthrough

5G starts with chips like IBM and Ericsson’s silicon antenna

Forget 5G, new terahertz band can transmit data faster than 100 Gbps

AT&T working on 5G wireless network using Air Gig

Headlines with an alternative perspective read:


Action alert: 5G cellular technology will blanket planetary life with ultra-high microwave frequencies

Story image for 5g danger from Financial Times5G mobile networks speed towards an uncertain future

For background on 5G, watch this video from Take Back Your Power, featuring Tom Wheeler, Former FCC Chairman and corporate lobbyist, who delivers a rather intimidating and presumptuous speech praising this new technology.


FCC: Intimidating Press, Suppressing Science at "5G" Announcement

Is there a clandestine force working behind the scenes in the United States, censoring truth about the "5G" rollout? Watch this - then decide.




But what about the people already suffering with symptoms of EMF radiation from wifi, smart phones, smart meters, and newer vehicles? 

The dangers of certain new technologies, as is the case with some biotech and toxic foods, represent a much more insidious reality: cancer causing, body disrupting frequencies.



Related: Microwave EMF Science: Deliberate Claptrap Misinformation? + ElectroSensitivity - A Case Study

The attitude of such technological innovators is perfectly represented in by Tom Wheeler’s statements, pushing for American exceptionalism, demanding 5G deployment as soon as possible with little to no testing of the effects on human beings or the natural environment.

He says billions of dollars are ‘damn important,’ with the part mentioning billions of dollars mysteriously absent from the speech’s official transcsript.


“If the Commission approves my proposal next month, the United States will be the first country in the world to open up high-band spectrum for 5G networks and applications. And that’s damn important because it means U.S. companies will be first out of the gate.”

At events like this, people reasonably approaching the notion of danger are ostracized, while lobbyists like Tom Wheeler condescendingly say things like “talk to the medical people,” in response to genuine concerns.

The FCC is just like the FDA, CDC, NIH, or EPA: regulatory bodies in bed with the very corporations they claims to be regulating. Companies such as IBM, Verizon and AT&T often wield greater power than government, often working directly with government to create their own rules. 



Related: Gestapo In The USA: FCC Intimidates Press And Kills Free Speech At 5G Rollout

The book, Captured Agency: How the Federal Communications Commission Is Dominated by the Industries It Presumably Regulatesexplains this works.

For a deeper insight into the mainstream narrative of the splendors of cell technologies , this video is a sales pitch for the road 1G to 5G.


From 1G to 4G & Towards 5G - Evolution Of Communication

This is the 2nd part of the series Evolution of communication. Part one is here.


 


We’re already being steered in this direction, forced into a future of smart devices and the internet of things, and it could get so much worse from here. How many rising illnesses, how many symptoms, how many cases of salivary gland cancer, brain cancer, and EMF hypersensitivity will we discover along the way?

As Kevin Mottus said in the above video from Take Back Your Power, we need to fight this with much more persistence.

See the following links for information on the effects of cell technologies, as well as info on what you can do to protect yourself.


“Below is what I call my List of Irrefutability. We can soon reach a turning point, but our voices are each needed at this time. Please quote from and or share these links:”

- Kevin Mottus


1) 1,659 studies on EMF and bioeffects:

powerwatch.org.uk

(Of these:

• 1,032 found effects (most effects being harmful)

• a further 370 had other “important insights or findings”

• only 257 did not find effects.)

2) Additional links with several thousand studies show biological effect and/or harm:

bioinitiative.org

justproveit.net

emf-portal.org

stopsmartmeters.org.uk

3) Harvard Ethics Department ebook, “Captured Agency: How the FCC Is Dominated by the Industries It Presumably Regulates”:

ethics.harvard.edu

4) 2016 Cell Phone Radiation Boosts Cancer Rates in Animals: $25 Million NTP Study Finds Brain Tumors, DNA Breakage

microwavenews.com

5) Watch the ABC Cataylst episode “Wi-Fried”, which got the journalist and entire staff fired due to industry “lobbying”:

Video: vimeo.com

Firing: theguardian.com

6) FCC: intimidating press, suppressing science at “5G” announcement (A report by Josh del Sol)

youtube.com

7) TAKE IMMEDIATE ACTION ON “5G”:

parentsforsafetechnology.org

8) 34 Scientific Studies Showing Adverse Health Effects From Wi-Fi:

wifiinschools.org.uk

9) Radiofrequency science charts to visually compare studies, radiation intensities and biological effects:

bioinitiative.org

10) Apple manual states to keep your iPhone away from your body at all times:

newsweek.com

11) Study: Mobile phones are cooking men’s sperm:

telegraph.co.uk

12) Brain surgeon Dr Charlie Teo warns against mobiles, wireless home appliances:

news.com.au

13) American Academy of Pediatrics warns: Limit children’s exposure to cellphones:

today.com

14) More than 60 international warnings on Wi-Fi and microwave radiation:

safeinschool.org

15) A List of Teacher Unions and Parent Teacher Organizations Taking Action On Wi-Fi (USA, Canada, UK, etc):

safetechforschoolsmaryland.blogspot.com

16) TED Talk from a former Environmental Engineer in Silicon Valley:

youtube.com

17) Insurance giant Swiss RE has given electromagnetic frequencies the HIGHEST possible long term risk rating:

takebackyourpower.net

18) Another insurance giant, Lloyd’s of London, will not insure anything wireless:

naturalhealth365.com

19) Risk Management Magazine – The Invisible Threat: Radiofrequency Radiation Risk

.rmmagazine.com

20) Newsweek – “Cellphone Radiation Warning Sign Sparks First Amendment Battle”

newsweek.com

21) US CDC retracts cellphone radiation warning following pressure from industry lobbyists:

microwavenews.com

22) WHO involved in suppression of additional science showing harm, since 2011:

takebackyourpower.net

23) Study Uncovers How Electromagnetic Fields Amplify Pain in Amputees

utdallas.edu

24) CEO of 1 Billion-dollar U.K. company speaks out on microwave sickness:

youtube.com

25) Dozens of specific scientific abstracts that all show harm:

emfsafetynetwork.org

26) Solutions: Reducing Wirelesss Radiation and EMF

youtube.com

27) Solutions: Reducing Your EMF Exposure

emfanalysis.com


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The World’s Best Economist
April 28 2018 | From: PaulCraigRoberts

If you want to learn real economics instead of neoliberal junk economics, read Michael Hudson’s books.



What you will learn is that neoliberal economics is an apology for the rentier class and the large banks that have succeeded in financializing the economy, shifting consumer spending power from the purchase of goods and services that drive the real economy to the payment of interest and fees to banks.

Related: London School Of Economics – everything but the truth

His latest book is J is for Junk Economics. It is written in the form of a dictionary, but the definitions give you the precise meaning of economic terms, the history of economic concepts, and describe the transformation of economics from classical economics, where the emphasis was on taxing incomes that are not the product of the production of goods and services, to neoliberal economics, which rests on the taxation of labor and production.

This is an important difference that is not easy to understand. Classical economists defined “unearned income” as “economic rent.”

This is not the rent that you pay for your apartment. Economic rent is an income stream that has no counterpart in cost incurred by the receipient of the income stream.

For example, when a public authority, say the city of Alexandria, Virginia, decides to connect Alexandria with Washington, D.C., and with itself, with a subway paid for with public money, the owners of property along the subway line experience a rise in property values.

They owe their increased wealth and their increased incomes from the rental values of their properties to the expenditure of taxpayer dollars. If these gains were taxed away, the subway line could have been financed without taxpayers’ money.



Related: Mr Draghi, what are you afraid of? Release #TheGreekFiles!

It is these gains in value produced by the subway, or by a taxpayer-financed road across property, or by having beachfront property instead of property off the beach, or by having property on the sunny side of the street in a business area that are “economic rents.” Monopoly profits due to a unique positioning are also economic rents.

Hudson adds to these rents the interest that governments pay to bondholders when governments can avoid the issuance of bonds by printing money instead of bonds.

When governments allow private banks to create the money with which to purchase the government’s bonds, the governments create liabilities for taxpayers than are easily avoidable if, instead, government created the money themselves to finance their projects.

The buildup of public debt is entirely unnecessary. No less money is created by the banks that buy government bonds than would be created if the government printed money instead of bonds.

The inability of neoliberal economics to differentiate income streams that are economic rents with no cost of production from produced output makes the National Income and Product Accounts, the main source of data on economic activity in the US, extremely misleading. The economy can be said to be growing because public debt-financed investment projects raise the rents along subway lines.



Related: Goldman Sachs Caught Manipulating US Dollar

“Free market” economists today are different from the classical free market economists. Classical economists, such as Adam Smith, understood a free market to be one in which taxation freed the economy from untaxed economic rents. In neoliberal economics, Hudson explains, “free market” means freedom for rent extraction free of government taxation and regulation. This is a huge difference.

Consequently, today the US economy is focused by policymakers including the Federal Reserve on maximizing rentier income at the expense of the growth in the real economy. Rentier income has the productive economy in a death grip.

The economy cannot grow, because consumer income is siphoned off into payment of interest and fees to banks, and is not available for increased purchases of real goods and services.

Independently I arrived at Hudson’s conclusion that neoliberal economics is a device for ripping off workers and producers in order to convey awards to the rentier class.

Neoliberal economics is a predatory device that justifies the exorbitant incomes of the One Percent while blaming rising debt on those forced into debt-peonage in order to survive.



Hudson’s virtue is that he explains the historical development of debt-peonage and makes it clear that this is the status that the One Percent intends for the 99 Percent. He resurrects classical economics and reformulates economic theory in keeping with the facts on the ground instead of rentier interests.

Hudson is a coauthor of mine. In former times it would have been inappropriate for me to review the work of a colleague. However, the neoliberal apologists for the One Percent are not going to confront themselves with Hudson’s facts. As I do not think that my integrity or Hudson’s is in question, I have no qualms about introducing you to this major work.

Buy the book. Read and study the book. Learn to rise far above corrupt neoliberal economics.


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
What Do Smart Meters And Vaccinations Have In Common? + Another Vaccine Dump
April 27 2018 | From: NaturalBlaze / Various

Jerry Day of Freedom Taker.com has produced an exceptional new video wherein he explains in detail what Smart Meters and Vaccinations have in common.  



It’s called “Conditional Acceptance,” a term and a legal tactic whereby you can refuse anyone who pressures you to sign either an “opt-out” agreement for a Smart Meter or demands you to accept a vaccination.

Related: Del Bigtree: “Our Children Are Being Sold To The Pharmaceutical Industry”

Opt-out contracts are ones big corporations give you when you refuse corporate offers.  Jerry explains what he calls “highway robbery” in this video.

Listen carefully to what Jerry explains, plus take notes, because his logic may be one that you can utilize under “Right of Contract.”  Jerry says;


Always remember that you have Right of Contract. That is the legal term used to describe the fact that on any contract or agreement your signature must be fully voluntary and not coerced in any way. If you’re pressured into signing or agreeing, your signature and agreement technically have no authority or effect."

And legally, there is no contract or agreement if you can show there was coercion or pressure causing you to sign that contract. So your Right of Contract means that you – and only you – may decide whether you sign something or not. And you may not be penalized in any way for refusing to sign anything.

“They [utilities and governments] are criminally violating utility customers – and they know it. So when they refuse to insure the damage, their equipment will cause to you, you have every right to refuse that equipment.

“If the equipment they are installing was really not harmful and did not violate your rights, the insurance would cost almost nothing. But electronic utility meters are known to be hazardous and harmful – so much so that no insurance company will provide insurance for any price [more about insurance here], because they know that advanced utility metering is a ticking time bomb of damages and litigation. Vaccinations represent a very similar situation to utility metering.”


Listen intently to what Jerry says about “Conditional Acceptance” because that’s the bargaining chip in the ‘song and dance’ you will have to engage in to protect yourself and your family from AMI Smart Meter RFs/EMFs, dirty electricity they produce , plus possible fire loss to your home from Smart Meters proclivity to malfunction.

The same logic regarding “Right of Contract” and “Conditional Acceptance” applies with regard to vaccinations.  Jerry delves into vaccinations like you may not have heard before.

Homeowners insurance and health insurance do not cover you for losses from AMI Smart Meters or injured health from receiving a vaccine!  The unfair fact about bullying and harassment from utilities and the medical profession has to be understood fully for what it is:  You are liable for all damages unless you are prepared not to be left helpless and demand your legal rights by taking Jerry’s advice into consideration.

After listening to the above video, please be certain to check out thedownloadable documents A-2 and A-4 regarding Smart Meters. There’s also a Vaccination Notice Jerry talks about.  All are offered as templates at www.FreedomTaker.com.





Related Articles

Yes, they just keep coming - the evidence is in the order of a flood of biblical proportions for this with the eyes to see:

Shocking research confirms vaccines are contaminated with Monsanto's RoundUp herbicide

Anthony Samsel on Vaccines contaminated with Glyphosate

Vaccines: Prevention or Curse?

Vaccination: Serious Concerns

Another Vaccine “Bombshell” Glyphosate – Think Monsanto’s Roundup – Confirmed in Most Vaccines

Intelligent Parents are Refusing Vaccinations

The Average Flu Shot Left This 9-Year-Old Girl Paralyzed And Non-Verbal

Flu deaths continue to mount in people vaccinated against it

Vaccine Quackery Bombshell: Key studies cited to 'prove' vaccines are safe were funded almost entirely by vaccine manufacturers

New vaccines will permanently alter human DNA

New Vaccine Whistleblower Film Premieres To Standing Ovation

How Big Pharma Targets Your Kids!

Actor Rob Schneider Speaks Out Against the Dangers of Vaccines

Shock Report: Testing Reveals Glyphosate Present in Childhood Vaccines





Shocking Research Confirms Vaccines Are Contaminated With Monsanto's RoundUp Herbicide

Folks, I have written about the problems with vaccines in previous blog posts. Now, a new serious contamination problem with our vaccines has been identified.




Researcher Anthony Samsel has published five peer-reviewed articles on the herbicide Glyphosate (the active ingredient in Roundup). A yet-to-be published sixth paper found various commonly-used vaccines contaminated with the herbicide glyphosate.

Yes, you read that correctly: Our vaccines are contaminated with an herbicide that the World Health Organization characterized as"probably carcinogenic to humans."

How can this happen? That answer is easy.

Many vaccines contain animal byproducts such as gelatin, bovine casein, bovine serum, bovine calf serum, or chicken egg protein. The animals from which these products come from are fed grains sprayed with glyphosate. It does not take a rocket scientist to come to the conclusion that these animals, fed glyphosate in their diet, would contain glyphosate in their byproducts.

Samsel sent a letter to Congress that stated:


I have run numerous groups of vaccines and identified several vectors of contamination. These include the excipient gelatins, egg protein and or similar substrates used to grow vaccines.

I have found gelatins and egg proteins contaminated with Glyphosate-based herbicides from animals fed a glyphosate contaminated diet.

This contamination carries into thousands of consumer products i.e. vitamins, protein powders, wine, beer and other consumables which use gelatins as part of the product or in fining and processing."

What did Samsel hear back?

He heard nothing.

In other words, our do-nothing Congress, so far, has failed to respond. In his letter to Congress, Samsel also stated that Glyphosate is a synthetic amino acid. It bioaccumulates and is found in all tissue types, particularly the bone and marrow of animals fed a diet contaminated with Glyphosate residues.

You can see Dr. Samsel talk about his research by clicking here.


The following vaccines were found to be contaminated with the herbicide glyphosate:

1. MMR

2. Varicella (chicken pox)

3. Zostavax (shingles)

4. Proquad (MMR, rubella, varicella)

5. Fluzone Quad (flu vaccine)

6. Hepatitis B (B Energix-B)



Multiple vaccines from different manufactures were found to be contaminated. Folks, this is a big deal. Injecting a vaccine contaminated with a known herbicide that is "probably carcinogenic to humans" should be prohibited. We need a Congressional investigation into our vaccines.

We keep hearing the mantra that vaccines are safe. Injecting a vaccine containing an herbicide is safe? Give me a break!



It is time to call your political representatives and tell them to investigate this matter. I can assure you that it is not safe to inject a known neurotoxin such as mercury or aluminum. Nor is it safe to inject a known carcinogen such as formaldehyde.

Guess what? It is not safe to inject an herbicide that is a probable human carcinogen.

Follow Dr. Brownstein's blog for more great articles by clicking here.



Anthony Samsel on Vaccines contaminated with Glyphosate

Scientists Anthony Samsel and Stephanie Seneff have just gotten the fifth peer reviewed paper on Glyphosate published. Its named "Glyphosate pathways to modern diseases V: Amino acid analogue of glycine in diverse proteins".

In this regard Tony Mitra interviewed Anthony Samsel, to cover the newly emerging scientific findings on Glyphosate and how it can and does hurt creatures including humans.

In the course of the interview, Anthony Samsel mentioned the issues being covered in their next paper, the 6th one. This covers a number of vaccines that use animal byproducts such as egg protein and gelatine. He suspected these products might be contaminated with Glyphosate, if the vaccine makers were using factory farmed animals fed with Glyphosate laced GMO feed.

To verify, he got a large number of vaccines that do use egg proteins and gelatine and got them analyzed in multiple labs. The results confirmed his doubt. The vaccines themselves are largely contaminated with Glyphosate and pose serious hazard to those that are and will be vaccinated using these products.






Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Monetary System: Downward Slide Into Tyranny, Slavery, And Self-Destruction
April 26 2018 | From: FinalWakeUpCall

The Deep State Cartel: How does the current system work? It creates “money” out of thin air; controlled by the puppet-governments and central banksters; which ends up in the hands of Deep State cronies and the elite.


It creates an economy that runs on credit, not real wealth or real output. It can only grow by increasing the level of debt, and is thereby damned to its own destruction.

Related: Real Money: Economic law demands that the golden Dawn is upon us

But, the Central Bankers won’t impose self-restraint; instead, they facilitate more deficit spending; the Deep State needs it.

There are only two major threats to this system;

Debt levels cannot increase infinitely. Sooner or later the whole system will blow up.

Political: A determined, disruptive politician might be able to slow it down, but will unlikely be able to reform it.

The system is the biggest financial fraud in the history of mankind. It has transferred [in the US alone], over the last four decades, at least $15 trillion from the people who earned it, to the rich and the Deep State elite, resulting in the total household debt climbing $193 billion in the fourth quarter of 2017 to a record $14.5 trillion.

It has now risen for 14 consecutive quarters and five straight years. It now sits just shy of $500 billion more than the previous peak in the third quarter of 2008, that initiated the collapse and crisis of 2008.

Credit-card debt once again led the way. It rose 3.2% in a quarter to $834 billion. Student and auto loans increased 1.5% and 0.7%, respectively, to a record $1.38 trillion and $1.22 trillion. And even mortgage debt climbed substantially for the first time in several quarters, up 1.6% to $8.88 trillion.



Related: The Trillion Dollar Lawsuit

Instead of the 10% savings rate that was customary in the 1970s, 1980s, and 1990s, household savings dropped to a near-record low of 2.4% last year. Readers are reminded that savings are the key to economic growth and prosperity.

Without savings, you live hand to mouth; consuming all that you produce.

Gradually, the machinery, pastures, and roads degrade. They must be continually maintained, renewed, with new factories and new businesses that offer jobs, compete in the market, and create wealth. Without savings, progress stops, and then reverses.

To keep the credit money system alive, for over 30-years, central banksters have intentionally discouraged savings.



Related: More Confessions Of An Economic Hit Man: "This Time, They’re Coming For Your Democracy"

The difference between a rich country and a poor country is the level of savings – stored up capital – that is available for business and consumer use. Nowadays this trend is unsustainable. Sooner or later, it will end completely, and one of the largest credit-default cycles in history will begin.

This credit money monetary system has corrupted all institutions, all markets, our culture, politicians and governments. It is supported by all politicians, the mainstream media, academics, economists, international organisations such as the UN, the IMF, and the World Bank, by the “defence”, “education”, and “medical care” industries – all put in quotations to signal the deep scepticism that they are doing what they claim to be doing, and last but not least, most importantly, by Wall Street, and the TBTF banking industry.

In short, these are the Deep State institutions which rule over us. These are the great forces in our world which prevent positive change and ensure that we continually slide downward into tyranny, slavery, and self-destruction.


The International Banking Cartel

The geopolitical financial elite have for centuries been organising the consolidation of the mechanisms of wealth into the hands of a very few. The Rothschilds are the popular face of this cartel, but the banking and financial corruption goes far, far beyond their influence.

“The few who understand the system, will either be so interested in its profits or so dependent on its favours, that there will be no opposition from that class.” - Rothschild Brothers of London, 1863



Related: The Bankers’ Scam - The Power Of Money: Beat The Bankers Through Debt Termination & Commonwealth Bank Of Australia: One Of The Largest Banks In The World Just Accused Of Laundering Millions For Drug Cartels

Banks are in a unique position of power in our world, and can generate extraordinary profits without actually producing anything. Through the issuance of currency and credit, they can control the amount of money available to the economy and create economic booms and busts, seizing titles to land, homes, businesses, and property.

They hold extraordinary influence over government for their role as financiers of everything from public works to war, and enjoy extraordinary monetary advantages and privileges.

Combine this with the new influence of supra-national organisations like the Bank of International Settlements – BIS in Basel, and the World Bank, and you realise that the world is on the cusp of falling into the greatest trap of all time. The banking cartel is the primary instigator of wars, destabilisation and military grade destruction in our world today.


The Medical Establishment

Human health has been hijacked by the medical mafia establishment, which forces people into an extraordinarily expensive program of dependence on insurance companies, pharmaceutical companies, and other allopathic health service providers.

Deliberately, the medical industry is also a major cause of premature death for people as malpractice, drug overdoses, botched up procedures and poor patient care contribute to these statistics. Medical errors alone are the third leading cause of death in the world.

“Throughout the world, medical errors leading to patient death is an under-recognised epidemic.”

Dr Martin Makary and his co-author, Dr Michael Daniel, both of Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine published an article in the British Medical Journal.



Related: Big Pharma’s Control Over The News & How Big Pharma Controls Medical Schools

They define medical errors as lapses in judgment, skill or coordination of care; mistaken diagnoses; system failures that lead to patient deaths or the failure to rescue dying patients; and preventable complications of care.

Furthermore, the government deliberately serves these corporate interests by limiting and preventing information and access to services and natural and homeopathic healing modalities, which may produce positive or even better results without dependence on hospitals and physicians.

Likewise, this cartel actually contributes knowingly to human misery by pumping deadly drugs like opioids across the globe, scheming to get as many people as possible addicted in order to cut greater profits
.


The Energy Industry

Raping the planet for fossil fuel energy is something that has been going on for decades, but is finally now beginning to create a substantial blowback as environmental destruction is proving to be something that cannot be ignored any longer.

There is an energy crisis because governments have created it. The mainstream media, controlled by the cabal, alias the ‘deep state’, obviously has never asked itself the obvious question:

‘Why is it that for a century or more before 1971 there were no energy crises, except during WW2, and the 1956 Suez crisis?



Related: Ontario Pulls Plug On 36,000 Rural ‘Smart’ Meters: Is Big Energy Imploding? & This Former Techie Owes His
Fortune To Electronic Devices - Now He Thinks They're Dangerous


Consumers have not suddenly become wasteful, and there have certainly been harsh winters in the past. Arab sheikhs have desired wealth as far back as human memory goes.

Ever since president Nixon uncoupled the gold connection with the US dollar in 1971, the US government has imposed maximum prices on crude oil and related products.

Be aware of the fact that the deep state fights against the rest of us – to hold onto its power, its money, and its reputation. The deep state’s money system will cut off funds to anyone who challenges it, and it diverts the nation’s output to itself. Watch the plain clothes! It is a nightmare, that’s true!


Free Energy:

The world would embrace and use free energy technology to solve all these problems, but the deep state, or more precisely the Rothschilds and Rockefellers, being the major owners of Big Oil, have boycotted the inventions of Nicola Tesla from the very beginning. Progress in this field has been boycotted since its inception about one hundred years ago.

But once the world is liberated of the cabal and freed from their manipulations, people will not only be able to enjoy free energy, but also other very advanced technologies; such as suppressed healing systems, water purification methods, better schooling of true quality; absolute freedom, a free market and complete independence

Unfortunately, for now, governments still suppress these technologies.


Next Best is Nuclear Energy

Nuclear with coal are the cheapest forms of energy. The nuclear industry is perfectly content to continue the pursuit of nuclear power, even in the face of the false flag catastrophes like Fukushima, which is used to demonstrate that nuclear energy simply cannot be contained and is a threat to all life on planet earth. Complete nonsense of course!

After years of doom and gloom, market distorting bailouts, ineffective stimulus packages, etc. governments should seriously turn to third generation nuclear energy that will be the real saviour for the economy, the job creator per excellence and greening the environment in the process.



Related: Declassified Documents Reveal Pentagon’s 1950's Planned Nuclear Holocaust: “Systemic Destruction” And
Annihilation Of Prague, Warsaw, Budapest, Moscow, Beijing - More Than 1000 Cities


There is major growth in alternative or renewable energy, like wind and solar generators that are being built all over the world but these are far more expensive than coal or nuclear, while due to lack of continuity in the supply, only a small amount is added to the overall power demand.

The oil cartel has shaped our world in dramatic ways, most notably by creating near universal dependence on the automobile as the primary form of transportation, which has shaped both our cities and our mind-sets.

The never-ending push for oil exploration is killing the most precious environmental resources we have left, but the influence of the energy cartel is so great that it can practically buy entire nations, such as Ecuador, where foreign oil ventures are allowed to press ever further into the Amazon, where a new round of oil drilling goes deeper into Ecuador’s Yasuní national park. A state oil company has started second phase drilling in one of the world’s most bio diverse hotspots.


Agricultural Chemical Producers

Over the last 75 years, the industrial agro chemical giants have completely and detrimentally changed the face of farming on planet earth.

Family farms continue to go under at a record-pace and it is clear that the endgame of companies like Monsanto and Bayer is to own the patents to all food seeds, to become the dominators over a planet where people are prosecuted for planting their own food crops.



Related: Heartbreaking Letter From Dying EPA Scientist Begs Monsanto “Moles” Inside The Agency To Stop Lying About
Dangers Of RoundUp (Glyphosate) & Monsanto Funneled Money To Front Groups To Attack Anti-GMO Activists, Court Documents Reveal

This is quite startling, and when coupled with the fact that seed biodiversity is collapsing all around us, it may only be another ten years before this endgame is realised.

In addition to seed domination, these companies are polluting the world in incredible ways by pressing for the excessive use of toxic chemicals like glyphosate and other herbicides which are killing pollinator insects, destroying the soil and causing dreadful health problems for people living near farms.


The Information Industrial Complex

In 1961, outgoing President Dwight D. Eisenhower coined the term “military-industrial complex” to describe the fascistic conspiracy between the Pentagon and America’s burgeoning armaments industry. But in our day and age we are witnessing the rise of a new collusion, one between the Pentagon and the tech industry that it helped to seed.



Related: CNN Exposed As Propaganda Ministry For The DNC And Military/Security Complex

Together they are committed to waging a covert war against all people the world over. Now, in the 21st century, it is time to give this new threat a name: the information-industrial complex. In this video James Corbett explains the rise of this powerful institution.

Wake up! Everyone, everywhere! Wake up! You’ve been robbed, abused, bamboozled by some pedantic Wordsmiths. They are deluding and confusing you about what is really going on regarding What, Who, How and Why?





Related Articles:

CAFR Update: How The New Zealand Government Hides Billions (Trillions) In Slush Funds

Democracy Is A Front For Central Bank Rule & Financial Starvation In A Fiat Debt Slavery Financial System


How The Oil Industry Conquered Medicine, Finance And Agriculture

$21 Trillion Of Unauthorized Spending By US Government Discovered By Economics Professor

Jeremy Corbyn threatens to make bankers 'servants of industry' in fresh attack on the City


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Geoengineering And Weather Modification Exposed
April 25 2018 | From: ClimateViewer / Various

The most extensive research on Geoengineering and Weather Modification experiments worldwide, with articles, maps, and timelines to fully expose the hidden world of Weather Control.


This page is a table of contents for Jim Lee’s research on Geoengineering. All of the information on this page is backed up by references, feared by trolls and geoengineering lobbyists alike, and is the most accurate literature on who’s controlling your weather, why they are doing it, and where.

Related: Chemtrails & Geoengineering

For the uninitiated, prepare yourself to be shocked.  For you veterans of the Climate Engineering activism world, our articles, maps, and timelines will answer many of your burning questions and help you connect the dots.

As the media distributes pro-geoengineering propaganda in a political climate ruled by fear, the Lord’s of Weather (geoengineering lobbyist’s) are suggesting coating our skies with sulfur, aluminum, titanium, and diamond dust to block the sun and cool our planet.

While acknowledging that Geoengineering Solar Radiation Management will alter rainfall patterns worldwide and likely kill people, the Lord’s of Weather ignore the cold hard facts: after 60 years of cloud-seeding, nobody has ever produced any proof of its efficacy.



Related: Epic Video: Three Chemtrail Tankers Filmed Spraying From Above, Air-To-Air & Legal And Governmental
Representatives Speak Out About Geoengineering


Billions of dollars are spent worldwide altering clouds with silver iodide and other chemical nano-particles despite the fact that cloud seeding likely does not work. Even worse, all of the separate cloud seeding programs worldwide could be altering our weather in dangerous ways where the butterfly effects of aggravated clouds destroy property and end lives, even the CIA is worried about weather warfare.

Despite numerous lawsuits over weather modification activities, most losses are blamed on “nature” as there is little transparency or accountability.  With a cloud-seeding’s terrible track record, how could anyone support geoengineering SRM’s uncontrolled global weather manipulations. To make matters worse, Bill Gate’s geoengineering money is also funding Hurricane Hacking efforts blurring the lines between Geoengineering and Weather Modification.

Geoengineering the sky has been a worldwide phenomenon since the start of commercial aviation. Ships and jet aircraft are covering our skies in man-made clouds.  



Related: What Are Chemtrails And How Are They Harming Our Food And Water? + Nuclear Chemist Publishes Paper
Detailing: “Aluminum Poisoning Of Humanity Via Geoengineering”


Despite 60 years of jet planes making clouds, aviation-induced cloudiness, persistent contrails, contrail cirrus, and aerosol-cloud interaction are barely understood with today’s best supercomputers and are not properly accounted for in IPCC models.  

The aviation industry knows this, and jet aircraft-produced contrail cirrus clouds are now being actively experimented on using two main concepts: doping jet fuel with sulfur and cirrus cloud seeding to melt these clouds away.  Contrail cirrus clouds trap heat and likely are a greater threat than CO2 so scientists are experimenting with jet biofuels and flight routing to engineer clouds that cool the planet.

This active experiment goes on everyday, over your heads, with over 100,000 flights a day worldwide and zero accountability.

Space Weather Modification is also gaining more publicity.  When upper atmospheric nuclear explosions were banned back in the 1950’s, the U.S. military still hell bent on replacing our fickle ionosphere with something more reliable decided to dump millions of needles in space to create their own.  



Related: What Is This GWEN Tower Really For? + ELF, GWEN Towers, And HAARP Connection

The West Ford Needles project failed, and to this day millions of needles can be found floating in space or buried in ice at our poles.  Next the military began using sounding rockets and satellites to create heavy ion clouds in space by dumping Barium, Strontium, and Sulfur Hexaflouride into our ionosphere.  

Military radio technicians could heat these chemical releases in space with the ionospheric heater at Arecibo, Puerto Rico and “see” our ionosphere.

 Today, the top ionospheric heater worldwide HAARP fires electromagnetic missiles into our Van Allen belts and scrapes out radiation using the “Christofilos Effect” learned back in the 1950’s nuclear blasts.

Dubbed “radiation belt remediation” ionospheric heaters are sold to politicians and the public as a back up plan for Solar Flares or High Altitude Electromagnetic Pulse attacks, however foreign governments are very concerned about the military capabilities of these ionospheric heaters, with the Russian government going as far as to say HAARP could “have a negative impact on the mental health of people populating entire regions.”



Related: Nurse Testimony On Chemtrail Health Consequences - Cathy Gable Global Chemtrail Summit

Despite these dire warnings, the practice of heating chemical releases in space is just “a conspiracy theory.”

This page is an effort to raise awareness of atmospheric experimentation and to lobby for transparency in the geoengineering and weather modification industries, and hopefully to see an end to weather control efforts, both intentional and unintentional, in hopes that one day my child will see natural weather.

Let one thing in nature stay natural, hand’s off our sky.


Learn the history of weather modification with our Interactive Timeline

Learn about current geoengineering projects check out our map.

Get involved in Ken Caldeira’s Geoengineering Group like I have: read my comments

Tell people about this page and share with your friends!

Spread the word about our solution, “The Clarity Clause” and help us make this law a reality!


Please watch and download the PowerPoint of my explosive presentation given at the Freedom Force International’s 3rd Congress in Phoenix, Arizona. December 3, 2016:


Geoengineering, Weather Modification, and Weaponizing Nature





Who’s Pushing Geoengineering SRM?

Check out ETC Group’s World of Geoengineering spreadsheet.

See this Google Fusion Table



Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window

Related: Geoengineering Programs


Geoengineering SRM Sponsors & Authors



Related: Geoengineering programs, proposals, experiments, field trials, and weather modification programs worldwide

Oldham P, Szerszynski B, Stilgoe J, Brown C, Eacott B, Yuille A. 2014. Mapping the landscape of climate engineering. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. A 372, 20140065 (doi:10.1098/rsta.2014.0065) [PMC free article] [PubMed]


Weather Modification and Geoengineering Fact Sheets



Related: Geoengineering researchers, universities, companies, and weather modification derivatives trading


Geoengineer Ken Caldeira Gets Caught Lying *Loses Temper*

After lying about weaponizing the weather, has audio played back to him to prove it, then lies again. After being confronted yet again about this fact, he completely loses it and tells the interviewer to shut the f*** up!




Related Articles:

Climate Change and Geoengineering: Artificially Cooling Planet Earth by Thinning Cirrus Clouds

The Clarity Clause: A Solution

Geoengineering with Cirrus Cloud Seeding

A stunning admission from the scientific community

Chemtrails From SPACE! The Past (1950-1978) part 1

Climate change scientists launch geoengineering experiment that may accidentally cause global famine


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Fourteen Ways To Protect Yourself From The New World Order (NWO) Agenda
April 25 2018 | From: WakeUpWorld

Desperate measures are indeed needed for desperate times. Big black totalitarian clouds loom on the horizon.




The price of ignorance towards the New World Order (NWO) agenda could be very costly. The psychopathic ruling elite own the banks, weapons, gold, drugs and oil, while having the politicians, police, military and mass media etc. in their pockets, and are further tightening that unrelenting grip on the control of our money, health, food, water, air, and all the related science and technology, for complete domination over the human populace. 

Related: The Death Throws Of The Cabal

Fall for any of its carefully cultivated illusions and you could end up broke, losing property, seriously ill, or even end up dead.

In response, this is my heartfelt advice on how to prepare for your survival in the unpredictable, not too distant (potential) future. Here are 14 ways to protect you, your family and friends from the escalating NWO agenda.


14 Ways to Protect Youself from the NWO Agenda

1. Stop Giving Attention to Corporate Sponsored  News

Switch off the TV (Tel-Lie-Vision). Turn to select alternative media sources instead for the truth.



Learn to research and discern the differences between disinformation and the truth
, especially in the case of the internet.

2. Stop Voting For Any of the Major Political Parties

By voting for one of the major political parties, you’re only giving your power away to help the ruling criminals further advance their NWO agenda.

Stop believing the left/right sock puppet campaigning shows, all of which are backed and financed by T.H.E.Y (The Hierarchy Enslaving You). 

It doesn’t matter who gets voted in
 - they’re all funded and backed by the ruling elite. Whomever wins, the politicians who sit in office will only be there to serve their lords and masters, the ruling elite, instead of the wishes of we-the-people.

Yes, there are a growing number of people who know this, but many still don’t fully understand: Any advantages of selecting one party over the other because of say, a policy in your favour or advantage, such as a tax cut, will only be a short-term payoff.

In the end, if you vote for one of the major parties then you’ll only have to suffer the far greater long-term cost of having chosen a party or so-called representative with connections to the ruling elite’s agenda.


3. Detoxify Yourself

Use specific foods as well as supplements to detoxify yourself of lifelong body pollution. Restore health and protect the body by removing fluoride, chloride, bromide, heavy metals (including toxins from chemtrails/geoengineering), EMFs, radiation and other noxious substances.

4. Drink Good Clean or Filtered Water

Avoid chemically-impregnated tap water and plastic bottled water.



Use filters such as those using reverse osmosis to filter the water. Drink adequate amounts and keep your body well hydrated.

5. Eat Organic Food

Eat plenty of organic fruit and vegetables, seeds and nuts. Don’t begrudge the extra cost. In the long run it’s worth it, because you will be ingesting nutrient-dense food without the toxins.

For more information please see:

Buying Organic Food on a Budget – How to Go Organic without Going Broke

Here’s What Happens When You Eat a 100% Organic Diet


6. Avoid Junk Food!

Avoid junk food with its high sugar, salt and cheap/nasty trans-fats and chemical flavor enhancers which will not only not protect you from disease states — it will add to them, even causing depression!

Chemical laden, processed, irradiated or GMO foods should be avoided. (For more information, please see: Video: What Happens In Your Body When You Eat Processed Foods.)

Avoid cooking with a microwave oven, and with non-stick coated or aluminium utensils, which in effect turns the food into junk food and could lead to health problems through toxic contaminants.

Also, don’t cook food using high temperatures for too long. Extreme temperatures cause the nutritional value (vitamins and enzymes in particular) to denature and greatly reduces the food value. Keep the heat down!

7. Use Natural or Organic Home and Personal Care Products

By uing organic products in your home and on your body, you avoid absorbing the toxic chemicals often found in non-organic personal care products.

For more information please see:

Skin Science – Debunking Cosmetic Industry Propaganda

Loving Your Skin – 10 Essential Natural Topical Treatments

Toxic Products to Ban From Your Home – Plus Healthier Alternatives to Help You Do It

8. Avoid Low Frequency EMF’s (Electromagnetic Frequencies) Radiation

Common sources of EMF radiation include power grid lines, cell phones and towers, Wi-Fi sources, laptops, microwaves, breast cancer mammograms, body scanner x-ray detectors (such as those at airports), and compact fluorescent lighting (use clear or white LED lighting instead).

Don’t fall for the corporate sponsored junk science brigade claiming that these EMF sources and their applications are okay. Anyone with a couple of investigative brain cells to rub together will find out that frequent long-term use has been known to cause a range of serious illnesses related to cancer, nervous, hormonal and behavioural problems.

For more information, please see: 

It’s True: You Really Can Protect Yourself Against Electromagnetic Radiation – Here’s How

9. Avoid Vaccines and Vaccinations

Vaccines are NOT safe and are known to be ineffective. As countless examples have proven, you could end up seriously ill, brain-damaged or even dead from these fraudulent big pharma money spinners about which the revenue-raking government and their paid-off media are only too happy to spread their related disinformation and lies.

For more information, please see: 

Vaccination’s Dilemma: “Unavoidably Unsafe” at Any Dose

Independent Journalist Ben Swann Blows the Lid on CDC Vaccine Cover-Up

Herd Immunity vs. Viral Shedding: Who’s Infecting Whom?


10. Don’t Fall for Joining the Military

Don’t become a sucker for the ruling elite’s wars, which are secretly manufactured for power, profit, political gain, and a planned population reduction agenda.



I know, like other things mentioned in my list, this may come as quite a shock to some people.

For more information, please see:

The Conspiracy of War - Power, Profit, Propaganda and Imperialism

Top 10 Indications That ISIS is a US/Israeli Creation

The Real Terrorists: The 0.01%

11. Have Toxic Amalgam Fillings Removed

Mercury amalgam fillings have been known to cause brain damage, lower IQ, contribute to depression and harbour disease-causing bacteria. See a biologic or holistic dentist to get them removed and replaced by safe alternatives such as Zirconium Implants (don’t use metal based or plastic BPA resins). Don’t support dentists who use mercury amalgam or fluoride.

Dental decay can be prevented with good nutrition, like for example using coconut oil as a mouthwash since it contains the antibacterial lauric acid.

12. Maintain Well-Stocked Supplies of Food and Water

In case of a crisis stock up with a few weeks’ supply of food and water in the hope that, by then, things would have died down with normal supply somewhat resumed.



Such a crisis could be a financial one, like a currency collapse, or a fake war, a staged attack (fake alien invasion perhaps, you never know?) or a HAARP (High Frequency Auroral Research Project) secret weather modification… etc used for inducing chaos by the ruling elite and their associates as an excuse to declare martial war on citizens.

In most cases, within three days of a ‘lock down’ (likely less if panic and rioting sets in) all purchasable food supplies will be gone.

13. Maintain Self-Sufficiency

In line with point #12, grow your own food. There are indeed many excellent websites advising how this can be done. I have been saying that self-sufficiency, especially in the way of home-grown food, is a major factor in workable communities. Discernment and unity are other major factors.

Have sufficient physical cash on standby in case of emergency: You may want to consider converting some of your hard earned cash into gold or silver coins as a good investment.

Try looking at non-power grid alternative energy supplies to power up your home. How about solar panels or batteries or supplemental wind generators… etc? Electric vehicles would also not be a bad idea.

For more information, please visit Wake Up World’s Survival and Disaster Preparation page, or check out the following articles:

Survival Basics: 12 Tips for Families with Children

The Greenhouse of the Future - Grow Your Own Food Year-Round With This Revolutionary System

14. Spread the Word!


"Those who have the privilege to know, have the duty to act.”

- Albert Einstein

Wake up! Use this and other similar articles to spread the word to your family and friends. Get active. If you do nothing, you’ll be unprepared and risk suffering the awful consequences of the escalating NWO agenda.


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Why Does Modern Medicine Have A Big Problem With Natural Health?
April 24 2018 | From: NaturalBlaze

Well, there is the money, of course.



When millions of people forego expensive and toxic medical drugs; when they rarely see conventional doctors; when they don’t receive vaccinations and don’t have their children vaccinated; when they opt for natural remedies; when, worst of all, THEY STAY HEALTHY, this is a hammer blow to drug-based medicine.


Related:
How Big Pharma Greed Is Killing Tens Of Thousands Around The World

These “natural health” people are also going against The Plan, which is a cradle-to-grave system, whereby humans are diagnosed with 30 or 40 diseases and disorders during their lifetime - requiring large amounts of toxic and debilitating drugs - and then they die.

Note: The effects of the drugs are labeled “diseases,” which in turn are treated with more harmful drugs, resulting in new diagnoses of “diseases,” and so on. It’s a self-feeding, self-replicating parade of destruction.

You can see the final stages in nursing homes, where the elderly are warehoused. On their night tables are a dozen or so drugs. The tragic end-game.

This pathetic, vicious, pseudoscientific medical assault is praised to the skies, as “the best” in human care. On television, hired hands parade through show after show, insisting that modern medicine is the most brilliant program ever devised for the human race.

At the same time, untold millions of people who opt for natural health expose, by their choices, this titanic lie.



Related: The Hypnotic Symbols Of Modern Medicine

Here is how medical propaganda works, in the big picture. When delivered by competent caring personnel, acute crisis emergency care can produce remarkable results. People who have been damaged in accidents, who develop sudden life-threatening situations (unconnected to medical drugs) can be put back together. However…

Propagandists then parlay this specific success by pretending it applies over the whole field of medical practice, in every aspect. This assertion is absurd, false, and highly dangerous.

The case of a person who is lying in the road after a car crash, and a person who is suffering from chronic immune-system weakness, are as far apart from each other as an ant in Idaho and a rocket on the moon.

The propagandists’ job is to make these two people “the same.” They both need medical care, and medical care is wonderful. The big lie.

More and more people are waking up to this deception, and they are pursuing non-medical means to arrive at a better state of health and maintain it.

The scale is tipping in the direction of natural health–herbs, nutritional supplements, proper food, exercise, clean water, “alternative” practitioners.

Medical propaganda is on a long decline of failure. That problem is very worrying to the medical cartel.



Related: Here’s How Industry-Funded “Research” Is Making Us Sick And Fat + Like Tobacco And Big Pharma, The Sugar Industry Has Manipulated Research For 50 Years

When you’ve had populations under your control for a long time, with the simplest kind of public relations; when you’ve been very sure your tactics were working; when you’ve blasted the same messages with the same rewarding results; you suffer from overconfidence.

When your tactics don’t work anymore, you don’t know what to do.

Your only option is trying to MANDATE medical treatment. You put populations in a box. You demand they obey.

Now you’re heading toward a showdown. At what point will your prisoners decide they’ve had enough?

Here is a statement to shake up the princes of modern medicine:


“The combined death rate from scarlet fever, diphtheria, whooping cough and measles among children up to fifteen shows that nearly 90 percent of the total decline in mortality between 1860 and 1965 had occurred before the introduction of antibiotics and widespread immunization.

In part, this recession may be attributed to improved housing and to a decrease in the virulence of micro-organisms, but by far the most important factor was a higher host-resistance due to better nutrition.”

- Ivan Illich, Medical Nemesis, Bantam Books, 1977

For decades, authors have been punching holes in medical myths. Their efforts have not gone in vain. Educated readers have been taking their findings to heart.

The truth has been trickling up, down, and sideways in the culture. Remember, we are talking about people’s view of, and concern for, their own bodies. There is nothing abstract about this. The desire for knowledge is intimate.



Related: Explosive: A Review Of Fake Medical Tests

The empty word from on high, spouted by experts, can easily take a back seat. When the issue is pain and suffering vs. well-being, people will shrug off what they’re supposed to think and they will dig for answers.

Here are several statements from a widely beloved American physician, Robert Mendelsohn. During his life, his views served to awaken readers all over the world:


“Modern Medicine would rather you die using its remedies than live by using what physicians call quackery.”

“Almost half of the 100,000 or so surgeons we actually do have right now are superfluous. Those 50,000 or so extra unsheathed scalpels do a lot of damage.”

“The greatest threat of childhood diseases lies in the dangerous and ineffectual efforts made to prevent them through mass immunization…..

There is no convincing scientific evidence that mass inoculations can be credited with eliminating any childhood disease.”

“When I was Senior Pediatric Consultant to the Department of Mental Health in Illinois, I cut out a certain kind of operation that was being performed on mongoloid children with heart defects. The stated purpose of the operation was to improve oxygen supply to the brain.

The real purpose, of course, was to improve the state’s residency programs in cardiovascular surgery [by training new surgeons], because nothing beneficial happened to the brains of mongoloid children - and the surgeons knew that.

The whole idea was absurd. And deadly, since the operation had a fairly high mortality rate. Naturally, the university people were very upset when I cut out the operation.

They couldn’t figure out a better use for the mongoloid children, and, besides, it was important to train people. In prepaid group practices where surgeons are paid a steady salary not tied to how many operations they perform, hysterectomies and tonsillectomies occur only about one-third as often as in fee-for-service situations.”

“I can remember when if a hospital’s incidence of Caesarean deliveries went above four or five percent, there was a full scale investigation. The present level is around twenty-five percent. There are no investigations at all. And in some hospitals the rate is pushing fifty percent.”

“Today your child has about as much chance of contracting diphtheria as he does of being bitten by a cobra.”

[In the DPT vaccine, the “D” stands for diphtheria.]

Mendelsohn, Ivan Illich, and many other rebel authors have cut across the full range of medical propaganda. They’ve raised red flags on every front. You can’t overestimate the effect they’ve had.

In private meetings, medical cartel front men complain, “The people aren’t listening to us!” They’re right. That’s what happens when gross lies and deceptions are spread out across the planet.

You can diagnose and damage some of the people some of the time, but you can’t damage all the people all the time.


Related Articles:

How Rockefeller Founded Big Pharma And Waged War On Natural Cures

Another Natural Remedy For Alcoholism And Depression? South American Psychedelic Herb Promotes
Feelings Of Well-Being, According To New Study



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Australian Banking Scandal: New Zealand Regulator In talks With Financial Firms
April 24 2018 | From: NewZealandHerald

The financial sector watchdog says it is in talks with Australia's major banks and financial services firms about the implications for their New Zealand arms in the wake of Australia's banking inquiry which has exposed a series of scandals.



The Royal Commission into Misconduct in the Banking, Superannuation and Financial Services Industry will head into its second week of hearings in Australia this week, probing issues around financial advice.


Related:
Overseas Banking Villains Suck New Zealanders’ Wealth Offshore

Last week's hearings saw the inquiry claim its first scalp after AMP chief executive Craig Meller resigned on Friday and the company issued an apology after revelations that it had charged people for advice they never received.

Earlier in the week the inquiry heard that advisers from Commonwealth Bank of Australia, the parent of ASB bank, charged dead clients for financial advice - in one case for a decade.

ANZ, Westpac and National Australia Bank, which owns BNZ, are due to appear this week to face allegations about inappropriate financial advice and improper conduct.

The advice hearing is the second in a series of three public hearings for the Royal Commission, which is being headed up by Judge Kenneth Hayne.



Related: Banks Are Stealing Our Future? How To Put An End?

Last month the major banks were also raked over the coals for controversial consumer lending practices which spanned mortgages, car finance, credit cards and insurance add-on products.

A third hearing on lending to small business and the agricultural sector will be heard next month.

Hayne is due to produce an interim report on the inquiry by September which could have major implications for New Zealand, where the major banks are all Australian-owned, and financial services company AMP also has a strong presence.

A spokesman for the Financial Markets Authority said it was monitoring the developments at the Royal Commission closely and was in close contact with the Australian regulator ASIC.


Related Articles:

Black Magic: Satanists Rule The World, Not Politicians, Bankers Or Military Heads [Although They Are
Usually All One And The Same] + Another Illuminati Whistleblower Speaks Out


Who Owns New Zealand's Banks?


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
A Conversation On Race And Identity Politics
April 23 2018 | From: PaulCraigRoberts

We often hear that we need a conversation on race.



Considering that Americans are a brainwashed people living in a false history, such a conversation would resemble the one the Russians were expected to have with the British in regard to the Skripal poisoning: “Yes, we are guilty. We will pay reparations.

Related:
Is Identity Politics Brewing a Holocaust?

Where would you like us to send Putin for trial?” In other words, the only acceptable race conversation in the US is one in which white people accept the accusation that they are racist and offer to make amends.

Considering that the only slavery experienced by any living black or white person is income tax slavery, race is an issue only because it has been orchestrated as an issue along with gender and sexual preference.

These divisive issues are the products of Identity Politics spawned by cultural Marxism.

In real Marxism, conflict is class conflict. Workers and capitalists have different interests, and history is a struggle between material interests. The capitalist is the villain and the workers are the victims.

In the pseudo Marxism of Identity Politics, the white race is the villain, especially the white heterosexual male, and racial minorities, women, and homosexuals are the victims.



Related: Race Relations In New Zealand

There is, of course, no such thing as a white or black race. There are many different nationalities of whites, and they have done a good job throughout history of killing each other. Similarly, there are many different black tribes and Asian ethnicities who also have fought more among themselves than with others.

But all of this goes by the wayside, along with the fact that in the world the “racial minorities” are actually majorities and the “white majority” is actually a minority. There are more Chinese or Indians alone than there are white people.

But orchestrated histories are not fact-based.

The working class, designated by Hillary Clinton as “the Trump deplorables,” is now the victimizer, not the victim. Marxism has been stood on its head.

The American ruling class loves Identity Politics, because Identity Politics divides the people into hostile groups and prevents any resistance to the ruling elite. With blacks screaming at whites, women screaming at men, and homosexuals screaming at heterosexuals, there is no one left to scream at the rulers.

The ruling elite favors a “conversation on race,” because the ruling elite know it can only result in accusations that will further divide society. Consequently, the ruling elite have funded “black history,” “women’s studies,” and “transgender dialogues,” in universities as a way to institutionalize the divisiveness that protects them. These “studies” have replaced real history with fake history.



Related: The West’s NGO ‘Human Rights’ Scam

For example, it was once universally known that black slavery originated in slave wars between black African tribes. Slaves were a status symbol, but they accumulated beyond the capacity of tribes to sustain. The surplus was exported first to Arabs and then to English, Spanish, and French who founded colonies in the new world that had resources but no work force.

The socialist scholar Karl Polanyi, brother of my Oxford professor Michael Polanyi, told the story of the origin of the African slave trade in his famous book, Dahomey and the Slave Trade.

The first slaves in the new world were white. When real history was taught, this was widely understood. Movies were even made that showed that in King George III’s England, the alternative to criminal punishment was to be sold as a slave in the colonies.

Among the first New World lands to be exploited by the Europeans were the Carribean Islands, which were suitable for sugar and rice production.

The problem was that the white slaves died like flies from malaria and yellow fever. The Spanish lack of success with a work force of natives of the lands they conquered led those in search of a work force to the slave export business of the black Kingdom of Dahomey.



Related: UK Trains Or Arms Half The Countries On Its List Of Human Rights Abusers

The demand for black workers rose considerably when it was discovered that many had immunity to malaria and resistance to yellow fever. This meant that a plantation’s investment in a work force was not wiped out by disease.

The resistance of blacks to malaria is due to the protective feature of the sickle cell trait that, apparently, only blacks have. See: Protective Effect of Sickle Cell Trait Against Malaria-Associated Mortality And Morbidity

A relevant historical film is Cecil B. DeMille’s “Unconquered” starring Gary Cooper and Paulette Goddard. Here is the scene of the sentence of slavery:

The movie opens with the starring actress, a beautiful redhead, being sentence to the gallows in an English court in the 1700s. A press gang had seized her brother. In a fight that ensued a royal officer along with the brother were killed. As she was present and apparently part of the fight, she is sentenced to death on the gallows.

She protests and the judge says it is in his power to sentence her instead to be sold as a slave in the colonies. If those readers, who opened the article as soon as it was posted and perhaps clicked the link to the movie, remember the name of the movie and/or the names of the female and male stars will send an email to this website, I can probably locate the movie.

In the meantime, another movie about white English people being sold into slavery is Captain Blood, starring Errol Flynn and Olivia de Havilland, which was made in 1935. In 17th-century England, Irish doctor Peter Blood (Errol Flynn) is summoned to aid Lord Gildoy, a wounded patron who participated in the Monmouth Rebellion.



Related: So, You Thought Slavery Was Dead? Think Again

Arrested while performing his duties as a physician, he is convicted of treason against King James II and sentenced to death by the infamous Judge Jeffreys. By the whim of the king, who sees an opportunity for profit, Blood and the surviving rebels are transported to the West Indies to be sold into slavery. You can read a synopsis of the movie on Wikipedia

Slavery existed in the New World long before the United States came into existence. George Washington and Thomas Jefferson are today written off by Identity Politics as racists simply because they were born when slavery was a pre-existing institution.

Slavery had existed for many centuries prior to the Confederacy. Yet, in some accounts today one comes away with the impression that the South invented slavery.

As the tale sometimes goes, Southern racists so hated blacks that they went to Africa, captured blacks at great expense, only to return them to the South where they whipped and abused their investments to the point of death and demoralized their work force by breaking up black families, selling children in one direction and wives and husbands in the other.

This tale is not told as an occasional abuse but as the general practice. Economically, of course, it makes no sense whatsoever. But facts are no longer part of American history.



Related: The Very Short Explanation Of Everything: [The Hidden History Of Debt Slavery In The “USA”]

Northern states held slaves as well. However, the predominance of slaves were in the South. This was not because Southerners hated blacks. It was because the land in the South supported large agricultural cultivation, and there was no other work force.

The South, like the United States, inherited slavery from the work force that European colonists purchased from the black Kingdom of Dahomey.

Why wasn’t there an alternative work force to slaves? The reason is that new immigrants by moving West could take land from the native Americans and be independent as opposed to being wage earners working on someone else’s land. The Western frontier did not close until about 1900.

At the time of the War of Northern Aggression the Plains Indians still ruled west of the Mississippi River. It was Lincoln’s Northern war criminals, Sherman and Sheridan, who were sent to exterminate the Plains Indians. Ask the American natives, or what is left of them, who the racists are: the Northerners or the Southerners.

Black studies has even corrupted other aspects of history. Consider the so-called “civil war.” The name itself is an orchestration. There was no civil war. There was a War of Northern Aggression. A civil war is when two sides fight for control of the government. The South had left the union and had no interest whatsoever in controlling the government in Washington. The only reason the South fought was that the South was invaded by the North.



Related: NATO Information Operations: War Is Peace, Freedom Is Slavery

Why did the North invade the South? As was once understood by every historian and every student, Abraham Lincoln invaded the South in order, in Lincoln’s own words, expressed time and time again, “to preserve the Union.”

Why did the South leave the Union? Because it was being economically exploited by the North, which, once the North gained the ability to outvote the Southern states, imposed tariffs that benefited the North at the expense of the South.

The North needed protection from British manufact